GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND

TRAINING
Andhra Pradesh :: AMARAVATI

Globally Competitive
CURRICULUM (C-20)
For Polytechnic Diploma Courses
in Andhra Pradesh

3 YEAR (REGULAR)
DIPLOMA IN
APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION
ENGINEERING

1
 CURRICULUM -2020
(C-20)

3 YEAR (REGULAR)
DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

Andhra Pradesh :: AMARAVATI

2
 CURRICULUM -2020
( C-20 )
FOR DIPLOMA COURSES IN ANDHRA PRADESH

PREAMBLE

The proposed programme intends to develop a skilled technician to support the industries both
nationally or globally. It also helps to kindle the spirit of entrepreneurship with necessary skills and
theoretical inputs aligning with the National policy of ‘Make in India’. The programme also provides
for accomplishing higher education goals for those who wish to enrich their theoretical concepts
further.

The State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been offering Diploma
programmes to meet the above said aspirations of the stake holders: industries, students,
academia, parents and the society at large. As such, it has been the practice of SBTET, A.P., to keep
the curriculum abreast with the advances in technology through systematic and scientific analysis of
current curriculum and bring out an updated revised version at regular intervals. Accordingly the
SBTET, AP under the aegis of the Department of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh in it’s 57th
Board Meeting held on 05-02-2019 (vide item no: 18) resolved to update the Polytechnic Curriculum
C-16 with the guidance of National Institute of Technical Teachers Training & Research (NITTTR),
Extension Centre, Vijayawada (ECV), to be implemented with effect from the academic year ‘20-21.

Analysis of Curriculum C-16 (SWOT analysis) started in the month of June-2019. Feedback was
collected from all stake holders: Students, Lecturers, Senior Lecturers, Head of Sections and
Principals for all programmes for this purpose. A series of workshops with subject experts followed
in the subsequent weeks and the draft curricula were prepared for every programme. Finally, an
interactive session with representatives from industries, academia and subject experts was held on
04.01.2020 for thorough perusal and critique of draft curricula; and the suggestions received thus
received from Industrialists and academia have been recorded , validated by another set of
experienced subject teachers from the Department of Technical education for incorporation into the
Curriculum C-20.

The design of new Curricula for the different diploma programmes has thus been finalised with the
active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of Andhra Pradesh,
and duly reviewed by Expert Committee constituted of academicians and representatives from
industries. Thus, the primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce employable
technicians in the country by correlating the growing needs of the industries with relevant academic
input.

The outcome based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed throughout the design
of this curriculum is designed to meet the requirements of NBA Accreditation, too.

The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2020 (C-20) is approved by BoG of SBTET for its
implementation with effect from 2020-21.

3
Highlights of Curriculum C-20:

1. Duration of course for regular Diploma and for sandwich Diploma is 3 years and 3½ years
respectively.
2. The Curriculum is prepared in Semester Pattern. However, First Year is maintained as Year-
wise pattern.
3. 6 Months Industrial training has been introduced for 3 years Diploma Courses and 1 year
Industrial Training is introduced for 3 ½ years Sandwich Diploma courses.
4. Updated subjects relevant to the industry are introduced in all the Diploma courses.
5. CISCO course content has been incorporated into the ECE and CME programmes for
certification from CISCO in lieu of industrial training when students are unable to get
Industrial Training placement in any industry.
6. The policy decisions taken at the State and 1Central level with regard to environmental
science are implemented by including relevant topics in Chemistry. This is also in accordance
with the Supreme Court guidelines issued in Sri Mehta’s case.
7. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills which is playing a major role in
the success of Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and
acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Further as emphasized in
the meetings, Communication Skills lab and Life Skills lab are continuing for all the branches.
8. CAD specific to the branch has been given emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings
using CAD software has been given more importance.
9. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, it is found that the theory content is found to
have more weightage than the Practical content. In C-20 curriculum, more emphasis is given
to the practical content in Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical
skills.
10. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all
the subjects is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional
procedure based.
11. Curricula of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the
suggestions received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment
available in the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical
sessions are identified to confirm to the field requirements of industry.
12. An exclusive section for assessing Higher order Thinking skills (HOTS) has been introduced in
summative evaluation.

Acknowledgements:

It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of Curriculum C-20.
A series of workshops in three phases were conducted by NITTTR, AP Extension Centre,
Vijayawada involving faculty from Polytechnics, Premier Engineering Colleges & Industries to
analyze the Previous C-16 Curriculum and to design C-20 Curriculum under the guidance of Dr
C. R. Nagendra Rao, Professor & Head, NITTTR-ECV. The efforts & support extended by
NITTTR to bring out final Curriculum C-20 by incorporating needs, aspiration & expectations
of all stake holders is highly appreciated and gratefully acknowledged.

The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri M.M. Nayak, I.A.S., Special
Commissioner of Technical Education & Chairman of SBTET, AP. and Sri. G. Anantha Ramu,
I.A.S., Principal Secretary, Department of Skill Development and Training for their guidance
and valuable inputs during process of revising, modifying and updating the Curriculum C-20.
The Members acknowledge with thanks the guidance & inspiration provided by Sri. V.S. Dutt,
Secretary, SBTET, Andhra Pradesh and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education and the

4
 State Board of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh, experts from industry, academia from the
universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics who are
directly or indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.

RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-20 CURRICULUM

1. DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES

All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years or 3½
years duration of academic instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on year wise pattern in the first year, and the remaining two
or two & half years are run in the semester pattern. In respect of few courses like Diploma in
Bio-Medical course, the training will be in the seventh semester. Run-through system is
adopted for all the Diploma Courses, subject to eligibility conditions.
2. PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down in this regard
from time to time.
a) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to
appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET)
conducted by the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Andhra Pradesh,
Vijayawada.
Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will be eligible to appear for
the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
b) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra Pradesh or equivalent
examination thereto, at the time of applying for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates whose results of their
Qualifying Examinations is pending, their selection shall be subject to production of
proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or compartmentally at
the time of admission.
c) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test
(POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Andhra Pradesh
from time to time.
d) For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry qualification is 10+2,
candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for
admission into these courses.
i). D.HMCT ii).D. Pharmacy

3. MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
4. PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in
sessional work and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for
promotion etc., A Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each admitted
candidate to maintain academic records.

5
5. NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER / YEAR:
a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with the Academic Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be 90 / 180 days
excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any reason,
special arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to complete the syllabus.

6. ELIGIBILITY (ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END EXAMINATION)

a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all subjects, if he or she
has attended a minimum of 75% of working days during the year/Semester.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above and below
75%) in each semester or 1st year may be granted on medical grounds.
c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / 1st year and not
paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take their end examination of that class
and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-admission for that semester /
1st year when offered in the next subsequent academic semester/year.
f) For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:
i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90% attendance.
ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the
student shall reappear for 6 months industrial training at his own expenses.

7. READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal/ Regional Joint
Director.
a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester (Except
Industrial Training).
(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial training.
b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including D. Pharmacy
course or first year course in Engineering and Non Engineering Diploma streams).
Otherwise such cases shall not be considered for readmission for that semester / year
and are advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent eligible academic year.
The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be calculated from
the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / Semester, as
officially announced by CTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually
reportedto the class work.

8. SCHEME OF Evaluation
a) First Year
THEORY Courses: Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with examination of 3
hours duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum of 20 marks. (Sessional
marks). However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.

6
 Laboratory Courses: There shall be 40 Marks for internal assessment i.e. sessional
marks for each practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours duration carrying
60 marks. However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

THEORY Courses: End semester evaluation shall be of 3 hours duration and for a
maximum of 80 marks.
Laboratory Courses: Each Course carry 60/30 marks of 3hours duration 40/20
sessional marks.
9. INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME
a) Theory Courses: Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding sessional marks
on the dates specified. Three unit tests shall be conducted for I year students and two
Unit Tests for semesters.
Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40 marks.
For each test
The average of marks of all the test, reduced to 20 shall be taken as final sessional in any
case.
b) Practical Courses:
(i) Drawing Courses:
The award of sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as given in the following
table

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)

Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks

From the From the Average of From the Average of From the Average of
Average of Assessment of Regular TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular Class
THREE Unit Class work Exercises. work Exercises.
Tests.

All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further scrutiny by a
competent authority

(ii) Laboratory Courses:

Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during the year/
semester of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.

Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing) here after
shallbe task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets, prepared by
SBTET,AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of task/s performed by the
student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and
posted in AP, SBTET website.

7
 iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task/s based and shall be prepared
and distributed by SBTET as done in case of theory courses be prepared as per SBTET rules
in vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc., during the course
of study shall be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned
Teacher.
d)For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two examiners. External
examiner shall be appointed by the Principal in consultation with respective Head of
Section preferably choosing a qualified person from in the order of preference.
i) Nearby Industry
ii) Govt. / Semi Govt.organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways, BSNL,
APSRTC,APSEB etc.,
iii) Govt. / University Engg.College.
iv) HoDs from Govt.Polytechnic
Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in (c)
above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in respect of
drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover ( the experiments / exercise
prescribed to test various) skills like handling, manipulating, testing, trouble shooting,
repair, assembling and dismantling etc., from more than one experiment / exercise
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical Courses
are to be maintained for official inspection.

g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal Assessment and

Summative Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in the following table:
Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of

1 12 weeks 1.The faculty 120

concerned (Guide)
Learning outcomes as given in
and
the scheme of assessment
2. Training in charge
,for Industrial Training
2 22 weeks (Mentor) of the 120
industry

1.The faculty 1.Demonstration of any one

member of the skills listed in learning
3.Final concerned, outcomes 30
summative 24 week 2.HoD concerned 2.Training Report 20
Evaluation and
3.An external 3.Viva Voce
examiner 10
TOTAL 300

8
 10. MINIMUM PASS MARKS
THEORY EXAMINATION:
For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end examination marks
put together.

PRACTICAL EXAMINATION:
For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and practical end
examination marks put together. In case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for typewriting and short
hand is 45% in the end examination. There are no sessional marks for typewriting and
Shorthand Courses of D.C.C.P course.

INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:
a) Monitoring
Similar to project work each teacher may be assigned a batch of 10-15 students
irrespective of the placement of the students to facilitate effective monitoring of students
learning during industrial training.
b) Assessment
The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessments at
industry (first and second assessment) and final summative assessment at institution level
put together i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks. And also student has to secure 50% marks in
final summative assessment at institution level.

11. PROVISION FOR IMPROVEMENT

Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the Courses from First Year
to Final semester of the Diploma.

a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.

b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too within the succeeding two
examinations after the completion of Diploma. However, the duration including Improvement
examination shall not exceed FIVE years from the year of first admission.
c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or
Industrial Training assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s) is allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous Examinations hold good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished under Mal-practice in any
Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance shall deposit the original
Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also original Diploma Certificate to the Board. If there
is improvement in performance of the current examination, the revised Memorandum of marks and
Original Diploma Certificate will be issued, else the submitted originals will be returned.

12. RULES OF PROMOTION FROM 1ST YEAR TO 3,rd, 4,th 5th ,6th and 7th SEMESTERS:
A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he / she
puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e.
attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay
the examination fee.

9
 ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not
pay the first year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
Board of Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time before commencement
of 3rd semester.

iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed
by State Board of Technical Education and Training AP from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

th
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4 semester
st
b) Should not have failed in more than four Courses in 1 year

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

th
a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4 semester examination if he/she puts the
th
required percentage of attendance in the 4 semester
th
b) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4 semester examination if he/she clears at least
two Courses in third semester.
iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 5th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she

th
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 5 semester
th
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4 Semester examination.
The first backlog exam in 5th semester will be conducted only in
instant/supplementary diploma examination.

For IVC& ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester

v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pay the examination fee/ promotion fee
as prescribed by SBTET.

A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment (Seminar/Viva-voce)

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6th semester Industrial Training

10
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6th semester Industrial
Training.
th
b) should get eligibility to appear for 5 Semester Examination.

B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/ CHOT/ TT ):
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1st year examination provided he / she puts
in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e.
attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay
the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the 1st year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay
the 1st year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board
of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3 rd
semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester.
th
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4 semester exam if he/she

a). Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

b). Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

th
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4 semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training provided he / she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of Industrial
Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the required percentage of attendance,
which in this case ie.,90 % of attendance and attends for the VIVA-VOCE examination at
the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 6th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 7th semester.
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided he/she has
successfully completed both the spells of Industrial Training.

11
 A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester
th
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4 semester Examination.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester

rd
b) Should not have failed more than four backlog Courses of 3 Semester

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for this course. The
industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to one semester (6 months) after the
6th semester (3 years) of the course.
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he / she puts in
75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e. attendance after
condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay the examination fee.
rd
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3 semester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay
the first year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
rd
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3 semester.
th
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4 semester provided he/she puts the required percentage
rd
of attendance in the 3 semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate who could not
rd
pay the 3 semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
th
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 4
semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she
th
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 4 semester
st
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1 year

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
th
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5 semester provided he / she puts the required
th
percentage of attendance in the 4 semester and pays the examination fee. A candidate,
th
who could not pay the 4 semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
th
commencement of 5 semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester exam if he/she
th
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 semester.
th
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4 Semester examination.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.

rd
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 3 Semester.

12
 th
v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6 semester provided he/she puts in the required
th
percentage of attendance in the 5 semester and pays the examination fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 6th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
th
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6 semester and
th
b) should get eligibility to appear for 4 Semester Examination.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.

vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate, who
could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee prescribed by
SBTET from time to time before commencement of the 7th semester (Industrial Training).

A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial Training assessment

(Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester
Industrial Training
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester Examination.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester
Industrial Training.
th
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 5 Semester Examination.
Important Note:
Seminar/Viva-voce should not be conducted for Not-Eligible Candidates, till the candidate
gets eligibility. However, the record of internal Assessment for Industrial Training for 260
marks shall be maintained at Institution Level for all candidates and the data is to be
uploaded only for eligible candidates. For not eligible candidates the data is to be
uploaded as and when the candidate gets eligibility.

OTHER DETAILS
a) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she
will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
b) The First spell of Industrial training shall commence 10 days after the completion of
the last theory examination of 4th Semester.
c) The Second spell of Industrial training shall commence within 10 days after the
completion of first spell of Industrial training.

13
13. STUDENTS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following divisions of pass.
a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure an overall aggregate of 75%
marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate of 60% marks and above and
below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with an overall aggregate of below
60%.
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken for computing overall
rd
aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of 3 and subsequent Semesters.
ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly into diploma course at
rd rd
the 3 semester (i.e., second year) level the aggregate of (100%) marks secured at the 3
and subsequent semesters of study shall be taken into consideration for determining the
overall percentage of marks secured by the candidates for award of class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the Diploma in the
regular 3 years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent examinations, from the year of first
admission.

14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of Technical
Education and Training, AP from time to time.

15. STRUCTURE OF EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER:

I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)
a) For theory Courses:
Three unit tests for first year and two unit tests for semesters shall be conducted with a
duration of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of 40. It consists of part A and
Part B.

Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five questions first
question consists of four objective items like one word or phrase answer/filling-in the
blanks/true or false etc with one mark for each question. The other four questions are
short answer questions and carry three marks each.

Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice ie., Either/Or
type , and each question carries 8 marks.

The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters shall be reduced to 20
marks in each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.

b) For drawing Courses:

For I year:
Three unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks shall be
conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.

14
 Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question carries four
marks (4×4 marks=16 marks).

Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while the student shall
answer any three questions out of these five questions. Each question in this part carries
a maximum marks of 8, (3×8 marks=24 marks).

The sum of marks obtained in 3 unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving
at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course teacher based
on the student’s performance during regular class exercise.

For semester: Two unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40
marks shall be conducted. The sum of marks obtained in 2 unit test marks shall be
reduced to 20 marks for arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are
awarded by the Course teacher based on the student’s performance during regular class
exercise

c) For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be awarded based on
continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/workshop classes and the remaining
50% shall be based on the sum of the marks obtained by the students in two tests.

II. Summative assessment (End examination)

The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that the
Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular Course be
considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.

a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.

Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions. All questions are
to be answered and each carries 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 = 30.

Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 40 contains 5 essay type questions including Numerical
questions (without any divisions in the question), with internal choice(Either/or type),
each carrying 8 marks, i.e., Max. Marks: 5 x 8 = 40.

Section ‘C’ with Max marks of 10 contains single essay type, Higher order Thinking skills
question (HoTs)including Numerical questions, without choice (without any divisions in
the question),

Thus the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.

b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and section ‘B’.

Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in section
‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.

15
 Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The student shall answer
any four (4) questions out of the above six questions and each question carries 10
Marks, ie. 4 x 10 = 40.

c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, Each student has to pick up a
question paper distributed by Lottery System.
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 50
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks shall be distributed as
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 25
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 05
Total Max. Marks : 30
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be informed
sufficiently in advance to the candidates.

d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing)

hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of task/s performed by
the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and
posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared as per SBTET rules in
vogue.

16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued memorandum of marks
without any payment of fee. However candidates who lose the original memorandum of
marks have to pay the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
and Training, A.P. for each duplicate memo from time to time.
17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA Programmes:
Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of
studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the
award of Diploma (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date).
This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-
engineering courses.

18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA

A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½ academic years & not more
than 6 / 7 academic years.

16
 ii. He / she have completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 6 / 7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the
course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic years & not
more than 4 / 5 academic years.

ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.

Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the
Diploma within 4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their
seat in the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING& REVERIFICATION:

A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer script/s should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory Courses and
Drawing Course(s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the concerned
candidate’s address as mentioned in the application form by post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.

B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT

i.A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer script should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory Courses’ and
Drawing Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary, SBTETAP with Course
experts shall re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING
The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount them in the
already valued answer script. The variations if any will be recorded separately,
without making any changes on the already valued answer script. The marks
awarded in the original answer script are maintained (hidden).

II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of the answer
script(s) placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than 12% of
maximum marks, and if there is no change in the STATUS in the result of the

17
 candidate, such cases will not be referred to the next level ie., for 2-Tier
evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more than 12% of
maximum marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than 12% of
maximum marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than 12% of the
maximum marks on Re-verification, then the variation is considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum
marks on Re-verification and secured pass marks on re-verification, then the
status of the candidate changes to PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks
on Re-verification and if the marks secured on re-verification are still less
than the minimum pass marks, the status of the candidate remain FAIL only.
(vii) After Re-verification of valued answer script the same or change if any
therein on Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(viii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks are
revised, the fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the candidate
has to forfeit the fee amount.

Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer

script would be entertained from a candidate who is reported to have resorted
to Malpractice in that examination.

20. MAL PRACTICE CASES:

If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be
booked and the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and regulations in
vogue.
21. DISCREPANCIES/ PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc., shall be represented to the SBTETAP
within one month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be
entertained in any manner.

22. ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA

If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a duplicate to be
issued he/she should produce written evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a
duplicate from the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P., on
payment of prescribed fee and on production of an affidavit signed before a First Class
Magistrate (Judicial) and non-traceablecertificate from the Department of Police. In case of
damage of original Diploma Certificate, he / she may obtain a duplicate certificate by
surrendering the original damaged certificate on payment of prescribed fee to the State
Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.
In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year from the date
of issue of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty prescribed by the SBTET AP
from time to time.

18
23. ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the
candidates who intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.

24.SPECIFIC CHANGES INCORPORATED IN PRESENT CURRICULUM C-20 BRANCH: EIE

All the Subjects in earlier curriculum are reviewed and the following specific changes are
discussed and incorporated.

(i) In course AEI-105-Electronic Components & Devices, the following topic is incorporated as
suggested by the expert academician is definition of polarisation in dielectric material
properties.
(ii) In course AEI-108-Electrical wiring, Electronic components and Devices Lab ,the following
topics incorporated
(i)DPST switch
(ii)Use of fuse and variac
(iii) In course AEI-302-Electronic Circuits, the PSPICE software introduced for simulation of
circuits.
(iv) In course AEI-311-Programming in C Lab changed as AEI-311-Programming in C and MAT Lab
with incorporation of MAT Lab.
(v) In course AEI-409-Microcontrollers lab, Kiel software is introduced.
(vi) In course AEI-405- Industrial Electronics, Power electronics, Inverters, UPS and SMPS are
incorporated.
(vii) In course AEI-501-IMST, the personal protective equipment & quality control topics are
introduced.

(viii)AEI-510 –Field practices is incorporated in V semester.

(ix)AEI-511-Project work is incorporated in V semester.

25. GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any
time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students,
for whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent
authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training,
AP are within the jurisdiction of Vijayawada.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET, A.P is final.

19
 C-20 Curriculum for DAEIE
With Training

VISION

To constantly strive to make this department a universal level

Polytechnic in Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering.

MISSION

M1 To provide high quality education which inspire the students to realize their aspiration
and potential.

M2 To enhance knowledge, create passion for learning, foster innovation and nurture talents
towards serving the society and the country.

M3 To encourage faculty members to update their knowledge and carryout advanced study
in cutting edge technologies.

M4 To provide a competitive learning environment, through a need based curriculum

designed in collaboration with industry, conducive for high quality education
emphasising on transfer of knowledge and skill development essential for the profession
and the society as well.

Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

The major objectives of the Diploma in Applied Electronics and
Instrumentation Engineering are, to prepare students

PEO1 For employment in the core industrial/manufacturing sector.

PEO2 For employment in research and development organizations.
PEO3 For graduate studies in engineering and management.
PEO4 For entrepreneurship in the long run.

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

The students, after undergoing the Diploma in Applied Electronics and Instrumentation
Engineering,

PO1. Basic and discipline specific knowledge: Apply knowledge of basic mathematics, science
and engineering fundamentals and engineering specialization to solve the engineering
problems.
PO2. Problem analysis: Identify and analyse well-defined engineering problems using codified
standard methods
PO3. Design/Development of solutions: Design solutions for well-defined technical problems
and assist with the design of systems components or processes to meet specified needs

20
 PO4. Engineering tools, Experimentation and Testing: Apply modern engineering tools and
appropriate technique to conduct standard tests and measurements.
PO5. Engineering practices for society, sustainability and environment: Apply appropriate
technology in context of society, sustainability, environment and ethical practices.
PO6. Project Management: Use engineering management principles individually, as a team
member or a leader to manage projects and effectively communicate about well defined
engineering activities.
PO7. Life-long learning: Ability to analyse individual needs and engaging updating in the
context of technological changes.

Program Specific Outcomes (PSOs):

The students of Applied Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (AEIE) will be able to:
PSO1: Apply the fundamentals of electrical, electronic, computer, mathematics, science and
engineering knowledge to identify, design, develop and investigate complex problems of electrical
and electronic circuits, electronic process instrumentation, measurement and process control field.

PSO2: Apply appropriate technique and modern engineering hardware and software tools to design,
develop, measure and control the electronic and instrumentation system to engage in life-long
learning and work efficiently as an individual and in a multidisciplinary team.

PSO3: Explainthe impact of professional behaviour and ethics and effective communication with
engineering community and the society.

21
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS

CURRICULUM-20

FIRST YEAR

Instruction
periods/ Scheme of Examination
week
Subject Total
End
Code Periods
Name of the Subject Duration Sessional Exa Total
Practicals /year
Theory (hours) Marks m Marks
Marks

THEORY

AEI-101 English 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

AEI-102 Mathematics - I 5 - 150 3 20 80 100

AEI-103 Engineering Physics 4 - 120 3 20 80 100

Engineering
Chemistry &
AEI-104 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Environmental
Studies
Electronic components
AEI-105 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
and devices
Basic Electrical
AEI-106 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Engineering
PRACTICAL

AEI-107 Engineering Drawing - 6 180 3 40 60 100

Electrical Wiring,
6
AEI-108 Electronic components - 180 3 40 60 100
& Devices Lab
109-A Physics Lab - 1.5 45 20 30 100
AEI-109 3(1.5+1.5)
(50+50)
109-B Chemistry Lab 1.5 45 20 30
Computer
AEI-110 Fundamentals - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Lab
TOTAL 24 18 1260 - 280 720 1000

AEI- 101, 102, 103, 104, 107, 109, 110 common with all branches.

22
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS

CURRICULUM-20

III SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period / week Total
Subject
Name of the Subject Periods
Code End
/semes Duration Sessional Total
Practicals ter Exam
Theory (hours) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY

AEI-301 Mathematics – II 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

AEI-302 Electronic circuits 4 60 3 20 80 100

AEI-303 Digital Electronics 5 75 3 20 80 100

Electronic Measuring
AEI-304 4 60 3 20 80 100
Instruments

5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-305 Process Instrumentation

AEI-306 Programming in C 5 75 3 20 80 100

PRACTICAL

AEI-307 Electronic circuits Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100

AEI-308 Digital Electronics Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100

Electronic Measuring
AEI-309 3 45 3 40 60 100
Instruments Lab
Process Instrumentation
AEI-310 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
Programming In C and
AEI-311 3 45 3 40 60 100
MATLAB

TOTAL 27 15 630 - 320 780 1100

AEI-301 common with all branches

23
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS

CURRICULUM-20

IV SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods/week
Subject Total
Name of the Subject
Code Periods
/semester Duration Sessional EndExam Total
Theory Practicals
(hours) Marks Marks Marks

THEORY
Engineering Mathematics
AEI-401 3 - 45 3 20 80 100
– III
5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-402 Linear Integrated Circuits
Micro Controllers and
5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-403 Applications

Process control 5 75 3 20 80 100

AEI-404

4 60 3 20 80 100
AEI-405 Industrial Electronics

Analytical 5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-406
Instrumentation
PRACTICAL
Linear IC Applications
AEI-407 and e-CAD 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
AEI-408 Communication Skills 3 45 3 40 60 100

Micro Controllers and

AEI-409 3 45 3 40 60 100
Applications Lab

AEI-410 Process control Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100

Analytical
AEI-411 3 45 3 40 60 100
Instrumentation Lab

TOTAL 27 15 630 - 320 780 1100

AEI-401,408 common with all branches.

24
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
CURRICULUM-20

V SEMESTER

Instruction
periods / week Total Scheme of Examination
Subject
Name of the Subject Periods
Code Duration Sessional EndExam Total
Theory Practicals /semester
(hours) Marks Marks Marks

THEORY
AEI-501 IM&ST 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Biomedical
AEI-502 5 75 3 20 80 100
Instrumentation
AEI-503 Control Systems 5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-504 Industrial Automation 5 75 3 20 80 100
Instrumentation in
AEI-505 4 60 3 20 80 100
Process Industries
Communication
AEI-506 4 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering
PRACTICAL

Biomedical
AEI-507 Instrumentation Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100

AEI-508 Life skills 3 45 3 40 60 100

PLC and SCADA Lab
AEI-509 3 45 3 40 60 100

AEI-510 Field Practices 3 45 3 40 60 100

Project Work
AEI-511 3 45 3 40 60 100

TOTAL 27 15 630 - 320 780 1100

AEI-508 common with all branches.

25
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS

CURRICULUM-20

VI SEMESTER

Scheme of evaluation

Scheme of evaluation
Subject
SI.No. Duration Max.
Item Nature
Marks

Assessment of
Learning
1.First
outcomes by
Assessment at
both the faculty 120
Industry (After 12
and training
Weeks)
Mentor of the
industry

Assessment of
Learning
2.Second
outcomes by
Assessment at the
both the faculty 120
Industry (After 20
Industrial and training
1 6 months weeks)
Training Mentor of the
industry

Final Summative Training Report 20

assessment at
institution level Demonstration
of any one of the 30
skills listed in
learning
outcomes

Viva Voce 10

TOTAL MARKS 300

26
GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING PROGRAMME

 Duration of the training: 6 months.

 Eligibility: As per SBTET norms

 Training Area: Students can be trained in Industry certification

 The Industrial Training shall carry maximum 300 marks

 Pass marks is 50% in assessment at industry (first and second assessment put together) and
also 50% in final summative assessment at institution level.

 Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the representative of the
industry, where the student is undergoing training and the faculty from the concerned
section in the institution.

 If the student fails to secure 50% marks in assessment at industry (first and second
assessment put together), the student should reappear for 6 months industrial training at
his/her own expenses.

 If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level,
the student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board
examination.

 Final Summative assessment at institution level is done by both internal, external examiners
and faculty members who assessed the students during Industrial Training.

 During Industrial Training the candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance.

If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student should
reappear for 6 months industrial training at his/her own expense.

27
FIRST YEAR

28
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS

CURRICULUM-20

FIRST YEAR

Instruction
periods / Scheme of Examination
week
Subject Total
End
Code Periods
Name of the Subject Duration Sessional Exa Total
Practicals /year
Theory (hours) Marks m Marks
Marks

THEORY

AEI-101 English 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

AEI-102 Mathematics - I 5 - 150 3 20 80 100

AEI-103 Engineering Physics 4 - 120 3 20 80 100

Engineering
Chemistry &
AEI-104 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Environmental
Studies
Electronic components
AEI-105 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
and devices
Basic Electrical
AEI-106 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Engineering
PRACTICAL

AEI-107 Engineering Drawing - 6 180 3 40 60 100

Electrical Wiring,
6
AEI-108 Electronic components - 180 3 40 60 100
& Devices Lab
109-A Physics Lab - 1.5 45 20 30 100
AEI-109 3(1.5+1.5)
(50+50)
109-B Chemistry Lab 1.5 45 20 30
Computer
AEI-110 Fundamentals - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Lab
TOTAL 24 18 1260 - 280 720 1000

AEI- 101, 102, 103, 104, 107, 109, 110 common with all branches.

29
 ENGLISH

Course Course No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for

Code Title Periods/Week Periods for FA SA

AEI-101 English 3 90 20 80

S. No. Unit Title No of Periods COs Mapped

1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

9 The End Point First! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4

Total Periods 90

To improve the skills of English Language use by enriching vocabulary and

learning accurate structures for effective communication.
Course Objectives
To comprehend themes for value based living in professional and personal
settings.

30
 CO No. Course Outcomes
Applies perceptions of themes related to societal responsibility of adolescents towards
CO1
their surroundings.
Demonstrates knowledge of form and function of ‘grammar items’ and use them in
CO2
both academic and everyday situations.
Demonstrates effective English communication skills with competence in listening,
CO3
speaking, reading and writing in academic, professional and everyday contexts.
Displays positivity and values of harmonious living in personal and professional spheres
CO4
as reflected through communication.

CO-PO Matrix
Course Code Course Title: English
No. of Periods: 90
AEI-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 4

Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of

POs with CO Column 1 Mapping Remarks
No. Number Percentage (1,2,3)

PO1
Not directly Applicable for English course, however activities that
PO2 use content from science and technology relevant to the
PO3 Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited for
communication in the Course.
PO4

CO1, CO2,
PO5 20 22
CO3, CO4 >50%: Level 3

CO1, CO2,
PO6 52 58 21-50%: Level 2
CO3, CO4

CO1, CO2,
PO7 18 20 Up to 20%: Level 1
CO3, CO4

Level 3 – Strongly Mapped

Level 2- Moderately Mapped
Level 1- Slightly Mapped

31
 PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7

CO 1
  

CO 2
  

CO3
  

CO 4
  

NOTE: CO-PO groups shall be fulfilled through activities that use content from science and
technology relevant to the Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited for
communication in the Course.
PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be
planned and conducted.
PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.

Blue Print of Question Paper:

S. Name of the Unit Period Weight Marks Wise Question Wise CO's
No. s age Distribution of Distribution of Mapped
Alloca Allocat Weightage Weightage
ted ed R U Ap An R U Ap An
CO1,
English for
1 8 3 1 CO2,
Employability
CO3, CO4
1 CO1,
2 Living in Harmony 8 17 3 1 * 1* CO2,
8* CO3, CO4
CO1,
3 Connect with Care 8 3 CO2,
CO3, CO4
CO1,
Humour for
4 8 3 1 CO2,
Happiness
1* CO3, CO4
14
8* CO1,
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 3 1 CO2,
CO3, CO4
CO1,
6 Preserve or Perish 9 3 CO2,
1 1 CO3, CO4
14 8*
10* * CO1,
The Rainbow of
7 8 3 CO2,
Diversity
1 CO3, CO4
New Challenges - 8*+ 1 CO1,
8 8 35 8* 4
Newer Ideas 3+3+ * CO2,

32
 3 CO3, CO4
1* CO1,
9 The End Point First! 8 CO2,
CO3, CO4
CO1,
10 The Equal Halves 8 CO2,
CO3, CO4
Dealing with 9 CO1,
11 Disasters CO2,
CO3, CO4
TOTAL 90 80 6 30 34 10 2 5 8 1

PART-A: 10 Questions 3 marks each =30 Marks All Questions are compulsory : 60 minutes
PART-B: 5 Questions 8 marks each =40 Marks Internal choice : 90 minutes
Part-C: 1 Question 10 marks =10 Marks
(Higher Order Question) No choice, one compulsory question : 30 minutes

NOTE: * indicates questions can be given from any of the corresponding lessons in the blue print.
Question Paper Pattern for Unit Tests
Part A: 16 marks: 4 questions with 1 mark each (FIB, True/false, one word/phrase, etc.)
4 questions with 3 marks each (short answer/ descriptive/ applicative questions)
Part B: 24 marks: 3 questions 8 marks each with internal choice

LEARNING OUTCOMES

1. English for Employability

1.1. Explain the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences

2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually

3. Connect with Care

3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues for everyday situations

4. Humour for Happiness

4.1. Explain the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Display reading and speaking skills

33
 4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Explain the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a preliminary
step for writing a good paragraph.

5. Never Ever Give Up!

5.1. Practice to deal with failures in life.
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as
speaking and
writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary.
5.3 Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills.

6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Explain the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events.
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment.
6.4. Write e-mails.

7. The Rainbow of Diversity

7.1. Illustrate and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
7.2. use different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations

8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas

8.1. Explain the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. List the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Explain latest innovations and get motivated

9. The End Point First!

9.1. Illustrate the importance of setting a goal in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life

10. The Equal Halves

10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing

34
11. Dealing with Disasters
11.1. Speak and write about different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster
management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. Write different kinds of reports

Textbook: INTERACT (A Textbook for I Year English) - Published by SBTET, AP

Reference Books:
Martin Hewings : Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use,Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised byN.D.V. Prasad Rao)
: English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT Books,
S. Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman : Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan

35
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION –A.P
C-20- AEI-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-1
Time: 90 minutes Max. Marks: 40
PART-A 4X4= 16 marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries FOUR Marks.
1. Rewrite / Fill in the blank as directed. Each question carries ½ Mark. (CO2)
a) Write the antonym of ‘cruel’
b) Write the synonym of ‘love’
c) Give prefix to ‘adventure’.
d) Give suffix to ‘ liberate’
e) It is _______ universal truth. (Fill in with suitable article)
f) The boy is fond ____ ice-cream. ( Fill in the blank with proper preposition)
g) He ____not like sweets. (Fill in the blank with correct primary auxiliary verb.)
h) We ________ respect our national flag. ( Fill in with a proper modal verb)
2. Rewrite the sentences as directed. Each question carries One mark. 4X1=4 Marks (CO2)
a) No other metal is so useful as iron. ( Change into superlative degree)
b) Very few students are so clever as Ramesh. ( Change into comparative degree)
c) Guess the contextual meaning of the italicized word in the following sentence.
“The CBI officer has interrogated the bank employees in connection with the scam.”
d) only sings plays Prasanth not also well but cricket. ( Rearrange the jumbled words)
3. Fill in the blanks with proper form of the verb given in brackets. 4X1 = 4 marks (CO2)
The IPSGM _________(hold) in our college last month. Nearly all the colleges in our zone
______(participate) in the event. The prizes ________ (distribute) by the district collector.
Next year, Government Polytechnic, Vijayawada __________ (conduct) the games meet.
4. Rewrite the following sentences after making necessary corrections: 4X 1= 4 Marks(CO3)
a) The police has arrested the culprit.
b) Three hundred miles are a long distance.
c) The Principal along with the Heads of Sections have visited the laboratories.
d) Either he or I is to blame.
PART-B 3X8=24 Marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions and each question carries EIGHT marks.
5. Write a dialogue of at least five turns between a shopkeeper and customer about buying a
mobile phone. (CO3)

6. Make an analysis and write a paragraph in around 100 words about your strengths and
weaknesses in learning and using English and also the measures to improve it. (CO3)

7. Write a paragraph in about 100 words on how to overcome low esteem and negativity.
(CO3, CO4)
***

36
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION –A.P
C-20-AEI-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-II
Time: 90 minutes Max. Marks: 40

PART-A 4X4= 16 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries FOUR marks.
1. Match the words in column A with their corresponding meanings in column B (CO2)
Column A Column B
a) Deserve i) continuous
b) hidden ii) protect
c) Preserve iii) worthy
d) Incessant iv) praise
v) unseen
vi) affection
2. Rewrite as directed: (CO3)
a) You ask your Mom to give you another chocolate. ( Change into a request)
b) The baby fell down and got injured. ( Change into an exclamatory sentence)
c) The match was very interesting. ( Frame a question using ‘how’)
d) Hemanth submitted his project report last week. (Frame Yes-No question)
3. Fill in the blanks with appropriate forms of verbs given in brackets: (CO2)
a) The Sun ______ (set) in the west.
b) Balu ______ (sing) for over fifty years in the films.
c) We _________ (see) a camel on the road yesterday.
d) They _______(enter) the stadium before the gates were closed.
4. Change the voice of the following: (CO2)
a) Marconi invented the radio.
b) Sravanthi has been offered a job.
c) Pragathi can type the letter.
d) The Chief Guest will be received by the Final year students.

PART-B 3X8=24 Marks

Answer all the questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks.
5. Write a letter to your younger brother motivating him to deal with failures and hurdles in life.
(CO3)
6. Write an essay in around120 words on the role of robots in the modern world. (CO3)

37
7. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow: (CO3)
The greatest enemy of mankind, as people have discovered, is not science, but war. Science
merely reflects the social forces by which it is surrounded. It was found that when there is
peace, science is constructive when there is war, science is perverted to destructive end. The
weapons which science gives us do not necessarily create war. These make war increasingly
more terrible. Until now, it has brought us on the doorstep of doom. Our main problem,
therefore, is not to curb science, but to substitute law for force, and international government
for anarchy in the relations of one nation with another. That is a job in which everybody must
participate, including the scientists. Now we are face to face with these urgent questions: Can
education and tolerance, understanding and creative intelligence run fast enough to keep us
side by side without our mounting capacity to destroy? That is the question which we shall have
to answer, one way or the other, in this generation. Science must help us in the answer, but the
main decision lies within ourselves. The hour is late and our work has scarcely begun.
a. What is the chief enemy of man?
b. What does science reflect?
c. When is science perverted?
d. What makes war more terrible?
e. Why do we need international government?
f. What are the four aspects that may stop destruction?
g. Have we really started our work to fight the problem discussed?
h. Pick the word from the passage that would mean: ‘replace with other one’
***

38
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION –A.P
C-20-AEI-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-III
Time: 90 minutes Max. Marks: 40

PART-A 4X4 = 16 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question caries Four marks.
1. Give the meaning of the word in italics: ( CO3)
a) When the girls laughed in the class, the teacher was furious.
b) He was rusticated from the school for his misbehavior.
c) Vikramaditya was a benevolent Indian King.
d) We should not show any discrimination between boys and girls.
2. Change the speech of the following: (CO2)
a) He said, “I am sorry.”
b) The teacher said to the boys, “Why are you late?”
c) Sushma said that she had submitted her report recently.
d) Pratap requested Priya to give him her pen.
3. Rewrite as directed: (CO2)
a) Though he was weak, he took the test. ( change into a simple sentence)
b) You must work hard to achieve success. ( change into a complex sentence)
c) If you run fast, you will catch the bus. ( change into a compound sentence)
d) The fog disappeared when the Sun rose. ( Split into two simple sentences)
4. Locate eight errors from the following passage and correct them. (CO2)
Once upon a time there live a king who was very kind to his people. In his council of
ministers, there is a wise man. He had a son called Sumanth who was a educated and highly
learned. Once the wise minister fall sick. All the physicists in the country could not heal him.
Then Sumanth will go in search of medicine in Himalayas. He bring the special medicinal roots
to cure his father’s sickness. Sumanth looked before his father carefully and healed him. The
king rewarded Sumanth with rich gifts.

PART- B 3X8 = 24 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions and each one carries eight marks.
5. Read the following paragraph and make notes first and then its summary. (CO3)
Astronauts are people who travel on space ships. They need to have a very clean home. They
travel far from Earth. We need clean kitchens everywhere on earth and in space. Astronauts
have to solve two problems: how to get food and how to keep their spaceship clean. Here is
how they solved the food problem. At first, the astronauts took tubes of food with them into
space. They would squeeze a tube and eat semi-liquid food. It did not taste great, but since
they did not need to take dishes or silverware with them, they had no dishes to wash.
Today’s spaceships have a bigger menu. Astronauts can eat from bowls. In fact, they take
cereal and other standard foods with them. The foods are packaged in special containers to
keep them fresh. They use knives, forks, and spoons. One unusual item on their table is a pair
of scissors. They use the scissors to open the food packages. They can eat right from the
package. They have a kitchen on the spaceship. Its oven can heat food to 170 degrees. The

39
 kitchen has water and sets of meals that come on trays. The astronauts choose their menu
before they go into space. They take a lot of food with them. The astronauts keep bread and
fresh fruits and vegetables in a special food locker. How do they keep the kitchen clean? They
do not have to worry about mice or other rodents. They make sure that there are no rodents
before the ship leaves. But sometimes mice travel on the ship. Those mice are part of
experiments. They live in cages. How do astronauts keep their trays clean? That is another
health problem the astronauts solve. They need to stay healthy in space. To carry a lot of
water to wash trays would be a lot of extra weight. They pack wet wipes in plastic bags. They
use them to clean trays. So, their kitchen is clean and they stay healthy.
6. Write an essay in about 120 words on the importance of goal setting and your short and long
term goals. (CO3,CO4)
7. Write a report about the bush fire that raged in Australia recently by using the following
clues: forest, natural disaster, wild fire, dried leaves, no rain fall, wild animals, burnt alive,
loss of flora and fauna, fire fighters, uncontrollable, moderate rains, environmental pollution,
measures to protect...etc. (CO3)

***

40
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION- A.P
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
C-20-AEI-101- ENGLISH
Time: 3hrs Max.Marks:80

PART-A 10X3=30 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries Three marks.

1. a) Fill in the blanks with suitable articles: (CO2)

I have seen _____________ European at ____________local market.
b) Fill in with proper form of adjective given in the bracket: (CO2)
China is the ___________country in the world. ( populous, more populous, most populous )
c) i) Choose the synonym from the following for the word : ‘filthy’ (CO3)
dirty / clean / hygienic / tidy
ii) Choose the antonym from the following for the word: ‘exterior’ (CO3)
external / internal / open / interior

2. a) i) Give prefix for the word: ‘popular’ (CO2)

ii) Write suffix for the word : ‘king’ (CO2)
b) He was married ______ her ______ January 2015. ( Fill in with appropriate preposition)(CO3)
c) Match the words in column A with their corresponding meanings in column B(CO2)
Column-A Column-B
i) Dynamic a) tasty
ii) Gloomy b) active
c) sad
d) proud

3. a) The old man hunted for his spectacles. ( Give the contextual meaning of the word in italics)
(CO3)
b) The committee / have submitted / its report / to the President. ( identify the part which contains an
error ) (CO3)
c) Recently has a scooter purchased Shanthi. ( Rearrange the jumbled words to make a meaningful
sentence.) (CO3)

4.a) Use the following primary auxiliary verb in sentence of your own: (CO2)
‘ does’
b) Fill in the blank with proper modal auxiliary verb based on the clue in the bracket: (CO2)
Harish __________ speak four languages. ( ability)
c) Rakesh wants two hundred rupees from his father. (Write the sentence how he requests his Father)
(CO2)
5. Fill in the blanks with suitable form of the verb given in brackets:(CO2)
a) He ______ (go) for a walk daily.
b) The bus ________ (arrive) just now.
c) We _______ (live) in Chennai since 2005.

41
6. Change the voice of the following sentences: (CO2)
a) English is spoken all over the world.
b) They watched a movie yesterday.
c) The Chief Minister will inaugurate the exhibition.

7. a) It is a beautiful rainbow. ( Change into an exclamatory sentence) (CO3)

b) C.V. Raman won the Nobel Prize in 1930. ( Frame a question using ‘When’) (CO3)
c) He can swim across the river. ( change into ‘Yes / No’ question ) (CO3)

8. Change the speech of the following: (CO2)

a) He said, “I will go to Delhi tomorrow.”
b) Ravi said to Ashok, “ Where are you going?”
c) She told him to mind his own business.

9. Rewrite as directed: (CO2)

a) In spite of being busy he attended the meeting. ( Rewrite the sentence using ‘though’ )
b) She is poor. She is honest. ( combine the two sentences using ‘but’)
c) On seeing the tiger, he climbed a tree. ( split into two simple sentences)

10. Rewrite the following sentences after making necessary corrections: (CO2)
a) We have gone to picnic yesterday.
b) Suresh watched T.V when I went to his house.
c) They left Gujarat before the earthquake occurred.

PART-B 5X8=40
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks.
11. Write a paragraph in about 100 words on what you do daily. (CO3,CO4)
OR
Write a paragraph in about 100 words on the uses and misuses of social media.

12. Construct a dialogue of at least five turns between an American and you about places worth
visiting in your city. (CO3,CO4)
OR
Compose a dialogue of at least five turns between two friends, one favouring homemade food
and the other, fast foods.

13. Write a letter to your parents about your preparation for year-end examinations. (CO3,CO4)
OR
Write a letter to the editor of a newspaper about the inconvenience caused due to loud
speakers in your area.

14. Write an essay in about 120 words on measures to prevent water pollution.
OR
Write an essay in about 120 words on importance of gender equality.

42
15. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow: (CO3)
A farmer in ancient China had a neighbour who was a hunter, and who owned ferocious and
poorly trained hunting dogs. They jumped over the fence frequently and chased the farmer's
lambs. The farmer asked his neighbour to keep his dogs in check, but this fell on deaf ears. One
day the dogs again jumped the fence, attacked and severely injured several of the lambs.
The farmer had had enough, and went to town to consult a judge who listened carefully to
the story and said: "I could punish the hunter and instruct him to keep his dogs chained or lock
them up. But you would lose a friend and gain an enemy. Which would you rather have, friend
or foe for a neighbour?" The farmer replied that he preferred a friend. “Alright, I will offer you a
solution that keeps your lambs safe, and which will keep your a neighbour a friend." Having
heard the judge's solution, the farmer agreed.
Once at home, the farmer immediately put the judge's suggestions to the test. He took three
of his best lambs and presented them to his neighbour's three small sons, who were beside
themselves with joy and began to play with them. To protect his son's newly acquired
playthings, the hunter built a strong kennel for his dogs. Since then, the dogs never again
bothered the farmer's lambs. Out of gratitude for the farmer's generosity toward his sons, the
hunter often shared the game he had hunted with the farmer. The farmer reciprocated by
sending the hunter the cheese he had made. Within a short time the neighbours became good
friends.
a) What kind of dogs does the neighbor have?
b) When
c) the judge?
d) What did the neighbour’s sons do with the gifts they received?
e) How did the dogs stop bothering the farmer’s lambs?
f) What items are exchanged happily between the two neighbours?
g) Pick the word from the passage that did the farmer consult the judge?
h) What would be the consequence if the judge punished the neighbor?
i) What was the solution suggested by would mean: ‘a closed shelter for dogs’.
OR
Read the following short poem and answer the questions that follow:
Crisp in the winter’s morning,
Softly all through the night,
What is this without warning,
Falling and white?

I have never seen snow,

But I can imagine it quite –
Not how it tastes, but I know,
It falls and is white.

One morning I’ll open the door,

To bring in the morning’s milk,
And all around there’ll be snow –
Fallen and still.

43
 How I’ll roll in the stuff!
How I’ll tumble and spin!
Until the neighbours cry,
Enough!And send me back in.

Q. 1. What is the poem about?

2. How does snow fall?
3. Did you ever touch snow? How did you feel?
4. a) Pick the word from the poem that means ‘slip and fall’
b) Write the antonym for the word ‘soft’

SECTION – C 1X10=10 Marks

16. Write a report on the blood donation camp organized by International Red Cross Society in your
college. Use the following clues: date, time, place, arrangements, donors, equipment, doctors,
response, sponsors, snacks, volunteers, help others, save lives…etc.

***

44
 Engineering Mathematics-I
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Code Periods/week periods FA SA

Engineering
AEI-102 5 150 20 80
Mathematics-I

S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

1 Algebra 31 CO1

2 Trigonometry 44 CO2

3 Co-ordinate Geometry 23 CO3

4 Differential Calculus 33 CO4

5 Applications of Differentiation 19 CO4, CO5

Total Periods 150

Course Objectives (i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-Ordinate
Geometry to real-time problems in engineering.
(ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of Differential Calculus in
engineering applications.

CO1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve

problems on matrices.

CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions,

their inverses and complex numbers.

Course Outcomes CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and
conic sections in coordinate system.

CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.

CO5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using

differentiation.

45
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
Learning Outcomes
UNIT - I
C.O. 1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on matrices.
L.O. 1.1 Define Set, ordered pairs and Cartesian product - examples.
1.2 Explain Relations and functions – examples
1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions – simple examples.
1.4 Classify types of functions (into, many-to-one, one-one, onto and bijective).
1.5 Define inverse functions - examples.
1.6 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
1.7 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned
below into partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii )
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )
f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x  a 2 )(bx  c)
2
( x  a )( x 2  b2 )
2 2

1.8 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.

1.9 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order square
matrices).
1.10 Compute sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the
properties of these operations such as associative, distributive, commutative
properties with examples and counter examples.
1.11 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties;
1.12 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples Resolve a
square matrix into a sum of a symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices and
provide examples.
1.13 Define determinant of a square matrix, minor, co-factor of an element of a
3x3 square matrix with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix
using Laplace expansion formula. State and apply the properties of determinants to
solve problems.
1.14 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative inverse of a
matrixand list properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint and multiplicative
inverse of a square matrix.
1.15 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule and matrix
Inversion method.

UNIT - II
C.O.2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses and complex
numbers.
L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle.
2.2 List the values of trigonometric ratios at specified values.
2.3 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions.
2.4 Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.
2.5 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B),
tan(A±B) and cot(A±B).

46
 2.6 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150,
cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
2.7 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.
2.8 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
2.9 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles
A/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
2.10 Derive useful allied formulas like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.
2.11 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

2.12 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two

trigonometric ratios into a product and vice versa, examples on these formulae.
2.13 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product
of three or more terms.
2.14 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an
appropriate domain and range.
2.15 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and
ranges.
2.16 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given
A= sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions
with examples.
2.17 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like

sin-1x+cos-1 x = etc.
2
1 1 1  x y 
2.18 Apply formulae like tan x  tan y  tan   , where x  0, y  0, xy  1 etc.,
 1  xy 
to solve Simple problems.
2.19 Explain what is meant by solutions of trigonometric equations and find the
general solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.
2.20 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0, a cos x + b sin x=c etc., and
problems using simple transformations.
2.21 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
2.22 Explain the formulae for sin A/2, cos A/2, tan A/2 and cot A/2 in terms of semi-
perimeter s and sides a,b,c and solve problems.
2.23 List various formulae for the area of a triangle.
2.24 Solve problems using the above formulae.
2.25 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
2.26 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
2.27 Define complex number, its modulus , conjugate and list their properties.
2.28 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
2.29 Define amplitude of a complex number.
2.30 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude
(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form with examples.
2.31 Write DeMoivre’s theorem (without proof) and illustrate with simple examples.

47
 UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry

C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections in coordinate
system.

L.O. 3.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope form, slope-
intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form or perpendicular
form.
3.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms.
3.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of
two non parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
3.4 Define locus of a point and define a circle.
3.5 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
3.6 Find the equation of a circle given (i) centre and radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non collinear points.
3.7. Define a conic section.
3.8 Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic with
illustrations.
3.9 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given.
3.10 Explain the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in standard forms
whose axes are along co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on above.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

C.O.4Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.

L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f ( x)  l and state the
xa
properties of limits.
f ( x) f ( x)
4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type lim and lim
x l g ( x) x  g ( x )

xn  an sin x tan x a x 1
4.3 Mention the Standard limits lim , lim , lim , lim ,
xa x  a x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x
1
ex 1
x
 1
lim , lim (1  x) x , lim 1   (without proof) and solve the problems
x 0 x x 0 x   x
using these standard limits.
4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval
with some examples whether a given function is continuous or not.
4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle
as
f ( x  h)  f ( x) and also provide standard notations to denote the
lim
h 0 h
derivative of a function.
4.6 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
4.7 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x,
tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
4.8 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle .
4.9 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.

48
 4.10 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples.
4.11 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples using the
Trigonometric transformations.
4.12 Explain the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another
function and also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
4.13 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.
4.14 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with
examples.
4.15 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with
examples like [f(x)]g(x).
4.16 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third
order with examples.
4.17 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and
difference between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
4.18 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n.
4.19 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple
problems.

C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.

L.O. 5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the
curve y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
5.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the
equation of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
5.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on
the curve y=f(x) .
5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the
velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
5.5 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities
like volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
5.6 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
5.7 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or
decreasing with illustrative examples.
5.8 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function
of single variable- simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
5.9 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes
etc.
5.10 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations in simple
problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-III completed

49
 CO/PO – Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 2 1 2 3 2 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1

CO3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 1

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Avg 3 2.6 2.5 2 3 2.4 2

3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 =moderately mapped (Medium), 1 =slightly mapped (Low)

Note:
PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be
planned and conducted.
PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.
PSO1: An ability to Explainthe concepts of basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in
various areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and
electronic systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.
PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.

PO- CO – Mapping strength

PO no Mapped with CO periods addressing PO in Level Remarks

CO no column I
(1,2 or 3)
No %

1 CO1, CO2, 150 100% 3

CO3,CO4,CO5
>40% Level 3
2 CO1, CO2, 138 92% 3
Highly

50
 CO3,CO4,CO5 addressed

3 CO1, CO2, 133 88.6% 3

CO3,CO4,CO5
25% to 40%
4 CO1, CO2, 120 80% 3 Level 2
CO3,CO4,CO5 Moderately
addressed
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, 150 100% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5

PSO 2 CO1, CO2, 135 90% 3 5% to 25%

CO3,CO4,CO5 Level 1 Low
addressed
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, 125 83.3% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5

<5% Not
addressed

COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES

COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Relations and Functions:
Define Set, Ordered pairs, Cartesian product, Relations, functions, domain & range of
functions. Explain types of functions (in-to, many-to-one, one-one, onto and bijective)
and inverse functions – examples.

2. Partial Fractions:
Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational fractions
in to their partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.

f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii)
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )
f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x  a 2 )(bx  c)
2
( x  a )( x 2  b2 )
2 2

3. Matrices:
Definition of a matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-equality of two
matrices, sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix-
Symmetric, skew symmetric matrices-Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a
square matrix-Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants. Singular and non-singular
matrices-Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix- examples-System of linear
equations in 3 variables-Solutions by Cramers’s rule and Matrix inversion method-
examples.

51
 Unit-II
Trigonometry

4. Trigonometric ratios:
Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at specified
values, draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric functions.
5. Compound angles:
Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B),cot(A±B),and related identities with problems.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:
Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A, 3A and sub multipleangles A/2
with problems.
7. Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa simple problems
8. Inverse trigonometric functions:
Definition, domains and ranges-basic properties- problems.
9. Trigonometric equations:
Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric equations:
sinx =k , cosx= k, tanx =k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic equations,
equations involving usage of transformations- problems.
10.Properties of triangles:
Relation between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and
projection rule-area of a triangle- problems.
11. Hyperbolic functions:
Definitions of hyperbolic functions, identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic
functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
12. Complex Numbers:
Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex number,
Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitue (polar) form ,
Exponential form (Euler form) of a complex number- Problems. DeMoivre’s theorem.

UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry

13 Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between lines, perpendicular distance
from a point, distance between parallel lines-examples.
14. Circle: locus of a point, Circle, definition-Circle equation given (i) centre and radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter (iii) centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three
non collinear points - general equation of a circle – finding centre, radius.
15. Definition of a conic section, equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity
are given. properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.

UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus:
16. Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits -Simple Problems-
Continuity of a function at a point- Simple Examples only.

52
17. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle)- different notations-derivatives of
elementary functions- problems. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar
multiplication of functions - problems. Chain rule, derivatives of inverse trigonometric
functions, derivative of a function with respect to another function, derivative of
parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic, implicit functions, logarithmic
differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives - examples –
functions of several variables - partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple problems.

UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives:
18. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and normal to a curve at
any point. Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and subnormal to the curve at any
point - problems.
19. Physical applications of the derivative – velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate
measure –Problems.
20. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing
functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to
applications of maxima and minima.
21. Using the concept of derivative of a function of single variable, find the absolute error,
relative and percentage errors and approximate values due to errors in measuring.

Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed
by SBTET, AP.

Reference Books:
1. Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand&Co.
2. Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4 th Edition,
Schaum’s Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
4. Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus, Schaum’s Series

53
 Engineering Mathematics – I
Blue print

S. Chapter/ No of Periods Weig Marks wise distribution Question COs

No htag of weight age mapp
Unit title e wise distribution ed

Allot of weight age

ted

Unit - I : Algebra Theory Practice R U Ap An R U Ap An

1 Relations and 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO 1
Functions

2 Partial Fractions 3 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO 1

3 Matrices and 10 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO 1
Determinants

Unit - II : Trigonometry

4 Trigonometric 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Ratios

5 Compound 3 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Angles

6 Multiple and 4 4 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2

Submultiple
angles

7 Transformations 3 3 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2

8 Inverse 3 2
Trigonometric
Functions

9 Trigonometric 3 2 8 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 CO2
Equations

10 Properties of 3 2
triangles

11 Hyperbolic 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Functions

12 Complex 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Numbers

54
 Unit III : Co-ordinate Geometry

13 Straight Lines 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO3

14 Circle 3 2 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO3

15 Conic Sections 8 4

Unit – IV : Differential Calculus

16 Limits and 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO4

Continuity

17 Differentiation 17 10 14 3 11 0 0 1 2 0 0 CO4

Unit - V : Applications of Differentiation

18 Geometrical 3 2 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 1 CO5
Applications

19 Physical 2 2
Applications

20 Maxima and 3 4
Minima

21 Errors and 2 1
Approximations

Total 89 61 80 15 39 16 10 5 8 2 1

R: Remembering Type : 15 Marks

U: understanding Type : 39 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 16 Marks
An: Analysing Type : 10 Marks

Engineering Mathematics – I
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test-I From L.O. 1.1 to L.O. 2.11

Unit Test-II From L.O. 2.12 to L.O. 3.10

Unit Test-III From L.O.4.1 to L.O. 5.10

55
 Unit Test I C –20, AEI -102
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-I
Sub Code: AEI-102
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40
Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each.
1. Answer the following.

a. If f ( x)  x 2 and domain  1, 0,1 , then find range.

(CO1)

1 2 
b. If A    , then find 3A. (CO1)
3 4 
c. Write the value of Sin1200 (CO2)

d. Write the formula for tan 2A in terms of tan A (CO2)

2. If f : R  R is defined by f ( x)  3x  5 , then prove that f ( x) is onto. (CO1)

1 3   2 4
3. If A    , B  then find 2 A  3B (CO1)
 4 9   3 1 
3
Prove that Sin 45  Sin 15 
2 0 2 0
4. (CO2)
4
sin 2 A
5. Prove that  cot A (CO2)
1  cos 2 A

56
 Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.
2x
6. A) Resolve into partial fractions. (CO1)
( x  1)( x  3)
or
x4
B) Resolve into partial fractions .(CO1)
x  3x  2
2

7. A) Using Cramer’s rule to solve

x  y  z  2, 2 x  3 y  4 z  4,3x  y  z  8 (CO1)
or

bc bc 1
B) Prove that ca c  a 1  (a  b)(b  c)(c  a) (CO1)
ab a  b 1

 1 2 2 
8. A)

Find the adjoint of Matrix 1 3 5
 (CO1)
 
 2 7 4 
or

 2 3 4  3 1 5
B)
   
If A  5 7 9 ; B  2 1 4 , find AB and BA and verify if AB  BA .
   
 2 1 3   0 3 1 
(CO1)

-o0o-

57
 Unit Test II C–20, AEI -102
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-I
Sub Code: AEI- 102
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40
Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each

1. Answer the following.

CD CD
a. sin C  sin D  2cos   sin   : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
 2   2 
b. If z  2  3i , then find z (CO2)

e x  e x
c. sinh x  : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
2
d. Write the eccentricity of rectangular hyperbola. (CO3)

2. Express (3  4i)(7  2i) in terms of a  ib (CO2)

3. Find the perpendicular distance from (1,1) to the line 2 x  3 y  1  0 (CO3)

4. Find the angle between lines 2 x  y  3  0 and x  y  2  0 (CO3)

5. Find the centre and radius of the circle x 2  y 2  2 x  4 y  4  0 (CO3)

58
 Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.

sin 2  sin 4  sin 6

6. A) Prove that  tan 4 . (CO2)
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6
or
1 1 1 
B) Prove that tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  (CO2)
2 5 8 4

7. A) Solve 2sin 2   sin   1  0 (CO2)

or
c a
B) In any ABC , If B  600 then  1 (CO2)
ab bc

8. A) Find the equation of circle with (2,3) and (6,9) as the end points of diameter and
also find centre and radius of circle. (CO3)
or
B) Find the equation of ellipse whose focus is (1, 1) , directrix is x  y  3  0 and
eccentricity is1/2. (CO3)

-o0o-

59
 Unit Test III C –20, AEI -102
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-I
Sub Code: AEI-102
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each

1. Answer the following.

x2  1
a. Find lim (CO4)
x 1 x5
sin 2
b. lim  2 : State TRUE/FALSE (CO4)
 0 

c.
d
dx
 3 tan 1 x   ? (CO4)

d. Formula for percentage error in x is _________ (CO5)

x5  32
2. Evaluate lim (CO4)
x 2 x2  4
3. Find the derivative of 3tan x  4log x  7 x w.r.t. x (CO4)

4. Differentiate x 2 sin x w.r.t. x (CO4)

2x  3
5. Find the derivative of (CO4)
3x  4

60
 Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.

1 2x  1  2 x 
6. A) Find the derivative of sin  2 
w.r.t. tan  2 
(CO4)
 1 x   1 x  .
or
dy
B) Find if y  xcos x (CO4)
dx
x4  y 4
7. A) Verify Euler’s theorem when u ( x, y )  (CO4)
x y
or

B) Find the equation of tangent and normal to the curve 3 y  x 2  6 x  17 at (4,3)

(CO5)

8. A) Circular patch of oil spreads on water and the area is growing at the rate of
8 sqcm / min . How fast is the radius increasing when radius is 5cm . (CO5)
or

B) Find the maxima and minima values of f ( x)  x3  6 x 2  9 x  15. (CO5)

-o0o-

61
 END-EXAM MODEL PAPERS
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS AEI- 102

TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- I MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

    
1. If A  0, , , ,  and f : A  B is a function such that f ( x)  cos x, then find
 6 4 3 2

the range of f . CO 1

x
2. Resolve the function into partial fractions. CO1
 x 1 x  2
3 9 0  4 0 2
3. If A    and B   , find A  B and A  B.
4 
CO1
1 8  2 7 1

4. Show that cos16  sin16  tan 610.

0 0
CO2
cos160  sin160

sin 2
5. Prove that  cot .
1  cos2

CO2

 1 i 
6. Find the modulus of the complex number  . CO2
 2i 

7. Find the distance between parallel lines x  2 y  3  0 and x  2 y  8  0. CO3

8. Find lim sin77 x . CO4

x0 sin11x

9. Differentiate 3tan x  4log x  7 x2 w.r.t. x. CO4

10. If x  at 2 , y  2at , then find dy . CO4

dx

62
 PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

3 3 4
11 A) Find the inverse of the matrix  2 3 4  . CO1

0 1 1 
Or
B) Solve the system of equations x  y  z  6, x  y  z  2 and 2 x  y  3z  9 by
Cramer’s rule. CO1
12 A) If cos x  cos y  3 and cos x  cos y  2 , then show that CO2
5 7
 
21tan    
x y x y
 10cot    0.
 2   2 
Or
B) If tan x  tan y  tan z   then show that x  y  z  xyz.
1 1 1
CO2
13 A) Solve 3cos  sin 1. CO2
Or
B) In any  ABC, Show that cot A  cot B  cot C  s .
2
CO2
2 2 2 
14 A) Find the equation of the circle with  4,2  and 1,5 as the two ends of its
diameter and also find its centre and radius. CO3
Or
B) Find the centre, vertices, equation of axes, lengths of axes, eccentricity, foci, equations
of directrices and length of latus rectum of the ellipse 4x2 16 y2  1. CO 3
15 A) Find the derivative of sin 1  2 x 2  w.r.t. tan 1  2 x 2  CO4
 1 x   1 x 
Or
  y 3  then prove that u
3
u
B) If u  tan 1  x , x y  sin 2u. CO4
 x  y  x y

PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M
16. The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them so that the sum of their squares is minimum.
CO5

***

63
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS AEI- 102
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- II MAX.MARKS : 80M
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

1. If f : R  R is a bijective function such that f ( x)  ax  b, then find f 1 ( x). CO1

1
2. Resolve the function into partial fractions.
 x  1 x  2 CO1

 0 1 3 
3. If A   1 0 7  is a skew-symmetric matrix, find the value of x.
  CO1
 3 x 0 

0 0
4. Find the value of sin 2 82 1  sin 2 22 1 . CO2
2 2

cos3 A
5. Prove that  cos A. CO2
2cos 2 A  1

6. Find the conjugate of the complex number 3  2i  . 4  7i  CO2

7. Find the equation of the line passing through the points 1,2  and  3, 4  . CO3

8. Find lim x  32 .
5

x2 x2 CO4

9. Differentiate x  sec x  log x w.r.t. x. CO4

10. If u( x, y)  x3  3axy  y 3 , then find u and u . CO4

x y

64
 PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

1 1 1
11 A) Show that a b c   a  b  b  c  c  a  . CO1
2 2 2
a b c

Or
B) Solve the system of equations x  2 y  3z  6,3x  2 y  4z  5 and x  y  z  1 using

matrix inversion method. CO1

sin 2  sin 4  sin 6

12 A) Prove that  tan 4 . CO2
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6
Or
1 1 1 1 
B) Prove that tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  . CO2
3 5 7 8 4
13 A) Solve 2cos2   3cos   1  0. CO2
Or
B) In any  ABC, Show that a 3
cos( B  C )  3abc. CO2
14 A) Find the equation of the circle passing through the points  0,0 ,  6,0 and  0,8 . CO3

Or
B) Find the equation of the rectangular hyperbola whose focus is 1,2  and directrix is

3x  4 y  5  0. CO3

15 A) If sin y  x sin(a  y), then prove that dy  sin (a  y ) .

2

dx sin a CO4

Or
B) If y  tan 1 x, then prove that (1  x2 ) y2  2 xy1  0. CO4
PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M
16 Show that the semi-vertical angle of the cone of maximum volume and of given slant
height is tan 1 2. CO4
***

65
 Engineering Physics

Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods per Periods
week

AEI-103 Engineering 4 120 20 80

Physics

S. No Unit Title/Chapter No of Periods COs Mapped

1 Units and Dimensions 08 CO1

2 Elements of Vectors 12 CO1
3 Dynamics 12 CO2
4 Friction 10 CO2
5 Work, Power and Energy 12 CO3
6 Simple harmonic motion 12 CO3
7 Heat and Thermodynamics 12 CO4
8 Sound 10 CO4
9 Properties of matter 10 CO5
10 Electricity and Magnetism 12 CO5
11 Modern physics 10 CO5

Total 120

Course Title: Engineering Physics

Course Objectives 1. To familiarize with the concepts of Physics involved in the process
of various Engineering, Industrial and Daily life Applications.
2. To Explainand apply the basic principles of physics in the field of
engineering and technology to familiarize certain natural
phenomenon occurring in the day to day life
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises

66
 Explain S.I units and dimensions of different physical quantities, basic operations
CO1 among vector quantities.

Explain the motion of objects moving in one dimension and two dimensions, the
CO2 causes of motion and hindrance to the motion of the objects especially with
respect to friction.

Explain the mechanical energy of bodies like PE, KE and conservation law of
CO3 energy, the properties of simple harmonic motion.

Course Explain gas laws, ideal gas equation, Isothermal and adiabatic processes, Specific
Outcomes heats, to study the laws of thermodynamics. Causes, consequences and methods
CO4 to minimise noise pollution, explain beats, Doppler effect, Reverberation,
echoes.

Explain certain properties of solids, liquids like elastic properties, viscosity and
surface tension. Explain Ohm’s law, to study Kirchoff’s laws, to study the
principle of Wheatstone’s bridge and its application to meter bridge. To study
CO5 the magnetic force and Explainmagnetic field. To compute magnetic field
strength on axial and equatorial lines of a bar magnet. To Usemodern topics like
photoelectric effect, optical fibres, superconductivity and nanotechnology.

COS, POS, PSOS MAPPING

 POs mapping strength (as per given table)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 2 1 1

CO3 3 2 1

CO4 3 2 2 2 2

CO5 3 2 2 1 1

3 = strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped

Note:

The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:

i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visits vii)
Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussion x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books

67
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Concept of Units and dimensions

1.1 Explain the concept of Units, Physical quantity, F u n d a m e n t a l physical
quantities and D erived physical quantities
1.2 Define unit, fundamental units and derived units, State SI units with symbols
1.3 State Multiples and submultiples in SI system, State Rules of writing S.I. units, State
advantages of SI units
1.4 Define Dimensions, W r i t e Dimensional formulae of physical quantities
1.5 List dimensional constants and dimensionless quantities
1.6 State the principle of homogeneity of dimensions
1.7 State the applications and limitations of dimensional analysis
1.8 Errors in measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage error, significant
figures
1.9 Solve problems

2.0 Concept of Elements of Vectors

2.1 Explain the concept of scalars, Vectors and give examples
2.2 Represent vectors graphically, Classify the Vectors, Resolve the vectors
2.3 Determine the resultant of a vector by component method, represent a vector in
Space using unit vectors (i, j, k)
2.4 State and explain triangle law, parallelogram law, and polygon law of addition of
Vectors
2.5 Define Dot product of two vectors with examples (Work done, Power), mention the
Properties of dot product
2.6 Define cross product of two vectors with examples (Torque, Linear velocity)
Mention the properties of Cross product.
2.7 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

3.0 Concept of Dynamics

3.1 Write the equations of motion in a straight line. Explain the acceleration due to
Gravity.
3.2 Explain vertical motion of a body and derive expressions for a) Maximum Height,
b) Time of ascent, c) time of descent, and d) time of flight
3.3 Derive height of a tower when a body projected vertically upwards from the top of
a tower.
3.4 Explain projectile motion with examples
3.5 Explain horizontal projection and derive an expression for the path of a projectile in
horizontal projection
3.6 Explain oblique projection and derive an expression for it. Derive formulae for
a) Maximum Height b) time of ascent c) time of descent and d) time of flight
e) Horizontal Range, f) Maximum range
3.7 Define force, momentum, angular displacement, angular velocity, angular
acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia, torque
3.8 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

4.0 Concept of Friction

4.1 Define friction and classify the types of friction.
4.2 Explain the concept of normal reaction.
4.3 State the laws of friction.

68
 4.4 Define coefficients of friction, Angle of friction and angle of repose.
4.5 Derive expressions for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane.
(Upwards and downwards)
4.6 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
4.7 Mention the methods of minimizing friction.
4.8 Explain why it is easy to pull a lawn roller than to push it.
4.9 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.

5.0 Concepts of Work, Power, and Energy

5.1 Definet h e t e r m s W ork, Power and Energy. State SI units and dimensional
Formulae.
5.2 Define potential energy and give examples, derive an expression for potential
energy.
5.3 Define Kinetic energy and give examples, derive an expression for kinetic energy.
5.4 State and derive Work-Energy theorem.
5.5 Derive the relation between Kinetic energy and momentum.
5.6 State the law of conservation of energy and verify it in the case of a freely falling
body.
5.7 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.

6.0 Concepts of Simple harmonic motion

6.1 Define Simple harmonic motion, Give examples, state the conditions.
6.2 Explanation of uniform circular motion of a particle is a combination of two
perpendicular S.H.M.s.
6.3 Derive expressions for displacement, velocity, acceleration, Frequency, Time
period of a particle executing SHM.
6.4 Define phase of SHM.
6.5 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive expression for time period of simple
pendulum.
6.6 State the laws of motion of simple pendulum.
6.7 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.

7.0 Concept of heat and thermodynamics

7.1 Explain the concept of expansion of gases
7.2 State and explain Boyle’s and Charles laws.
7.3 Define absolute zero temperature, absolute scale of temperature
7.4 Define ideal gas and distinguish from real gas
7.5 Derive I deal gas equation. Define specific gas constant and universal gas
constant, write S.I unit and dimensional formula. Calculate the value of R.
7.6 Explain why universal gas constant is same for all gases
7.7 State and explain isothermal process a n d adiabatic process
7.8 State first and second laws of thermodynamics and state applications
7.9 Define specific heats and molar specific heats of a gas, Derive CP-CV =R
7.10 Solve t h e r e l e v a n t n u m e r i c a l problems

8.0 Concept of Sound

8.1 Concept of the sound, Wave motion. (longitudinal and transverse wave)
8.2 Distinguish between musical sound and noise.
8.3 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for intensity level of sound.
8.4 Explain causes, effects and methods of minimizing of noise pollution.

69
 8.5 Explain the phenomenon of beats state the applications.
8.6 Define Doppler effect, list the applications.
8.7 Define reverberation and reverberation time and write Sabine’s formula.
8.8 Define and explain echoes state its applications.
8.9 State conditions of good auditorium.
8.10 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.

9.0 Concepts of properties of matter

9.1 Explain the terms elasticity, stress, strain and types of stress and strain.
9.2 State and explain Hooke’s law.
9.3 Definitions of Modulus of elasticity, Young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus (K),
Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio (),
9.4 Define surface tension and give examples.
9.5 Explain Surface tension with reference to molecular theory.
9.6 Define angle of contact and capillarity and write formula for Surface Tension.
9.7 Explain the concept of viscosity, give examples, write Newton’s formula.
9.8 Define co-efficient of viscosity and write its units and dimensional formulaand
State Poiseulle’s equation for Co-efficient of viscosity.
9.9 Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
9.10 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.

10. Concepts of Electricity and Magnetism

10.1 E xplain Ohm’s law in electricity a n d w r i t e t h e f o r m u l a .
10.2 Define specific resistance, conductance and state their units.
10.3 Explain Kichoff’s laws.
10.4 ExplainWheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
10.5 Explain Meter Bridge for the determination of resistivity with a circuit diagram.
10.6 Explain the concept of magnetism. State the Coulomb’s inverse square law of
Magnetism.
10.7 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force and write the properties of
magnetic lines of force.
10.8 Derive an expression for the moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field.
10.9 Derive equations for Magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
and on the equatorial line of a bar magnet.
10.10 Solvet h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems

11.0 Concepts of modern physics

11.1 State and explain Photo-electric effect and Write Einstein‘s photo electric
Equation.
11.2 State laws of photo electric effect.
11.3 Explain the Working of photo electric cell, write its applications.
11.4 Recapitulation of refraction of light and its laws, critical angle, total Internal
Reflection.
11.5 Explain the principle and working of Optical fiber, mention different types of
Optical fiber, state the applications.
11.6 Define super conductor and super conductivity and mention examples.
11.7 State the properties of super conducting materials and list the applications.
11.8 Nanotechnology definition, nano materials, applications.

70
COURSECONTENT

1. Units and Dimensions:

Introduction, Physical quantity, Fundamental and Derived quantities, Fundamental and
Derived units, SI units, Multiples and Sub multiples, Rules for writing S.I. units, Advantages
of SI units. Dimensionsand Dimensional formulae, Dimensional constants and
Dimensionless quantities, Principle of homogeneity, Advantages and limitations of
dimensional analysis, Errors in measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage
error, significant figures, Problems.

2. Elements of Vectors:
Scalars and Vectors, Types of vectors (Proper Vector, Null Vector, Unit Vector, Equal, Negative
Vector, Like Vectors, Co-Initial Vectors, Co-planar Vectors and Position Vector).Addition of
vectors, Representation of vectors, Resolution of vectors, Parallelogram, Triangle and
Polygon laws of vectors, Subtraction of vectors, Dot and Cross products of vectors-Problems.

3. Dynamics
Introduction-Concept of acceleration due to gravity-Equations of motion for a freely falling
body and for a body thrown up vertically- Projectiles- Horizontal and Oblique projections-
Expressions for maximum height, time of flight, range-Define force, momentum, angular
displacement, angular velocity, angular acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia,
torque–problems.

4. Friction:
Introduction to friction- Causes- Types of friction- Laws of friction- Angle of repose-Angle of
friction- rough inclined plane- Advantages and disadvantages of friction-Methods of
reducing friction–Problems.

5. Work, Power and Energy:

Work, Power and Energy- Definitions and explanation- potential energy- kinetic energy-
Derivations of Potential and Kinetic energies-K.E and Momentum relation - Work-Energy
theorem- Law of Conservation of energy- Problems.

6. Simple Harmonic Motion:

Introduction- Conditions of SHM- Definition- Examples- Expressions for displacement,
velocity, acceleration, Time period, frequency and phase in SHM- Time period of a simple
pendulum- Laws of simple pendulum-seconds pendulum-Problems.

7. Heat and Thermodynamics:

Expansion of Gases, Boyle’s law, absolute scale of temperature- Charles laws- Ideal gas
equation- Universal gas constant- Differences between gas constant(r) and universal gas
constant(R),Isothermal and adiabatic processes, Laws of thermodynamics, Specific heats -
molar specific heats of a gas -Different modes of transmission of heat ,laws of thermal
conductivity, Coefficient of thermal conductivity-Problems.

8. Sound:
Sound- Nature of sound- Types of wave motion -musical sound and noise- Noise pollution –
Causes &effects- Methods of reducing noise pollution- Beats- Doppler effect- Echo-
Reverberation-Reverberation time-Sabine ‘s formula-Conditions of good auditorium-
Problems.

71
9. Properties of matter
Definition of Elasticity –Definition of stress and strain -th e u n i t s a n d d i m e n s i o n a l
f o r m u l a e f o r s t r e s s a n d s t r a i n - T he Hooke’s law-Definitions of Modulus of elasticity,
Young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus(K), Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio (), relation
between Y, K, n and (equations only no derivation)
Definition of surface tension-Explanation of Surface tension with reference to molecular
theory - Definition of angle of contact -Definition of capillarity -The formula for surface
tension based on capillarity - Explanation of concept of Viscosity - Examples for surface
tension and Viscosity - Newton’s formula for viscous force- Definition of co-efficient of
viscosity- The effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases - Poiseuille’s equation
for Co-efficient of viscosity- Th e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.

10. Electricity & Magnetism:

Ohm’s law and explanation, Specific resistance, Kirchoff’s laws, Wheatstone’s
bridge, Meter bridge, Coulomb’s inverse square law, magnetic field, magnetic lines of
force, magnetic induction field strength- magnetic induction field strength at a point on the
axial line - magnetic induction field strength at a point on the equatorial line–problems.

11. Modern Physics;

Photoelectric effect –Einstein’s photoelectric equation-laws of photoelectric effect-
photoelectric cell–Applications of photo electric effect- Total internal reflection- fiber optics-
-principle and working of an optical fiber-types of optical fibers - Applications of optical
fibers- superconductivity–applications-Nanotechnology definition, nano materials,
applications

REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy ( English version ) Intermediate physics Volume-I & 2
2. Dr. S. L. Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha Unified physics Volume 1,2,3 and 4
3. Resnick& Holiday Text book of physics Volume I
4. Dhanpath Roy Text book of applied physics
5. D.A Hill Fiber optics
6. XI & XII Standard NCERT Text Books

72
 Model Blue Print with Weightage for Blooms category and questions for chapter and Cos mapped
Marks wise Question wise
Mapped
Weight distribution of distribution of
S. Unit No of with CO
age of Weightage Weightage
No Title/Chapter Periods
marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Units and
1 08 03 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO1
Dimensions
Elements of
2 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 0 CO1
Vectors
3 Dynamics 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 * CO2
4 Friction 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO2

5 Work, Power and 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 0 CO3

Energy
Simple harmonic
6 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 * CO3
motion
Heat and
7 12 11 0 8 3 0 0 1 1 * CO4
Thermodynamics
8 Sound 10 11 0 8 3 0 0 1 1 0 CO4

9 Properties of 10 08 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO5
matter
Electricity and
10 12 14 6 0 8 0 2 0 1 0 CO5
Magnetism

11 Modern physics 10 08 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO5

*
Total 120 110 24 64 22 0 8 8 4
10

*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 3 or 6 or 7

 Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test – 1 From 1.1 to 4.9

Unit Test – 2 From 5.1 to 7.10

Unit Test – 3 From 8.1 to 11.8

 Model question paper for Unit Tests I,II,III with COs mapped

73
 UNIT TEST –I
Model Question Paper (C-20)
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (AEI-103)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks: 40

PART-A 16 Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries 4 marks and others carry 3 marks each.
(3) Answers for the Question numbers 2 to 5 should be brief and
straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) The dimensional formula of force is ___________ (CO1)

ii) Which of the following is a scalar [ ] (CO1)
a) force b) work c) displacement d) velocity
iii) We can add a scalar to a vector (Yes / No) (CO1)
iv) Friction is a self-adjusting force. [True / False] (CO2)
2. Define dot product. Give one example. (CO1)
3. A force of 150 N acts on a particle at an angle of 30° to the horizontal. Find
the horizontal and vertical components of force.(CO1)
4. Define projectile. Give two examples. (CO2)
5. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it. Explain (CO2)

PART—B 3x8=24

Instructions:(1) Answer all questions. Each question carries 8marks.

(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criteria for
evaluation is content but not the length of the answer.

6) (A)Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of resultant of two

Vectors using parallelogram law of vectors (CO1)
OR
(B) Write any four properties of dot product and any four properties of
Cross product (CO1)
7) (A) Show that path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique
Projection. (CO2)
OR
(B) Derive the expression for range and time of flight of a projectile (CO2)
8) (A) State and explain polygon law of vector addition with a neat diagram (CO1)
OR
(B) Derive the equation for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane (CO2)

***

74
 UNIT TEST –II
Model Question Paper (C-20)
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (AEI–103)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks: 40
PART –A 16 Marks
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) First question carries 4 marks and others carry 3 marks each.
(3) Answers for the Question numbers 2 to 5 should be brief and
Straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.

1) i) The value of 1000 C is equal to ___________ in Kelvin scale of temperature (CO4)

ii) Write the S.I unit of power (CO3)
iii) A simple pendulum be used in artificial satellite (Yes / No) (CO3)
iv) Specific heat of a gas is constant for all gases in nature [True / False] (CO4)
2. Derive the relation between momentum and kinetic energy (CO3)
3. A girl is swinging by sitting in a swing, how the frequency changes if she
stands in the swing (CO3)
4. Write the physical significance of universal gas constant. (CO4)
5. A body is projected in to the air in the vertically upward direction, find the
height at which its potential and kinetic energies are equal. (CO3)

PART—B 3x8=24 Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions. Each question carries 8marks.

(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criteria for
evaluation is content but not the length of the answer.

6) (A) State the law of conservation of energy and verify it in case of a freely
falling body. (CO3)
(OR)
(B) State and prove work energy theorem. (CO3)
7)(A) Define ideal simple pendulum and derive the equation for time period
of a simple pendulum (CO3)
(OR)
(B) State the conditions for S.H.M, derive the equation for velocity for a
Particle in S.H.M. (CO3)
8) (A) Define ideal gas, show that for an ideal gas the difference in specific heats is equal to
universal gas constant (CO4)
(OR)
(B) State gas laws and derive the ideal gas equation (CO4)

***

75
 UNIT TEST –III
Model Question Paper (C-20)
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (AEI–103)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks: 40
PART –A 16 Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries 4 marks and others carry 3 marks each.
(3) Answers for the Question numbers 2 to 5 should be brief and
straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.

1) i) Photo electric cell converts light energy in to __________ energy (CO5)

ii) What is elastic limit ? (CO5)
iii) SI unit of Specific resistance is ------------ (CO5)
iv) Inside a bar magnet magnetic line of force will travel from North pole to South pole
[True / False] (CO5)
2. Distinguish between Musical sound and Noise (CO4)
3. What is the effect of temperature on Viscosity of liquids and gases (CO5)
4. The values of resistances P, Q, R are 50 Ω, 10Ω, 15 Ω respectively in the
balanced condition of Wheatstone bridge, find the unknown resistance(CO5)
5. What is nanotechnology and write any two uses. (CO5)

PART—B 3x8=24 Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions. Each question carries 8marks.

(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criteria for
evaluation is content but not the length of the answer.

6) (A) Explain Surface Tension based on the molecular theory (CO5)

(OR)
(B)Define Reverberation and Reverberation Time. Derive Sabine formula
for reverberation time. (CO4)

7) (A) Derive the balancing condition of Wheatstone bridge with neat circuit
Diagram. (CO5)
(OR)
(B) Derive an expression for the magnetic induction field strength at a
point on the equatorial line of a bar magnet .(CO5)

8) (A) Explain an experiment to determine the specific resistance of a wire using meter
Bridge. (CO5)
(OR)
(B) Explain the principle and working of an optical fiber. (CO5)

***

76
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–20)
FIRST YEAR EXAMINATION
AEI–103, ENGINEERING PHYSICS

Time : 3 hours ] [ Total Marks : 80M

PART—A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple Sentences.

1. Write the dimensional formula of the following physical quantities (CO1)

(a) Velocity (b) Force (c) Angular momentum

2. Write any three properties of scalar product. (CO1)

3. Define projectile. Give two examples. (CO2)

4. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it. Explain. (CO2)

5. Define potential energy and kinetic energy (CO3)

6. For a body in simple harmonic motion velocity at mean position is 4m/s, if the time period is

3.14 s, find its amplitude. (CO3)

7. State first and second laws of thermodynamics. (CO4)

8. Write any three conditions of good auditorium (CO4)

9. Define ohmic and non-ohmic conductors. (CO5)

10. State Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism. (CO5)

77
 PART—B 8 ×5= 40
Instructions: (1) Each question carries eight marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
But not the length of the answer.

11. A) Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of the resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors. (CO1)
OR
B) Show that path of a projectile is parabola in case of oblique projection and derive
expression for maximum height. (CO2)

12. A) Derive expression for acceleration of a body sliding downwards on a rough inclined
plane. (CO2)
OR
B) Verify the law of conservation of energy in case of a freely falling body. (CO3)
13. A) Derive an expression for velocity and acceleration of a particle performing simple harmonic
Motion. (CO3)
OR
B) Define ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation. (CO4)

14. A) Two tuning forks A and B produce 4 beats per second. On loading B with wax 6 beats are
produced. If the quantity of wax is reduced the number of beats drops to 4. If the frequency
of A is 326 Hz, find the frequency of B. (CO4)
OR
B) Explain surface tension based on molecular theory. Write three examples of surface
tension. (CO5)

15. A) Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheat stone’s bridge with a neat circuit
diagram. (CO5)
OR
B) Explain principle and working of optical fibers. Write any three applications . (CO5)

PART C 1 x 10 = 10

16) Derive relationship between molar specific heat of a gas at constant pressure C p and molar specific heat
of a gas at constant volume Cv and hence show that Cp is greater than Cv. (CO4)

***

Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies

78
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods per Periods
week

Engineering
Chemistry and
AEI-104 4 120 20 80
Environmental
Studies

Unit
S.No No of Periods COs Mapped
Title/Chapter
Fundamentals of
1 18 CO1
Chemistry
2 Solutions 10 CO1
3 Acids and bases 10 CO1
Principles of
4 8 CO1
Metallurgy
5 Electrochemistry 16 CO2
6 Corrosion 8 CO2
7 Water Treatment 10 CO3
8 Polymers 12 CO4
9 Fuels 6 CO4
Chemistry in daily
10 6 CO4
life
Environmental
11 16 CO5
Studies
Total 120

 Course Objectives
Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies

1. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in the

process of various Engineering Industrial Applications.
2. To know the various natural and man-made environmental issues
Course Objectives and concerns with an interdisciplinary approach that include
physical, chemical, biological and socio cultural aspects of
environment.
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises

79
 Course outcomes
Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding, mole
CO1 H
concept, acids and bases, P metallurgical process and alloys

CO2 Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell, emf and corrosion

Explain the chemistry involved in the treatment of water by

CO3 advanced method
Course Outcomes
Synthesise of Plastics, rubber and applications of fuel
CO4 chemical compounds used in our daily life.

Explain the causes, effects and control methods of air and

CO5 water pollution and measures to protect the environment

Course code Engg. Chemistry and Environmental studies No Of periods 120

AEI-104 No of Cos;5
POs Mapped with CO CO periods addressing PO Level remarks
No in Col 1 1,2,3
NO %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3, 60 50% 3 >40% level 3 (highly
CO4,CO5 addressed) 25% to 40%
PO2 CO1,CO2 13 10.8% 1 level2(moderately
PO3 CO2,CO3 10 8.3% 1 addressed 5% to 25% level1
PO4 CO1 10 8.3% 1 (Low addressed < 5%(not
PO5 CO4,CO5 15 12.5 1 addressed)
PO6
PO7 CO4 12 10% 1

 COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 1 2 1 1

CO3 3 2

CO4 3 1 2

CO5 3 3 1

3 = strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped
Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from
the following:

80
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit vii)
Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books

 Model Blue Print with Weightage for Blooms category and questions for each chapter and COs
mapped

Marks wise Question wise

Weight distribution of distribution of
Unit No of Mapped
S.No age of Weightage Weightage
Title/Chapter Periods with CO
marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Fundamentals
1 18 19 8 8 3 1 1 1 CO1
of Chemistry
2 Solutions 10 11 0 0 8 3 1 1 CO1
3 Acids and bases 10 11 0 8 0 3 1 1 CO1
Principles of
4 8 8 8 0 0 1 CO1
Metallurgy
5 Electrochemistry 16 11 8 3 0 1 1 * CO2
6 Corrosion 8 8 0 8 0 1 CO2
7 Water Treatment 10 11 8 3 0 1 1 CO3
8 Polymers 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 * CO4
9 Fuels 6 3 3 0 0 1 CO4
Chemistry in
10 6 3 0 0 3 1 CO4
daily life
Environmental
11 16 14 3 11 0 1 2 CO5
Studies
*
Total 120 110 12 6 6 6 20 35 5 10
*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 5 or 8

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to learn out
ENGINEERINGCHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
1.0 Atomic structure
1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron, proton and neutron)
and the concept of atomic number and mass number.
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.
1.3 Explain t he s i g n i f ic a n c e o f fo u r Quantum numbers.
1.4 Explain 1 . Aufbau principle, 2 Pauli’s exclusion principle 3 Hund’s rule.
1.5 Define Orbital of an atom and draw the shapes of s, p and d- Orbitals.
1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding
1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency
1.9 Define and explai n Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl , MgO, *H2,*O2 and
*N2. (* Lewis dot method)
1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and distinguish
between their properties.
1.11 Structures of ionic solids-define a) Unit cell b) co-ordination number and the structures of
NaCl and CsCl unit cells.

81
2.0 Solutions
2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state and solubility
2.3 Define mole and problems on mole concept.
2.4 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2.Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent weight and
calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids.(HCl,H2SO4,H3PO4)Bases
(NaOH, Ca(OH)2, Al(OH)3 ) and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3, CaCO3)
2.5 Define molarity and normality and numerical problems on molarity and normality
a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality if weight of solute and volume of solution are
given
b) Calculate the weight of solute if Molarity or normality with volume of solution are given
c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to low concentrated
Solutions

3.0 Acids and bases

3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases and give the limitations of Arrhenius theory of
Acids and Bases.
3.2 Explain Bronsted–Lowry theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of Bronsted–
Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.3 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and
bases.
3.4 Explain the Ionic product of water
3.5 Define pH and explain PH scale and solve the Numerical problems on pH(Strong Acids and
Bases)
3.6 Define and explain buffer solution and give the examples of buffer solutions.
3.7 State the application of buffer solutions

4.0 Principles of Metallurgy

4.1 List out the Characteristics of Metals and non-metals
4.2 Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals
4.3 Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4.Flux5.Slag

4.4 Explain the methods of concentration of Ore; 1.Handpicking, 2.Levigation and 3. Froth
Floatation
4.5 Explain the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
4.6 Explain the purification of Copper by Electrolytic Refining
4.7 Define an Alloy and Write the composition and uses of the following alloys. 1. Brass 2.
Germen silver 3. Nichrome.

5.0 Electrochemistry
5.1 Define the terms1. Conductor 2. Semiconductor 3.Insulator, 4.Electrolyte5.Non–
electrolyte.Give two examples each.
5.2 Distinguish between metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction
5.3 Explain electrolysis by taking example fused NaCl
5.4 Explain Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
5.5 Define 1 . C hemical equivalent (E) 2 . E lectrochemicalequivalent (e) and their relation.
5.6 Solve the Numerical problems on Faraday’s laws of electrolysis and applications of
electrolysis (Electro plating)
5.7 Define Galvanic cell and explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell.

82
5.8 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.9 Explain the electrode potentials and standard electrode potentials
5.10 Explain the electrochemical series and its significance
5.11 Explain the emf of a cell and solve the numerical problems on emf of the cell based on
standard electrode potentials.

6.0 Corrosion
6.1 Define the term corrosion.
6.2 state the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
6.3 Explain the formation of a) composition cell b) stress cell c)concentration cell during
corrosion.
6.4 Define rusting of iron and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron.
6.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion
a)Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings)
b) Cathodic pro tectio n (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed–voltage process)

7. 0 Water Treatment
7.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.
7.2 Define and classify the hardness of water.
7.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water (with Formulae)
7.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
7.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness (mg/L) or( ppm).
7.6 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Ion-exchange process, b)Permutit
process or zeolite process
7.7 State the essential qualities of drinking water.
7.8 Chemistry involved in treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination, deflouridation)
7.9 Explain Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis with examples.
7.10 State the applications of Reverse Osmosis.

8.0 Polymers
8.1 Explain the concept of polymerisation
8.2 Explainthe methods of polymerization a)addition polymerization of ethylene
b)condensation polymerization of Bakalite(Only flow chart)
8.3 Define thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics with examples.
8.4 Distinguish between thermo plastics and thermosetting plastics
8.5 List the Characteristics of plastics and state the disadvantages of using plastics.
8.6 State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials.
8.7 Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. PVC, 2.Teflon, 3. Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6
8.8 Explain processing of Natural rubber and write the structural formula of Natural rubber.
8.9 List the Characteristics of raw rubber
8.10 Define and explain Vulcanization and List out the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber.
8.11 Define the term Elastomer and Explain the preparation and uses of the following synthetic
rubbers a) Buna-s and b)Neoprene rubber.

9.0 Fuels
9.1 Define the term fuel
9.2 Classify the fuels based on physical state and based on occurrence.
9.3 List the characteristics of good fuel.
9.4 State the composition and uses of gaseous fuels.
a)water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) Coal gas, e)Biogas.

83
 10.0 Chemistry in daily life
10.1 Give the basic chemical composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of
a) soaps, and detergents b) vinegar c) Insect repellents d) activated charcoal e) Soft drinks

11.0 ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
11.1 Define the term environment and explain the scope and importance of environmental
studies
11.2 Define the segments of environment 1).Lithosphere, 2).Hydrosphere, 3).Atmosphere,
4).Biosphere,
11.3 Define the following terms 1)Pollutant, 2).Pollution, 3).Contaminant, 4)receptor, 5)sink,
6) particulates, 7)dissolved oxygen (DO), 8)Threshold limit value (TLV), 9).BOD,10).COD
11) eco system1 2 ) Producers1 3 ) C onsumers 14) Decomposers with examples
11.4 State the renewable and non renewable energy sources with examples.
11.5 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity
11.6 Define air pollution and classify the air pollutants-based on origin and physical state of
matter.
11.7 Explain the causes, effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals and control
methods of air pollution.
11.8 State the uses of forest resources.
11.9 Explain causes and effects of deforestation
11.10 Explain the causes and effects of the following
1) Greenhouse effect, 2) Ozone layer depletion and 3) Acid rain
11.11 Define Water pollution, explain the causes, effects and control methods of Water pollution.

COURSE CONTENT
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1. Fundamentals of Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum numbers
–Aufbau principle - Hund’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d
orbitals - Electronic configurations of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – types of chemical bonds – Ionic and covalent bond with
examples–Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds- structures of ionic crystals (NaCl and
CsCl).
2. Solutions
Introduction of concentration methods – mole concept, molarity and normality – Numerical
problems on mole, molarity and normality.
3. Acids and Bases
Introduction – Theories of acids and bases and limitations – Arrhenius theory- Bronsted –
Lowry theory – Lewis acid base theory – Ionic product of water- pH related numerical
problems–Buffer solutions, action of buffer and its applications.

84
4. Principles of Metallurgy
Characteristics of Metals and non-metals –Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals,
Define the terms i) Metallurgy ii) ore iii) Gangue iv) flux v) Slag - Concentration of Ore –Hand
picking, Levigation, Froth floatation – Methods of Extraction of crude Metal – Roasting,
Calcination, Smelting – Alloys – Composition and uses of brass, German silver and nichrome.
5. Electrochemistry
Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes – electrolysis –
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis-application of electrolysis(electroplating) -numerical problems
on Faraday’s laws – Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential – electrochemical series–emf
and numerical problems on emf of a cell .
6. Corrosion
Introduction - factors influencing corrosion - composition, stress and concentration cells–
rusting of iron and its mechanism – prevention of corrosion by coating methods, cathodic
protection methods.
7. Water technology
Introduction–soft and hard water–causes of hardness–types of hardness
–disadvantages of hard water – degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) – softening methods –
permutit process – ion exchange process– qualities of drinking water –Chemistry involved in
treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination, defluoridation ) - Osmosis, Reverse Osmosis
–Applications of Reverse osmosis.
8. Polymers
Introduction – polymerization – types of polymerization – addition, condensation with
examples – plastics – types of plastics – advantages of plastics over traditional materials-
Disadvantages of using plastics – Preparation and uses of the following plastics i).PVC ii)
Teflon iii) Polystyrene iv) .Nylonn 6,6 –Processing of natural rubber - Vulcanization –
Elastomers- Preparation and applications of Buna-s, Neoprene rubbers.
9. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels–characteristics of good fuel-composition and uses of
gaseous fuels.
10. Chemistry in daily life
Basic composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of soaps and
detergents, vinegar, insect repellents, soft drinks, activated charcoal.
11. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
Introduction– environment –scope and importance of environmental studies – important
terms related to environment– renewable and non-renewable energy sources–Concept of
ecosystem – Biotic components –Forest resources – Deforestation -Biodiversity and its
threats-Air pollution – causes-effects–Global environmental issues – control measures –
Water pollution – causes – effects – control measures.

REFERENCEBOOKS
1.Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2
2.Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3.O.P. Agarwal, Hi- Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4.Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5.A.K. De Engineering Chemistry

85
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit test 1, unit test 2 and unit test 3

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 3.7

Unit Test - 2 From 4.1 to 7.10

Unit Test - 3 From 8.1 to 11.11

Model question paper for Unit Test with Cos mapped

86
 UNIT TEST –I
Model Question Paper (C-20)
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (AEI-104)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks: 40
PART-A 16 Marks
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) First question carries 4 marks and each of rest carries 3 marks.
(3) Answers for Q.No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
not exceed five simple sentences.

1. a. Number of neutrons in 11Na23 is ---------- (CO1)

b. The molarity and normality of HCl is the same (True or False) (CO1)
c. What is the pH range of base? (CO1)
d. Graphite is a good conductor of electricity (Yes or No) (CO1)
2. Distinguish between orbit and orbital. (CO1)
3. Define Covalent bond. Explain the formation of covalent bond in Oxygen and Nitrogen molecules.
(CO1)
4. Define mole. Calculate the number of moles present in 50 gm of CaCO3 and 9.8 gm of H2SO4.
(CO1)
H H
5. Define P . Calculate the P of 0.001M HCl and 0.01M NaOH solution. (CO1)

PART – B 3x8M = 24M

Answer either (A) or (B) from each questions from Part-B. Each question carries 8 marks.

6. A) Explain Postulations of Bhor’s atomic theory. Give its limitations. (CO1)

(OR)
B) Explain the significance of Quantum numbers. (CO1)
7. A) Express molarity normality with mathematical equation. Calculate the molarity and normality
of 10gm of NaOH present in 500 ml solution. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Classify solutions based the physical state of solute and solvent and give an example each.
(CO1)
8. A) What is buffer solution? Classify with examples and give it`s applications. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Bronsted-Lowry theory of acids and bases. Give its limitations. (CO1)

***

87
 UNIT TEST –II
Model Question Paper (C-20)
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (AEI-104)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks:40Marks
PART-A 16 Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries 4 marks and each of rest carries 3 marks.
(3) Answers for Q.No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
not exceed five simple sentences.

1. a) Bauxite is the ore of ............ metal (CO2)

b) What is the unit of electrochemical equivalent? (CO2)
c) CaSO4 is the permanent hardness causing salt. (True or False) CO3)
d) Write the Chemical formula of rust. (CO2)
2. Write any three differences between metallic conduction and electrolytic conduction.(CO2)
3. Write the composition and applications of German silver and Nichrome. (CO1)
4. Mention any three disadvantages of using hard water in industries. (CO3)
5. Define electro chemical equivalent and chemical equivalent. Give the relation between
them. (CO2)

PART – B 3x8M = 24M

Answer either (A) or (B) from each questions from Part-B. Each question carries 8 marks.
6. A) What is galvanic cell? Explain construction and working of galvanic cell with neat diagram
(CO2)
(OR)
B) State and explain Faraday`s laws of electrolysis. (CO2)
7. A) Explain different types of galvanic cells formed during the corrosion of metals.(CO2)
(OR)
B) What is hard water? Explain zeolite process of softening of hard water. (CO3)
8. A) Explain Froth floatation process. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Electrolytic refining processing of copper. (CO1)

***

88
 UNIT TEST –III
MODEL QUESTION PAPER (C-20)
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (AEI-104)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks:40
PART-A 16 Marks
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) First question carries 4 marks and each of rest carries 3 marks.
(3) Answers for Q. No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
not exceed five simple sentences.
1. a) The monomer of PVC................ (CO4)
b) Sulphur is the vulcanising agent. (True/False) (CO4)
c) Give an example for secondary pollutant. (CO5)
d) Presence of ozone in stratosphere is a pollutant.( Yes/No) (CO5)
2. List any three characteristic properties of vulcanised rubber. (CO4)
3. Define primary fuel and secondary fuels give an example each. (CO4)
4. Mention the basic chemical composition and applications of vinegar. (CO4)
5. Write any three threats to the biodiversity. (CO5)

PART – B 3x8M = 24M

Answer either (A) or (B) from each questions from Part-B. Each question carries 8 marks.
6. A) A) Explain addition and condensation polymerisation with an example each. (CO4)
(OR)
B) Give a method of preparation and applications of the following
i) Buna-S ii) Neoprene (CO4)
7. A) What is air pollution? Explain any three causes of air pollution (CO5)
(OR)
B) Briefly explain ozone layer depletion and green house effect. (CO5)
8. A) What is water pollution? Explain any three controlling methods of water pollution.(CO5)
(OR)
B) What are thermoplastics and thermo setting plastic? Write any four differences between
these two plastics. (CO4)

***

89
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER (C-20)
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (AEI-104)
TIME: 3hrs Total Marks:80
PART-A 3x10=30M
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries 3 marks.
1. Draw the shapes of s and p orbitals. (CO1)
2. Define mole. Find the mole number of 10 g of CaCO3 (CO1)
3. Define Buffer solution. Give any two examples. (CO1)
4. Define chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent. Give their relation. (CO2)
5. State name of the salts and their formulae that cause hardness. (CO3)
6. Write any three disadvantages of using plastics. (CO4)
7. Classify the fuels based on their occurrence. (CO4)
8. Mention the basic chemical composition and applications of vinegar. (CO4)
9. List out any three threats to biodiversity. (CO5)
10. Define pollutant and contaminant. Give an example each. (CO5)

PART – B
Each question carries eight marks. 8x5=40M
11. A) Explain Bhor’s atomic theory and give its limitations. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain ionic bond formation and covalent bond formation with one example each
(CO1)
12. A) Calculate the molarity and normality of 250 ml of sodium carbonate solution
that contains 10.6 gm of sodium carbonate. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Bronstead and Lowry theory of acids and bases. Give its limitations. (CO1)

13. A) Explain froth floatation and electrolytic refining of copper with neat diagrams.(CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the construction and working of galvanic cell. (CO2)

14. A) Explain Cathode protection methods. (CO2)

(OR)
B) Explain ion-exchange of softening of hard water with a neat diagram. (CO3)
15. A) Explain addition and condensation polymerisation with an example each. (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain the causes and effects of air pollution. (CO5)

PART –C
Question carries ten marks 10x1 =10M
16. Analyse the products formed at cathode and anode with electrode reactions during
the Electrolysis of aqueous NaCl in compare with fused NaCl. (CO2)
***

90
 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND DEVICES

No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks

Course code Course title
per week periods for FA for SA

Electronic

AEI-105 components and 4 120 20 80

devices

No. of
S.NO Major Topics COs Mapped
Periods
Resistors 15
1 CO1
Capacitors 13 CO1
2
Inductors 12 CO1
3
Switches and Relays 13 CO2
4
Microphones & Loud Speakers 15 CO3
5
Semiconductor Diode CO4
15
6 and Its applications

Transistors 15 CO5
7
Power supplies and CO6
12
8 Batteries

10
9 PCBs CO7
120
TOTAL

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Use passive components, switches, relays, microphones and loud speakers.

Course Explain formation of semiconductor materials.

Objectives (ii)
Analyze the working of PN junction Diode in forward and reverse bias and
(iii) Transistor and its configurations
Explain rectifier circuits, DC power supplies, PCB materials and their fabrication
(iv)
CO1
Course AEI- Use different passive components.

91
outcomes 105.1
CO2
AEI- Usedifferent switches , relays.
105.2
CO3
AEI- Usedifferent microphones, loud speakers.
105.3
CO4
AEI- Analyze the working of semiconductor diodes.
105.4
CO5
AEI- Analyze the working of Transistor and its configurations.
105.5
CO6
AEI- Explain rectifier circuits and DC power supplies.
105.6
CO7
AEI- Explain PCB materials and their fabrication.
105.7

1.0 Resistors.

1.1 Explain the term resistance.

1.2 Classify types of resistors.
1.3 Derive the relation R=ρl/a
Learning 1.4 List the specifications of a resistor, and state their importance.
Outcomes 1.5 Explain the Color Code of a Resistor.
1.6 Find the value of Resistance by using colour code.
1.7 Derive the equivalent resistance when two resistors are connected in series.
1.8 Derive the equivalent resistance when two resistors are connected in parallel.
1.9 Simple problems on series and parallel connected resistors.
1.10 Explain the effect of temperature on resistance.
1.11 Define temperature co-efficient of resistance and derive the relation
Rt=Ro(1+αot).
1.12 Compare the features of carbon film, metal film and wire wound resistors with
respect to size, power rating, tolerance, temperature coefficient and applications.
1.13 Explain constructional details and working of carbon and wire wound
potentiometers.
1.14 Compare the features of carbon and wire wound potentiometers
1.15 Mention the need for tapering in potentiometers.
1.16 Explain constructional details and working of rheostat and list its applications.
1.17 List the common faults in resistors.

2.0 Capacitors
2.1 Define the term capacitance.
2.2 Classify the types of capacitors.
2.3 List the specifications of a capacitor and state their importance.
2.4 State the factors affecting the capacitance of a capacitor.
2.5 List the properties of dielectric materials.

92
2.6 Define Di-electric constant, Di-electric strength and polarization of a material.
2.7 State the properties, range of values and applications of paper, mica, glass,
ceramic and electrolytic capacitors.
2.8 List types of variable capacitors and mention their applications.
2.9 List losses in capacitors.
2.10 Derive equivalent capacitance of Capacitors connected in i) series, and ii) parallel.
2.11 Simple problems on series and parallel connected capacitors.
2.12 List the common faults in capacitors.
3.0 Inductors
3.1 Define self-inductance, mutual inductance and coefficient of coupling.
3.2 Draw the symbols of iron core, air core, and ferrite core inductors.
3.3 Simple problems on self inductance, mutual inductance and coefficient of
coupling.
3.4 Classify inductors.
3.5 List the specifications of inductors.
3.6 List the various core materials used in the construction of inductors.
3.7 Derive equivalent inductance when they are connected in series aiding and
opposing.
3.8 Write the expressions of inductance when they are connected in parallel aiding
and opposing (No derivation).
3.9 Explain the constructional features of A.F. and R.F chokes.
3.10 List applications of A.F. and R.F chokes.

4.0 Switches and Relays

4.1 Define a switch.

4.2 Classify switches according to poles and throws (SPST, SPDT, DPST, DPDT,
Multipole multi-throw).
4.3 Sketch the I.S.I symbols of SPST, SPDT, DPST, DPDP, Multi-pole multi throw
switches.
4.4 List different types of switches.
4.5 Explain the working of toggle, rotary, slider switches and mention their
applications.
4.6 State the need of fuse in electronic equipment.
4.7 Mention different types of fuses.
4.8 Mention the ratings of fuse.
4.9 State the necessity of connectors in electronic circuits.
4.10 List different types of connectors.
4.11 Mention the use of MCB.
4.12 Define a relay.
4.13 Classify different relays based on principle of operation, polarization and
application.
4.14 Mention specifications and applications of relays.
4.15 Explain the construction & working of general-purpose electromagnetic relay.
4.16 List the contact materials used in relays and list their characteristics.
5.0 Microphones & Loud Speakers
5.1 Define Microphone.
5.2 List the different types of microphones based on impedance, polar characteristics
and principle of working.
5.3 Explain the working of carbon, Crystal and dynamic microphones.
5.4 Mention the specifications of microphones.

93
 5.5 Define Loudspeaker.
5.6 Explain the constructional features and principle of operation of PMMC
Loudspeaker.
5.7 Mention the necessity of Baffle for a Loudspeaker and list the types of Baffles (like
open, infinite, bass reflex, acoustic labyrinth).
5.8 Mention the use of woofers and tweeters.
5.9 Give the need for a Horn loud speaker.
5.10 Mention the specifications of Loudspeaker.
6.0 Semiconductor Diode & its applications
6.1 State the electrical properties of solid Semiconductor materials.
6.2 Sketch energy level diagrams for conductors, Semiconductors, Insulators.
6.3 Define Intrinsic and extrinsic Semiconductors.
6.4 Distinguish between Intrinsic and extrinsic Semiconductors.
6.5 Explain the formation of P- type and N-type materials and sketch the energy band
diagrams.
6.6 Identify Majority and Minority carriers in P and N Type materials.
6.7 Distinguish between Drift and Diffusion current.
6.8 Explain the formation of PN junction diode.
6.9 Explain the working of PN junction Diode with various biasing voltages.
6.10 Sketch the forward and Reverse Bias Voltage characteristics of diode.
6.11 List the specifications of a diode.
6.12 List the applications of a diode..
6.13 Draw and explain the working of clipper and clamper circuits using diodes.
6.14 Explain the formation and working of Zener diode.
6.15 Sketch the characteristics of Zener breakdown and Avalanche breakdown.
6.16 Distinguish between Zener breakdown and Avalanche breakdown.

6.17 Explain working principle and list applications of following

a) Varactor diode
b) Tunnel diode
6.18 Draw the symbols of PN junction diode, Zener diode, Varactor diode, and Tunnel
diode.
7.0 Transistors
7.1 State the formation of a transistor.
7.2 Draw the symbols and explain the working of PNP and NPN Transistors.
7.3 List transistor configurations.
7.4 Explain working of transistor as amplifier (CE configuration)
7.5 Draw and explain the different transistor configurations (CB, CC).
7.6 Define cut off, saturation and active regions.
7.7 Sketch the input/output characteristics of CB, CC and CE configurations.
7.8 Define alpha, beta and gamma Factors.
7.9 Obtain relation between alpha, beta and gamma Factors.
7.10 Write collector current expression in CB and CE modes of transistors in terms of ,
, IB, IC and ICBO, ICEO.
7.11 Compare the performance characteristics of transistor in CB, CE and CC
configurations.
8.0 Power supplies and Batteries.
8.1 State the necessity of D.C. power supply for Electronic circuits.

94
 8.2 Define cycle, Frequency, Time Period, Maximum Value, Average value, RMS value,
Form Factor, peak factor for sinusoidal AC quantities.
8.3 Explain the working of HW, FW and Bridge Rectifier circuits with wave forms.
8.4 Define PIV, Ripple factor and Efficiency and write their expressions for the above
circuits.
8.5 Compare HW, FW and Bridge Rectifiers
8.6 Define Voltage Regulation.
8.7 Define a filter circuit.
8.8 State the need for a filter circuit in power supplies.
8.9 List the types of filter circuits.
8.10 Explain the operation of C, LC, CLC filters.
8.11 State the need for a regulated power supply and list its specifications.
8.12 Explain the operation of simple Zener regulator.
8.13 List the types of storage batteries.
8.14 List the uses of storage batteries.
8.15 Compare lead acid and Nickel – iron cells.
8.16 Explain about maintenance free battery and list its applications.

9.0 PCBs

9.1 State the need of PCB in electronic equipment.

9.2 Classify PCBs.
9.3 List types of laminates used in PCBs.
9.4 Explain the following in PCB Layout planning.
a) Layout Scale
b) Grid system.
c) Spacing specifications for component holes and conductor widths.
9.5 List the methods of transferring layout on the copper clad sheet.
9.6 List the steps involved in screen-printing for making PCBs.
9.7 List the materials used in screen-printing.
9.8 Explain the photo processing technique for PCB preparation.
9.9 Explain the methods of etching, cleaning and drilling of PCB.
9.10 List the steps involved in making double-sided PCB.
9.11 List the materials used in soldering.
9.12 List the soldering methods of PCBs.
9.13 List the standard PCB specifications.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

95
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-105.1 2 2 2 3 2 1

AEI-105.2 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-105.3 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-105.4 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-105.5 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-105.6 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-105.7 1 1 3 2 1

Average 1.14 1.14 1.34 3 2 1

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENTS

1. Resistors: Classification of resistors, colour code, Specifications, Carbon film metal

film, wire wound resistors. Constructional details of carbon and wire wound
Potentiometers - tapering. Effect of temperature on resistance. Faults in resistors.
2. Capacitors: Classification, specifications of capacitors, dielectric constant,
dielectricstrength, properties and applications of paper, mica, ceramic,glass and
electrolyticcapacitors. Variable capacitors and applications, capacitor connected in
series and parallel.
3. Inductors: Self Inductance, mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling, A.F. and
R.F. chokes.
4. Switches, connectors and Relays: Different types of switches and connectors used
inElectronic circuits and their specifications. Fuses. Types of relays-Relay contacts -
Electromagnetic Relay.
5. Microphones and Loudspeakers: Types of microphones – carbon, dynamic and
crystal. Constructional features, principle of working, characteristics, construction
of PMMC Loudspeakers, Baffles, need for horn loud speaker.
6. Semiconductor Diode: Electrical properties ofsemiconductor materials, Energy
leveldiagrams of conductors, semiconductors and Insulators, Formation of P-type
and N-typematerials, PN junction diode with characteristics, Drift and Diffusion
current, Diode clippers and clampers. Zenerdiode - Zener break down and
Avalanche breakdown, Varactor diode, tunnel diode.
7. Transistors: Working of PNP and NPN transistors. Transistor configurations- CB,CE
and CC, Input and Output characteristics, α, β, and γ factors, Relation between α,
β, and γ- Comparisons of CB,CE and CC configurations.
8. Power supplies and Batteries: Need of DC power supply, Rectifiers- Half wave
rectifier, full wave rectifier, bridge rectifier, RMS value, DC value, Ripple factor and

96
 Efficiency, voltage regulation. Filters - C, LC, and CLC filters. Simple Zener
regulator, Batteries-storage batteries.
9. PCBs: Classification of PCBs, screen-printing of PCBs, photo processing, double
sided PCBs, soldering methods of PCBs, standard PCB specifications.

Reference Books

1. B. Soma Nathan Nair- Electronic devices and applications, PHI.

2. Anok Singh - Principles of Electronic Communications (For speakers & Microphones)
3. Dr.K.Padmanabham-Electronic components
4. V.K.Mehatha- Principles of Electronics, S Chand & Company Ltd.
5. Walter C. Bosshart - Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology, TMH
6. Grob- Basic Electronics, TMH.
7. Millman&Halkias - Electronic devices & Circuits, TMH.
8. F.J. Waters- Electronic Components.

MODEL BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Distribution of Distribution of
No. of Weightage COs
Weightage Weightage
S. Major Topics periods of marks Mapped
No
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Resistors 15 6 6 - 2 -
1 CO1

Capacitors 13 3 3 - 1 - CO1
2

Inductors 12 3 3 - 1 - CO1
3
Switches and 11 CO2
13 3 8 1 1
4 Relays

Microphones & 11 CO3

15 3 8 1 1
5 Loud Speakers

Semiconductor 11 CO4
15 3 8 1 1
6 Diode and Its
applications

97
 Transistors 15 11 3 8 1 1 CO5
7

Power supplies 12 11 3 8 1 1 CO6

8
and Batteries
9 10 3 3 - 1 -
PCBs CO7

Higher Order
Question from
10 10 1
chapters 1 or 2 CO1
or 3

Total 120 80 30 40 - 10 10 5 - 1 -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.10

Unit Test-II From 4.1 to 6.18

Unit Test-III From 7.1 to9.13

98
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS (C-20)
DAEIE-FIRST YEAR
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND DEVICES (AEI-105)
Time: 3 Hours Max Marks: 80

PART –A

Instructions: 1) Answer all Questions. 10x3=30 M

2) Each carries THREE marks.
3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not simple
exceed five sentences.

1. List any three types of resistors.

(CO1)

2. Define the term Resistance. (CO1)

3. Define the term capacitance. (CO1)

4. Write the expression for equivalent inductance when two inductors are connected in parallel

aiding. (CO1)

5. Define a switch. (CO2)

6. Define microphone. (CO3)

7. Draw the symbols of PN junction diode and Zener diode. (CO4)

8. List any three Transistor configurations. (CO5)

9. Define Filter circuit. (CO6)

10. State any three standard PCB specifications. (CO7)

99
 PART-B

Instructions:1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer. .
5x8=40 M

11. (A) Explain the working of slider switch and list any three applications. (CO2)
Or
(B) Explain the construction & working of general-purpose electromagnetic relay.(CO2)

12. (A) Explain the construction and working of PMMC Loudspeaker. (CO3)
Or
(B) Explain the working of carbon microphones. (CO3)

13. (A) Explain the formation of PN junction diode. (CO4)

Or
(B) Explain the formation and working of Zener diode. (CO4)
14. (A) Explain the input and output characteristics of CB configuration with diagram. (CO5)
Or
(B)Explain working of transistor as amplifier in CE configuration. (CO5)

15. (A) Explain the working of Bridge Rectifier circuit with wave forms. (CO6)
Or
(B) Explain about maintenance free battery and list any two applications. (CO6)

PART- C
1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question. (2) Question carries ten marks.
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. In an electrical cable there is a single wire of radius 9mm of copper its resistance is 5 ohms .The
cable replaced by 6 different insulated copper wires the radius of each wire is 3mm.Now find
the total resistance of the cable. (CO1)

***

100
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND DEVICES (AEI-105)

Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- ATotal: 16M
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks.
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) The symbol of resistor is-------------- (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) ------ is a passive component that restricts the flow of electric current. (CO1)
iii) Capacitor is a device used to store electrical energy (True/False) (CO1)
iv) Inductor is an active component. (True/False) (CO1)
2. Classify types of resistors. (CO1) 3M
3. Define Di-electric constant. (CO1) 3M
4. State the factors affecting the capacitance of a capacitor. (CO1) 3M
5. List any three specifications of inductors (CO1) 3M

PART- B3×8M=24M
Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries Eight marks.

6. (A). Explain constructional details and working of rheostat and list its applications.(CO1)
Or
(B). Explain constructional details and working of carbon potentiometer. (CO1)

7. (A). State the properties, range of values and applications of paper and mica capacitors.(CO1)
Or
(B). State the properties, range of values and applications of ceramic and electrolytic (CO1)
capacitors.

8. (A). Derive equivalent inductance when they are connected in series aiding and
opposing. (CO1)
Or
(B). Explain the constructional features of A.F. and R.F chokes. (CO1)

***

101
 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

No of Total no. of Marks Marks

Course code Course title
periods/week periods for FA for SA

BASIC ELECTRICAL
AEI-106 04 120 20 80
ENGINEERING

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

D.C Circuits and Network Theorems 25
1 CO1
Single phase A.C. circuits 30 CO2
2
Heating Effects of Electrical Current 15 CO3
3

Transformers 25 CO4
4

CO5
25
5
DC & AC Machines

120
TOTAL

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Usebasic electrical circuits like D.C Circuits and Network Theorems,
Single phase A.C. circuits, Heating Effects of Electrical Current,
Course Transformers, DC & AC Machines.
Objectives

102
 CO1
AEI- Explainthe basics of D.C circuits and network theorems.
106.1
CO2
AEI- Analyse the Single phase A.C circuits.
106.2

Course CO3 Explainthe Heating Effects of Electrical Current.

outcomes AEI-
106.3
CO4
AEI-
106.4 Explain the Transformer principle and list its Applications.
CO5
AEI- Explainthe basic principle of D.C and A.C machines.
106.5

1.0 DC Circuits and Network Theorems.

1.1 Differentiate between active and passive circuits.

Learning 1.2 Define junction, branch and loop in a circuit.
Outcomes
1.3 State Kirchhoff‘s current law and voltage law.
1.4 Solve simple circuit problems by nodal method and loop current method based on
Kirchhoff‘s laws.
1.5 Explain star and delta circuits.
1.6 Give the formulae for star- delta and delta – star transformations.
1.7 Solve simple problems on star- delta and delta– star transformations.
1.8 Define ideal voltage source & ideal current source.
1.9 Convert ideal voltage source to ideal current source.
1.10 Convert ideal current source to ideal voltage source.
1.11 State super position, Thevenin‘s ,Norton‘s, maximum power transfer theorems
(D.C circuits only & No Problems)

2.0 Single phase A.C. circuits

2.1 Define the term phase and phase difference.

2.2 Derive the relationship between voltage and current in pure resistive,
Inductive and capacitive circuits.
2.3 Draw the phasor diagrams and wave forms of pure resistive,
inductive and capacitive circuits.

103
2.4 Write the equation for impedance, current, phase angle, power and
Power factor in R-L, R-C, & R-L-C. Series circuits.
2.5 Draw the phasor diagrams and wave forms of R-L, R-C, & R-L-C
Series circuits.
2.6 Solve simple Problems on Series Circuits.
2.7 Solve problems on parallel circuits by
a) Vector method
b) Admittance method and
c) ‘J’ notation method
2.8 Define resonance in series and parallel electric circuits.
2.9 Differentiate between series resonant circuit and parallel resonant
circuit.
2.10 Derive the equation for resonant frequency in series RLC circuit.
2.11 Derive the equation for resonant frequency in parallel RL-C circuit.
2.12 Define `Q‘factor. Mention the importance of Q factor.
2.13 solve simple problems on resonance and Q factor.

3.0 Heating effects of Electric Current

3.1 State Mechanical equivalent of heat.

3.2 State the heat produced due to flow of current.
3.3 List the practical applications of heat produced due to Electric current in
Metal.
3.4 Explain the construction and working of following practical applications
of heat produced due to Electric current in metal:
a) Filament lamps
b) Electric kettle
c) Electric cooker
d) Electric Iron
e) Space heaters
f) Geyser
g) Infrared lamp.
1.5 Define Thermal efficiency.

4.0 Transformers

4.1 Explain the working principle of a Transformer

4.2 Explain the construction of transformers (core type, shell type).
4.3 Give reasons for using laminations in transformer core
4.4 Derive the EMF equation of transformer.
4.5 Solve simple problems on EMF equation of transformer.
4.6 State the voltage transformation ratio.
4.7 Define efficiency and regulation of transformer.
4.8 State the losses in a transformer.
4.9 Explain the working of Auto transformer and list their

104
 advantages.
4.10 Explain the working of Current transformer and Potential transformer
with diagram.
4.11 Explain the use of transformer as :
a) Impedance matching transformer
b) Isolation transformer
4.12 State the need for cooling of a transformer.
4.13 List the cooling methods of a transformer.
4.14 List important specifications of a transformer.

5.0 DC machines & AC Machines

5.1 Explain the working of simple loop generator.

5.2 State Flemings right hand rule.
5.3 Explain the construction of D.C. Generator.
5.4 Write the expression for E.M.F. equation of a D.C.generator (no derivation).
5.5 Classify D.C. Machines with reference to excitation.
5.6 Define armature reaction and state their effects.
5.7 Define commutation and state the methods to improve commutation
5.8 List different losses in D.C. Machines.
5.9 Draw and explain power flow diagram in a D.C. generator.
5.10 Define efficiency of a D.C. generator.
5.11 State Flemings left hand rule.
5.12 Explain the working principle of D.C. Motors.
5.13 State the significance of back e.m.f. and give formula in terms of supply voltage,
Armature current and Resistance, and also in terms of ø, Z, N,P, A.
5.14 Write the expression for Torque Equation (No derivation)
5.15 Explain the principle of alternator.
5.16 Explain the constructional features of alternator. i) Salient pole ii) Non
salient pole or smooth cylindrical type.
5.17 Write the EMF equation of an alternator (No – Derivation).

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

105
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-106.1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-106.2 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-106.3 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-106.4 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-106.5 1 1 3 2 1

Average 1 1 1 3 2 1

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENTS

1.DC Circuits and Network Theorems:

Junction, branch and loop in circuits- Kirchhoff’s laws - Star - Delta configurations, Concept of
transformation - Ideal Voltage , Ideal current source - Super position theorem, Thevenin’s Theorem -
Norton’s Theorem, Maximum power transfer theorem with reference to D.C.

2.Single phase A.C. Circuits:

Voltage and current relationship in pure resistive,Inductive and capacitive circuits- R-L, R-C ,R-L-C
series circuits – Equations for voltage, current, impedance, power and power factor -Problems on
series circuits – Problems on Parallel circuits by vector method, admittance method and by `J’
notation method - Resonance - Definition of resonance–Series and parallel resonant circuit-`Q’
factor.

3. Heating Effects of Electrical Current:

Mechanical Equivalent of Heat - Heat produced due to flow of current in metal: Filament lamps,
Electric kettle, Electric cooker, Electric Iron, Space heaters, Geyser, Infrared lamp-Thermal efficiency.

4. Transformers:
Principle of Transformer - Types and Constructional features of transformer- E.M.F equation of a
transformer- Auto Transformer - Potential Transformer, Current transformer, Impedance matching
transformer, Isolation transformer.

5. DC & AC Machines:
D.C. machines: Simple loop generator-Flemings right hand rule-Construction of D.C generator, E.M.F
equation, classification of D.C machines on the basis of excitation,Armature reaction and
commutation, Losses and efficiency,Flemings left hand rule,principle of D.C. motor,significance of
back E.M.F, torque equation.

106
 AC Machines: Principle and construction of alternator, types of alternator, e.m.f. equation of
alternator.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. B.L. Theraja - Electrical Technology - Vol – I& Vol-II ,

2. V.K.Mehtha - Introduction to Electrical Engg.,S. Chand.
3. Hughes - Electrical Technology, Pearson.
4. Parker Smith - Problems in Electrical Engg, Parker Smith.

BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Distribution of Distribution of
No. of Weightage COs
Weightage Weightage
S. Major Topics periods of marks Mapped
No R U Ap An R U Ap An

D.C Circuits and

Network 25 6 8 2 1
1 14 CO1
Theorems

Single phase A.C.

30 6 8 2 1 CO2
2 circuits 14
Heating Effects of
15 3 8 1 1 CO3
3 Electrical Current 11

Transformers 25 9 8 3 1 CO4
4
17
DC & AC
25 6 8 2 1 CO5
5 Machines 14

Higher Order
Question FROM 10 10 1 CO2
CHAPTER 2
Total 120 80 30 40 - 10 10 5 - 1 -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.3
Unit Test-II From 2.4 to 4.6
Unit Test-III From 4.7 to 5.17

107
 C-20-AEI-106

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- FIRST YEAR EXAMINATION
BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) Each question carries three marks
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simplesentences.

1. State Kirchhoff Current law. (CO1)

2. Define the term ideal voltage source. (CO1)
3. Define the term phase difference. (CO2)
4. Define the resonance in series electric circuits . (CO2)
5. Define the term Thermal efficiency (CO3)
6. Define the Efficiency of transformer (CO4)
7. State the relationship between voltage, current ratios and turn ratios. (CO4)
8. Give reasons for using laminations in transformer core (CO4)
9. Write the EMF equation of alternator. (CO5)
10. Define the term efficiency of DC Machines (CO5)

PART- B
5×8=40

Instructions: (1) Answer all the questions

(2) Each question carries eight marks.
(3) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content but not the
length of the answer.

11. (A).Calculate the current in each branch of the circuit shown in figure below using kirchoff”s
laws. (CO1)

or
(B). State Superposition theorem and Norton theorem. (CO1)

108
 12. (A). Derive the relationship between voltage and current in pure resistive,circuits. (CO2)
or
(B). Derive the equation for resonant frequency in series RLC circuit. (CO2)

13. (A). Explain the construction and working of electric cooker. (CO3)
Or
(B). Explain the construction and working of electric geyser. (CO3)

14. (A). Explain the working principle of transformer. (CO4)

Or
(B). Explain the working of current transformer and potential transformer. (CO4)

15. (A). Explain the construction of DC Machine. (CO5)

Or
(B). Explain the constructional features of Salient Pole alternator. (CO5)

PART- C

1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16.Analyse what would happen to the resonant frequency of a metal bar if it were made of a
more elastic metal? What would happen to the resonant frequency if an extra amount of
mass were added to the end being struck? (CO2)

***

109
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING (AEI-106)

Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions
(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) In which law the incoming currents are equal to outgoing currents. (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) Define ideal voltage source. (CO1)

iii) Resistance is a passive element (True/False) (CO1)

iv) Write the impedance equation of R-L series circuit (CO2)

2. Differentiate between active and passive circuits. (CO2) 3M

3. State super position theorem. (CO1) 3M

4. Define the term phase and phase difference. (CO2)3M

5. Draw the phasor diagram of pure capacitive circuit. (CO2)3M

110
 PART- B
3×8M=24M

Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries Eight marks.

6. (A).Calculate current ‘I’ as shown in the below figure by using kirchoff’s current law

(CO1)
Or

(B). Convert the given Star values into Delta. (CO1)

i) 3Ω, 4Ω, 6Ω ii) 6Ω, 6Ω, 6Ω

7. (A). Find the loop currents for the circuit shown below using loop Analysis method. (CO1)

.
Or

(B). A coil has a resistance of 20Ω and an inductance of 15mH.If an AC supply of230V,
50Hz is applied across the coil.Find Impedance, current, phase angle, power factor
and power. (CO1)

8.(A). Derive the relationship between voltage and current in pure resistive circuits(CO2)
Or
(B). Derive the relationship between voltage and current in pure inductive circuits (CO2)

***

111
 ENGINEERING DRAWING

Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week Periods Per Year

Engineering Drawing AEI–107 06 180

TIME SCHEDULE

No. of Short
S.No Drawing Marks to be Answer Essay type
No. Of awarded Questions
Major Topics plates Questions
Periods
Importance of
1 -- 01 - - -
Engineering Drawing

Engineering Drawing
2 01 05 - - -
Instruments

Free hand lettering & 01

3 Numbering 06 05 1 -

4 Dimensioning Practice 01 09 05 1 -

Geometrical
5 03 24 15 1 1
constructions

Projections of Points,
6 Lines, Planes & 03 21 05 1
Auxiliary Planes

7 Projections of Solids 01 12 10 1

8 Sections of Solids 01 21 10 - 1

Orthographic
9 01 30 10 - 1
Projections

10 Isometric Views 01 30 10 - 1

Development of
11 01 21 10 - 1
surfaces

Total 14 180 80 04 06

112
 Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

Course Objectives Upon completion of the course the student shall able to Explainthe basic graphic
skills and use them in preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and
interpretation

CO1 AEI-107.1 Practice the use of engineering drawing instruments

Usethe conventions to be followed in engineering drawing as per

CO2 AEI-107.2
BIS

Construct the i) basic geometrical constructions ii) engineering

Course CO3 AEI-107.3
curves
Outcomes
Visualise and draw the orthographic projections of i) Points ii) Lines
CO4 AEI-107.4
iii) Regular Planes iv) Regular Solids V) Sections of Regular Solids

CO5 AEI-107.5 Visualise and draw the isometric views of machine components

Draw the developments of surfaces of regular solids and use them

CO6 AEI-107.6
to make the components used in daily life

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 2 2 1 2 3 1

CO2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1

CO3 3 2 2 1 2 3 1

CO4 3 2 2 1 2 3 1

CO5 3 2 2 1 2 3 1

CO6 3 2 2 1 2 3 1

3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low

113
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to

1.0 Explain the basic concepts of Engineering Drawing

1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of
Mechanical Engineering
2.0 Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
2.1 Select the correct instruments to draw the different lines / curves
2.2 Use correct grade of pencil to draw different types of lines and for different
purposes
2.3 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
2.4 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
2.5 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.6 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean and tidy.
Drawing Plate 1: (Having two exercises)
3.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers
3.1 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
3.2 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
3.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications
Drawing plate 2: (Having 5 to 6 exercises)
4.0 Explain Dimensioning Practice
4.2 Acquaint with the conventions, notations, rules and methods of dimensioning in
engineering drawing as per the B.I.S.
4.5 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of
dimensioning.
Drawing Plate 3: (Having 08 to10 exercises)
5.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions
5.1 Practice the basic geometric constructions like i) dividing a line into equal parts
ii) exterior and interior tangents to the given two circles iii) tangent arcs to two
given lines and arcs
5.2 Draw any regular polygon using general method when i) side length is given
ii) inscribing circle radius is given iii) describing circle radius is given
5.2 Draw the conics using general and special methods,
5.3 Draw the engineering curves like i) involute ii) cycloid iii) helix
5.4 Identify the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.
Drawing Plate -4: Having problems up to construction of polygon
Drawing Plate -5: Having problems of construction of conics
Drawing Plate -6: Having problems of construction of involute, cycloid and helix

114
6.0 Projections of points, lines, planes & auxiliary planes
6.1 Explain the basic principles of the orthographic projections
6.2 Visualise and draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes
(HP&VP)
6.3 Visualise and draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
6.4 Visualise and draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one
plane and inclined to other plane)
6.5 Identify the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
6.5 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
Drawing Plate -7: Having problems up to projection of points and Lines (15 exercises)
Drawing Plate -8: Having problems of projection of planes (6 exercises)
Drawing Plate -9: Having problems on auxiliary planes (Having 4 exercises)
7.0 Draw the Projections of Solids
7.1 Visualise and draw the projections of regular solids like Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinder,
Cone...(up to axis of solids parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
Drawing plate No.10: Having problems of projection of solids (10 exercises)
8.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views
8.1 Identify the need to draw sectional views.
8.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
8.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids by applying the principles of
hatching.
Drawing Plate–11: Having problems of section of solids (6 exercises)
9.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection
9.1 Draw the orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
9.2 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a given object fully.
Drawing Plate 12 : (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
10.0 Prepare pictorial drawings
10.1 identify the need of pictorial drawings.
10.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
10.3 Prepare Isometric views from the given orthographic drawings.
Drawing plate 13: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
11.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
11.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
11.2 Draw the development of simple engineering objects and their truncations (cubes,
prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid)
11.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like i) funnel
ii) 900 elbow iii) Tray
Drawing plate No. 14: (Having 05 exercises)

115
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No Major topic Key Competency

 Explain the linkages between Engineering

1. Importance of Engineering Drawing drawing and other subjects of study in Diploma
course.
2. Engineering Drawing Instruments  Select the correct instruments to draw various
entities in different orientation
 Write titles using sloping and vertical lettering
3. Free hand lettering & Numbering and numerals as per B.I.S (Bureau of Indian
standards)
 Dimension a given drawing using standard
4. Dimensioning Practice notations and desired system of dimensioning

 Construct ellipse, parabola, rectangular

5. Geometrical construction hyperbola, involute, cycloid and helix from the
given data.
Projection of points, Lines, Planes &  Draw the projections of points, straight lines,
6.
Solids planes & solids with respect to reference planes
(HP& VP)
 Draw the auxiliary views of a given Engineering
7. Auxiliary views component
 Differentiate between Auxiliary view and
apparent view
 Differentiate between true shape and apparent
8. Sections of Solids shape of section
 Apply principles of hatching.
 Draw simple sections of regular solids
 Draw the minimum number of views needed to
9. Orthographic Projection represent a given object fully.

 Differentiate between isometric scale and true

10. Isometric Views
scale.
 Draw the isometric views of given objects,.
 Prepare development of Surface of regular
11. Development of surfaces solids and other components like i) funnel
ii) 900 elbow iii) Tray

116
COURSE CONTENTS:

NOTES:
1.B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.

1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing

Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its importance
as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – SP-46 –1988 –
Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link between Engineering
drawing and other subjects of study.

2.0 Engineering drawing Instruments

Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines, tools for
measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of
names under each classification and their brief description -Scales: Recommended scales
reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -
Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3 sizes,
Sizes of the Title block and its contents - Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,

3.0 Free hand lettering & numbering

Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering

Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)

Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils

4.0 Dimensioning practice

Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape
description of an Engineering object -Definition of Dimensioning size description -Location
of features, surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of dimensioning,
dimension line extension line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be
observed in the use of above tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional
system ( SP-46-1988)-Arrangement of dimensions Chain, parallel, combined progressive, and
dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for dimensioning standard, features “Circles
(holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.

5.0 Geometric Construction

Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts

Construction of tangent lines: to draw interior and exterior tangents to two circles of given
radii and centre distance

Construction of tangent arcs:

i) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute, right
and obtuse angles).

117
 ii)Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.

iii)Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given circles internally and externally.

Construction of polygon: construction of any regular polygon by general method for given
side length, inscribing circle radius and describing/superscribing circle radius

Conics: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone and a loci of
a moving point, Eccentricity of above curves – Their Engg. Applications viz., Projectiles,
reflectors, Cooling Towers, P-V Diagram of a Hyperbolic process - Construction of any conic
section of given eccentricity by general method - Construction of ellipse by concentric circles
method, Oblong Method and Arcs of circles method - Construction of parabola by rectangle
method and Tangent method - Construction of rectangular hyperbola

General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point, their
engineering application, viz., Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. – their
construction

6.0 Projection of points, lines and planes & auxiliary views

Classification of projections, Observer, Object, Projectors, Projection, Reference Planes,

Reference Line, Various angles of projections –Differences between first angle and third
angle projections

Projections of points in different quadrants

Projections of straight line -

(a) Parallel to both the planes.

(b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
(c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes

Projections of regular planes

(a) Plane parallel to one of the reference planes

(b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.

Auxiliary views

Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of drawing an auxiliary
views explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane - Partial auxiliary view.

7.0 Projections of regular solids

(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes

(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.

118
8.0 Sections of Solids
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Hatching – Section of regular
solids inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane

9.0 Orthographic Projections

Meaning of orthographic projection - Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing object -
Concept of front view, top view, and side view sketching these views for a number of engg
objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First angle
projection -Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an
object – Use of meter line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -Method
of representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to Explain an object
fully.

10.0 Pictorial Drawings

Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and
perspective and their use - Isometric drawings: Isometric axes, angle between them,
meaning of visual distortion in dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference between
Isometric scale, and true scale - difference between Isometric view and Isometric
projection - Isometric and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common features like
rectangles, circular - shapes, non-isometric lines – Drawing the isometric views for the given
orthographic projections -Use of box / offset method

11.0 Development of Surfaces

Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work-Concept of
true length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel
to the plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to the other -
Development of simple solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid and truncation of
these solids-Types of development: Parallel line and radial line development -Procedure of
drawing development of funnels, 900 elbow pipes, Tray.

REFERENCE BOOKS

Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese – ( McGraw-hill)

Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)

Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.

T.S.M. & S.S.M on “ Technical Drawing” prepared by T.T.T.I., Madras.

SP-46-1998 – Bureau of Indian Standards.

119
 C-20-AEI-107

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS

MODEL QUESTION PAPER
DAEIE – I-YEAR
ENGINEERING DRAWING

Instructions: 01. All the dimensions are in mm

02. Use first angle projections only
03. Due weitage will be given for the dimensioning and neatness

PART – A 05x 04=20

01. Answer all the questions

02. Each question carries FIVE marks

01. Write the following in single stroke capital vertical lettering of size 10mm

ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS

02. Redraw the given fig. and dimension it according to SP-46:1988.Assume suitable scale

03. Draw internal common tangents to two unequal circles of radii 26mm and 20mm.The
distance between the circles is 75mm.

04. Draw the projections of a regular pentagon of side length 40 mm inclined to the H.P. by 30 0
and perpendicular to V.P. using auxiliary plane method.

120
 PART – B 10 X 04 = 40

Instructions: 01.Answer any FOUR of the following questions

02.Each question carries TEN marks

05. Draw the involute of a circle of diameter 30 mm and also draw a tangent to the curve at a
distance of 60 mm from the centre of the circle.

06. A right circular cone of height 80 mm and base radius 60 mm is resting in the H.P. on one of
its generators and its axis is parallel to V.P. Draw the projections of the solid.

07. A regular hexagonal prism of height 80 mm and base side 40 mm is resting in the H.P. on its
base. It is cut by an auxiliary inclined plane of 600 inclination passing through the axis at a
distance of 30 mm from the top base. Draw the sectional views of the solid and the true
section.

08. A pentagonal pyramid of height 80 mm and base side 40 mm is resting in the H.P. on its base
such that one of the sides of the base is perpendicular to the V.P. It is cut by a section plane
perpendicular to the V.P. and inclined to the H.P. by 600 and passing through the axis at a
distance of 25 mm from the base. Draw the development of the lateral surface of the
truncated pyramid.

09. Draw the front view, top view and left side view of the object shown in the fig.

10. Draw the isometric view of the component whose orthographic projections are given below

***

121
 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS & DEVICES LAB

No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks

Course code Course title
per week periods for FA for SA
ELECTRICAL WIRING,
ELECTRONIC
AEI-108 COMPONENTS & 6 180 40 60
DEVICES
LABORATORY

No. of
S.NO Major Topics COs Mapped
Periods
1 Wiring practice 35 CO1, CO6
2 Identification of components 30 CO2, CO6
3 Soldering Practice 40 CO3
Study and use of Electronic
4 35 CO4, CO7
equipment
Testing of Electronic
5 components, Devices and 40 CO5, CO7, CO8
Rectifiers
TOTAL 180

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Useelectrical wiring, Soldering and Identification of components and
equipments.
Course
ii)
Objectives
UseStudy, Testing and use of different types of Electronic components
and equipments.
CO1 AEI-108.1 Familiarisation of various tools used in electrical wiring.
CO2 AEI-108.2 Identification of components
Course
CO3 AEI-108.3 Practice on Soldering.
outcomes
CO4 AEI-108.4 Study and use of electronic equipment
CO5 AEI-108.5 Testing of electronic components and Devices.
CO6 AEI-108.6 Connection of tube light with function of choke, tube and starter,
ceiling fan, microphones and loudspeaker.
CO7 AEI-108.7 Measurement of the value of resistor, AC/DC Voltages and currents
using voltmeters and current Meters, using analog and digital
Multimeters.
CO8 AEI-108.8 Draw forward and reverse bias characteristics of semiconductor diode,
Zener diode, transistor in CB mode and in CE mode.

122
 1.0. Wiring Practice:
1.1. Familiarisation of various tools used in electrical wiring.
1.Wire stripper, 2. Insulation remover 3. Pocket knife 4.Electrical Tester
5.Phillips Head Screwdrivers 6. Mallet 7.Rawl plug jumper 8 .Standard wire
Gauge
1.2. Identifying and working with Pliers
a) Identify the various functions of cutting pliers, Nose pliers, Pipe pliers,
Flush cutter,top cutting pliers, Electronics pliers, Insulated cutting pliers
b) Perform the following operations:
1. Holding 2. Wire cutting 3. Component bending 4.Twisting the wire.
1.3. Identification of different wires and cables:
a) Hookup wires a. PVC wire b. Teflon wires c.single strand d. multi strand.
b) Wires used for electrical wiring: i) Service wire ii) TRS wires /PVC
Wires (Al &Cu), iii) .single strand iv) Multi strand v) twisted
Flexible pair wires vi) Enameled copper wire, Power cord.
d) Cables: UTP cable , Co axial cables, Flat ribbon cable for
antennas, Telephone cable, Ethernet cable, Ribbon cables,
Optical fiber.
1.4. Wire joints practice: Perform the following wire joint operations:
Twisting, Splicing, Insulating, Western union joint, Married
Learning joint, Britania (straight Joint), Tee joint, Joining running
Outcomes cables, Pigtail or rat tail joint.
1.5. Identifying the Electrical accessories:
a) SPST Switch ,SPDT switch ,DPST switch,
b) Two pin and Three pin Sockets and plugs,
c) Power Socket and Power plugs, Lamp holders, Ceiling rose,
d) Mains Switch, MCB, Kitkat Fuse – Fuse wire ratings.
e) Usage of Fuse and variac
1.6. Identifying the mains supply Phase ,Neutral ,Ground:
a) Identification of Phase and Neutral, Terminals in mains
supply,
b) Explainthe purpose of earthing, 2pin and 3pin Plug
Connections.
1.7. Make simple switch connections using low voltage transformer
a) Connecting a 6V lamp to a switch (toggle).
b) 2 way switch connections.
c) Series and parallel connection of lamps.
1.8. Simple staircase wiring – one lamp control with two switches.
1.9. Connection of tube light with function of choke, tube and starter.
1.10. Connection of ceiling fan and reversing the direction of ceiling
fan.
2.0 Identification of components:
2.1 Identify different types resistors with different wattage.
2.2 Identify different types of Inductors.
2.3 Identify colour coding of different resistors.
2.4 Find the value of a given Resistor using colour code.
2.5 Identify different types of switches and relays.
2.6 Identify microphones and loudspeaker connections.

3.0 Soldering

123
3.1 Familiarisation of various soldering tools, Components & different cables.
3.2 Assemble and disassemble components using soldering irons
3.3 Use different types of soldering irons.
3.4 Use solder squeezer on electronic PCBs.
3.5 Use instant soldering gun.
3.6 Solder on printed circuit boards using passive and active components.

4.0 Study and use of electronic equipment:

4.1 Usethe symbols of electronic circuit components by drawing.
4.2 Measurement of AC/DC Voltages and currents using voltmeters and
currentMeters.
4.3 Measurement of voltage, current and resistance using analog and
digitalMultimeters.
4.4 Perform the continuity test for different components and devices using
analog and Digitalmultimeters.
4.5 Study and use of AF / RF signal generators.
4.6 Study and use of C.R.O. (single trace & Dual trace) for measuring frequency
andamplitude.
4.7 Study and use of single channel and dual channel regulated power supply
units.
5.0 Testing of electronic components, Devices and Rectifiers:
5.1 Measure the value of resistor using ohmmeter / multimeter and compare
with the colour code value.
5.2 Test and measure the value of capacitor using R.L.C. meter and compare
with the marked / colour code value.
5.3 Test the given loud speaker and measure the voice coil resistance-using
multimeter.
5.4 Test the working of different types of switches, relays.
5.5 Arrange the Public Address system and test the performance.
5.6 Identify leads and testing of different diodes (PN Junction Diode, Zener
Diode) and transistors using Multimeter.
5.7 Study of data manuals/ application manuals for diodes and transistors.
5.8 Draw forward and reverse bias characteristics of semiconductor diode and
calculate forward and reverse resistance of diode.
5.9 Draw reverse bias characteristics of Zener diode and find out the zener
voltage.
5.10 Draw input and output characteristics of transistor in CB mode.
5.11 Draw input and output characteristics of transistor in CE mode.
5.12 Implement Half wave rectifier with and without filter.
5.13 Implement Full wave rectifier with and without filter.
5.14 Implement Bridge rectifier with and without filter.

124
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-108.1 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-108.2 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-108.3 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-108.4 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-108.5 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-108.6 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-108.7 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-108.8 1 1 1 3 2 1

Average 1 1 1 3 2 1

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

Reference Lab Manual:

1. Electronic Devices and Circuits by David A Bell 4 Edition PHI
2. Hand soldering and circuit board repair by H.(Ted)Smith, Thomas Delmar.
3. Electronic instruments and systems – principles, maintenance and troubleshooting. by
R.G. Gupta.

125
EE -1
PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE
(C-20 CURRIUCULUM COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)

Subject Code Subject Title Periods per week Total periods per year

AEI-109 A Physics Laboratory 03 45

TIMESCHEDULE
S.No Name of the Experiment No.of
Periods
1. Hands on practice on Vernier Calipers 03
2. Hands on practice on Screw gauge 03
3. Verification of Parallelogram law of forces and Triangle law of forces 03
4. Simple pendulum 03
5. Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance method) 03
6. Focal length and Focal power of convex lens (Separate & Combination) (Single 03
lens only) index of solid using traveling microscope
Refractive
7. 03
8. Boyle’s law verification 03
9. Meter bridge 03
10. Mapping of magnet lines of force and locate null points 03
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
11. Surface tension of liquid using traveling microscope 03
12. Coefficient of viscosity by capillary method 03
Revision 06
Test 03
Total 45

Objectives:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Practice with Vernier calipers to determine the volumes and areas of a cylinder and sphere
and their comparison etc .
2.0 Practice with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate, cross sectional area
of a wire and volumes of sphere and also their comparison etc
3.0 Verify the parallelogram law and Triangle law
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum
5.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at zero degree
centigrade.
6.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using distant object method , U-V
method , U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V graph methods and their comparison.
7.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.

126
8.0 Verify the Boyle’s law employing a Quill tube.
9.0 Determine the specific resistance of material of a wirel using Meter Bridge.
10.0 Drawing magnetic lines of force under N-S and N-N methods and locate null points.
11.0 Determine the surface tension of a liquid using travelling Microscope (Demo)
12.0 Determine the viscosity of a liquid using capillary method (Demo)

Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the
Competencies Key competencies
Experiment
(Nopractice
1. Hands on of Periods)
on  Find the Least count  Read the scales
Vernier Calipers(03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate the requisite
 Read the scales physical quantities of
 Calculate the physical given objects
quantities of given object
2. Hands on practice on  Find the Least count  Read the scales
Screw gauge(03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass  Calculate cross section of
place and cross section of
wire and other quantities
wire and other quantities

3. Verification of  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

Parallelogram law of forces  Note the positions of equilibrium point
and Triangle law of threads on drawing sheet  Constructing
forces(03)  Find the angle at
parallelogram
equilibrium point
 Construct triangle
 Construct parallelogram
 Compare the ratios of
 Compare the measured force and length
diagonal
 Construct triangle
 Find the length of sides
 Compare the ratios
4. Simple pendulum(03)  Fix the simple pendulum to  Find the time for number
the stand of oscillations
 Adjust the length of  Find the time period
pendulum  Calculate the acceleration
 Find the time for number of due to gravity
oscillations  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Find the time period
 Calculate the acceleration
due to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph

127
5. Velocity of sound in air  Adjust the reservoir level
–Resonance method  Find the first and second
(03)  Arrange the resonance
apparatus resonanting lengths
 Adjust the reservoir level for  Calculate velocity of
booming sound sound at room
temperature
 Find the first and second
resonanting lengths  Calculate velocity of
sound at 00 C
 Calculate velocity of sound

6. Focal length and Focal  Calculate the focal

power of convex lens length and power of
 Fix the object distance
(Separate & Combination) convex lens
(03)  Find the Image distance
 Calculate the focal length  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
and power of convex lens graphs
and combination of convex
lenses
 Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
graphs

7. Refractive index of solid  Find the least count of  Read the scale
using traveling vernier on microscope  Calculate the refractive
microscope(03)  Place the graph paper index of glass slab
below microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive
index of glass slab

8. Boyle’s law verification  Note the atmospheric  Find the length of air
(03) pressure column
 Fix the quill tube to retort  Find the pressure of
stand enclosed air
 Find the length of air  Find the value P x l
column
 Find the pressure of
enclosed air
 Find and compare the
calculated value P x l

128
9. Meter bridge(03)  Make the circuit  Find the balancing length
connections  Calculate unknown
 Find the balancing length resistance
 Calculate unknown  Calculate the specific
resistance resistance
 Find the radius of wire
 Calculate the specific
resistance

10. Mapping of magnet lines  Draw magnetic

of force(03) meridian  Draw magnetic lines
 Placed the bar magnet of
in NN and NS directions force
 Draw magnetic lines of  Locate the neutral
force
points
 Locate the neutral
points along equatorial along equatorial and
and axial lines axial lines

11. Surface tension of liquid  Find the least count of  Read the scale
using traveling vernier on microscope  Calculate height of liquid
microscope(03)  Focus the microscope to the rise
lower meniscus & bent pin  Calculate the surface
 Read the scale tension of water
 Calculate height of liquid
rise
 Calculate the surface
tension of water
12. Coefficient of viscosity  Find the least count of  Find the pressure head
by capillary method(03) vernier  Calculate rate of volume
 Fix the capillary tube to of liquid collected
aspiratory bottle
 Find the radius of
 Find the mass of collected
water capillary tube
 Find the pressure head  Calculate the viscosity of
 Calculate rate of volume of water
liquid collected
 Find the radius of capillary
tube
 Calculate the viscosity of
water using capillary
method

129
Scheme of Valuation for end Lab Practical Examination :

A. Writing Aim, Apparatus, Formula, Graph, Precautions carries 10 (Ten) Marks

B. For Drawing the table, taking Readings, Calculation work,
Drawing the graph, finding result carries 15 (Fifteen) Marks
C. Viva Voice 05 (Five) Marks

Total 30 (Thirty) Marks

 Course outcomes
Experiments with Vernier calipers, Screw gauge, Parallelogram law and
CO1 Triangle law

Experiments with Simple pendulum, Resonance apparatus (Velocity of

CO2 sound in air )

Course Experiments with Convex lens, Refractive index of solid by travelling

Outcomes CO3 microscope

Experiments with quill tube (Boyles law verification), Meter bridge,

CO4 Mapping of magnetic lines of force

CO5 Experiments with Surface tension and Viscosity

 COs-PO mapping strength (as per given table)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

CO1 3 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 2 2 1

CO3 3 2 1 2

CO4 3 2 2

CO5 3 1 2 1 2

3 = strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped

130
 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(C-20 curriculum common to all Branches)

Subject Subject Periods per week Total periods

Code Title per year

AEI-109B Chemistry 03 45
Laboratory

CO1 Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation of

standard solution
CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base titration
CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction
CO4 Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable precipitation
CO5 Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise operations with
instrument for investigation of water pollution parameters

PO CO mapping

Course code Chemistry Laboratory No Of periods 45

C-109B No of Cos;5
POs Mapped with CO CO periods addressing Level remarks
No PO in Col 1 1,2,3
NO %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2 >40% level 3 (highly
CO4,CO5 addressed) 25% to 40%
PO2 CO1,CO2,CO3, 9 20 1 level2(moderately
CO4,CO5 addressed 5% to 25%
PO3 level1 (Low addressed <
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2 5%(not addressed)
CO4,CO5
PO5 CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5
PO6
PO7

131
 COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 3 1 1
CO2 2 3 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 1
CO5 2 3 2 2 1
3=strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped
Note:
The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit vii)
Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books

TIMESCHEDULE
S.No Name of the Experiment No.ofPeriods Mapped
with COs
1. a) Recognition of chemical substances and solutions used in the
laboratory by senses. CO1
03
b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetricanalysis

2. Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and making solutions of different dilution 03 CO1

Estimation of HCl solution using Std.Na2CO3 solution
3. solution. 03 CO2
4. Estimation of NaOH using Std.HCl solution 03 CO2
5. Estimation of H 2 SO 4 usingStd.NaOH solution 03 CO2
6. Estimation of Mohr’s Salt using Std.KMnO4 03 CO3
7. Determination of acidity of water sample 03 CO2
8. Determination of alkalinity of water sample 03 CO2
9. Determination of total hardness of water using Std.EDTA solution 03 CO4
10. Estimation of Chlorides present in water sample 03 CO4
11. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O )in water sample 03 CO5
12. Determination of pH using pH meter 03 CO5
13. Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic strength 03 CO5
required level.
14. Determination of turbidity of water 03 CO5
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample 03 CO5
Total: 45

132
OBJECTIVES:

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric flask,
burettes) and gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making
dilutions, etc.To identify the chemical compounds and solutions by senses.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to make solutions of desired
dilutions using appropriate techniques.
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2CO3solutionfor
estimation of HCl
4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. HCl solution for estimation
of NaOH
5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. NaOH solution for
estimation of H 2 SO 4
6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO4solution for
estimation of Mohr’sSalt
7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given samples
of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if available)
8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution
10.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides present in the
given samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
11.0 Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine Dissolved Oxygen
(D.O) in given water samples (One sample from closed container and one from open
container / tap water)
12.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to
determine their pH using standard pH meter
13.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions
a) To determine conductivity
b) To adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value
14.0 Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non coloured) to determine
their turbidity in NTU
15.0 To determine the total solids present in given samples of water (One ground water and one
surface / tap water)

133
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)
Familiarization of methods for
Volumetric analysis. Recognition of -
chemical substances And solutions --
(03)

 Weighing the salt to the  Weighing the salt to the

accuracy of .01 mg accuracy of .01 mg
Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and  Measuring the water with  Measuring the water with
making solutions of different volumetric flask, measuring jar, volumetric flask, measuring
dilution(03) volumetric pipette and jar, volumetric pipette and
graduated pipette graduated pipette
 Making appropriate dilutions  Making appropriate dilutions

 Cleaning the glassware and

Estimation of HCl solution using Std.
Na2CO3solution (03) rinsing with appropriate
solutions
Estimation of NaOH using Std.HCl
 Making standard solutions
solution (03)
 Measuring accurately the
Estimation of H 2 SO 4 using
Std.NaOH solution (03) standard solutions and titrants
 Making standard solutions
 Filling the burette with titrant
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt using
 Measuring accurately the
Std.KMnO4 (03)  Fixing the burette to the stand
standard solutions and titrants
Determination of acidity of water  Effectively Controlling the flow
sample (03)  Effectively Controlling the flow
of the titrant
Determination of alkalinity of of the titrant
 Identifying the end point
water sample (03)  Identifying the end point
 Making accurate observations
 Making accurate observations
Determination of total hardness of  Calculating the results
water using Std. EDTA solution (03)

Estimation of Chlorides present in

water sample (03)

Estimation of Dissolved
Oxygen(D.O) in water sample (By
titration method) (03)
 Familiarize with instrument  Prepare standard
 Choose appropriate ‘Mode’ solutions / buffers, etc.
Determination of pH using pH
/ ‘Unit’  Standardize the
meter (03)
 Prepare standard solutions / instrument with

134
 buffers, etc. appropriate standard
Determination of conductivity of  Standardize the instrument solutions
water and adjusting ionic strength with appropriate standard  Plot the standard curve
to required level (03) solutions  Make measurements
 Plot the standard curve accurately
 Make measurements
accurately
Determination of turbidity of water  Follow Safety precautions
(03)

 Measuring the accurate

volume and weight of  Measuring the accurate
sample volume and weight of
 Filtering and air drying sample
Estimation of total solids present in without losing any filtrate  Filtering and air drying
water sample (03)  Accurately weighing the without losing any filtrate
filter paper, crucible and  Accurately weighing the
filtrate filter paper, crucible and
 Drying the crucible in an filtrate
oven

SCHEME OF VALUATION
A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus ,principle and procedure 5M
B) Demonstrated competencies 20M
Making standard solutions
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants
Effectively controlling the flow of the titrant
Identifying the end point
Making accurate observations
C) Viva-voce 5M
---------------
Total 30M
------------

135
 Course No. of Total No. of
Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods

AEI-110
Computer
(common
Fundamentals 3 90 40 60
to all
Lab
branches)

Time schedule:
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of sessions No.of Periods
each of 3 periods
duration

1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6

2. Windows Operating System 2 6

3. MS Word 8 24

4. MS Excel 7 21

5. MS PowerPoint 5 15

6. Adobe Photoshop 6 18

Total periods 30 90

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1

2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1

3. MS Word 24 CO2

4. MS Excel 21 CO3

5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4

6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5

Total periods 90

136
Course i)To know Hardware Basics
Objectives
ii)To familiarize operating systems

iii)To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills in future
courses

iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.

At the end of the course students will be able to

CO1 AEI-110.1 Identify hardware and software components

CO2 AEI-110.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using word

processing software

Course CO3 AEI-110.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and to draw
Outcomes various graphs / charts.

CO4 AEI-110.4 Use Power point software to develop effective presentation

for a given theme or topic.

CO5 AEI-110.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-110.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

AEI-110.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

AEI-110.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

AEI-110.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

AEI-110.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

Average 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

137
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. Computer Hardware Basics

1. a).To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections
b).To Start and Shut down Computer correctly
c).To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer
II. Windows’s operating system
3. To Explore Windows Desktop
4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
III. Practice with MS-WORD
6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word
Home – Insert- Page layout – References – Review- View.
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features
IV.Practice with MS-EXCEL
13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout
14. To access and enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To sort and filter data in table.
20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.
21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.
22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print
V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT
23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation
25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
26. To insert Text and Objects
27. To insert a Flow Charts
28. To insert a Table
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs
30. To insert video and audio
31. To practice Animating text and objects
32. To Review presentation
VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop
33.To familiarize with standard toolbox
34. To edit a photograph.
35. To insert Borders around photograph.
36. To change Background of a Photograph.
37. To change colors of Photograph.
38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.
40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.

138
Key competencies:
Expt No Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies

1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Connect cables to

Computer system and Computer system: i). CPU ii). external hardware and
hardware connections Mother Board iii) Monitor iv) operate the computer
CD/DVD Drive v) Power Switch
vi) Start Button vii) Reset
Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the
cables used with computer
system
d. Identify various ports on CPU
and connect Keyboard &
Mouse
1 (b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the password a. Login and logout as
Computer correctly b. Start and shut down the per the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key Board b. Operate mouse
&Key Board
1 (c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start Menu, a. Access application
Desktop Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts programs using
b. Access application programs Start menu
using Start menu, Task b. Use taskbar and
manager Task manager
c. Use Help support

2. To check the software a. Find the details of Operating Access the

details of the computer System being used properties of
b. Find the details of Service computer and find
Pack installed
the details

3. To check the hardware a. Find the CPU name and clock a. Access device
present in your computer speed manager and find
b. Find the details of RAM and the details
Hard disk present b. Type /Navigate the
c. Access Device manager using correct path and
Control Panel and check the Select icon related
status of devices like mouse to the details
and key board required
d. Use My Computer to check
the details of Hard drives and
partitions
e. Use the Taskbar

139
4. Working with Files and a. Create folders and organizing a. Create files and
Folders files in different folders folders Rename ,
b. Use copy / paste move arrange and search
commands to organize files for the required
and folders folder/file

c. Arrange icons – name wise, b. Restore deleted files

size, type, Modified from Recycle bin
Working with Files and d. Search a file or folder and find
Folders its path
e. Create shortcut to files and
Continued.... folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of
My Documents
g. Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin
5. To use Windows a. Familiarize with the use of a. Use windows
Accessories: Calculator accessories and
b. Access Calculator using Run select correct text
Calculator – Notepad – command editor based on the
WordPad – MS Paint c. Create Text Files using situation.
Notepad and WordPad and
observe the difference in file b. Use MS pain to
size create /Edit pictures
d. Use MS paint and create and save in the
.jpeg, .bmp files using MS required format.
Paint

6. To familiarize with Ribbon a. Create/Open a document a. Create a Document

layout of MS word. – b. Use Save and Save as features and name
Home – Insert- page c. Work on two Word appropriately and
documents simultaneously save
layout- References-Review-
d. Choose correct Paper size and b. Set paper size and
View Printing options print options

7. To practice Word a. Typing text a. Use key board and

Processing Basics b. Keyboard usage mouse to enter/edit
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right text in the
click / Scroll) document.
d. Use Keyboard shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e. Use Find and Replace c. Use spell check/
features in MS- word Grammar features
f. Use Undo and Redo Features for auto corrections.
g. Use spell check to correct
Spellings and Grammar

8. To practice Formatting a. Formatting Text a. Format Text and

techniques b. Formatting Paragraphs paragraphs and use
c. Setting Tabs various text styles.

140
 d. Formatting Pages b. Use bullets and
e. The Styles of Word numbers to create
f. Insert bullets and numbers lists
g. Themes and Templates c. Use Templates
h. Insert page numbers, header /Themes
and footer d. Insert page numbers
date, headers and
footers

9. To insert a table of a. Edit the table by adding the a. Insert table in the
required number of rows fields – Deleting rows and word document and
and columns columns –inserting sub table – edit
marking borders. Merging and b. Use sort option for
splitting of cells in a Table arranging data.
b. Changing the background
colour of the table
c. Use table design tools
d. Use auto fit – fixed row/
column height/length – Even
distribution of rows / columns
features
e. Convert Text to table and
Table to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table
to arrange data in
ascending/descending order

10. To Insert objects, clipart a. Create a 2-page document. a. Insert hyperlinks

and Hyperlinks &Insert hyperlinks and t &Bookmarks
Bookmarks. b. Create organization
b. Create an organization chart charts/flow charts
c. Practice examples like
preparing an Examination
schedule notice with a
hyperlink to Exam schedule
table.
11. To Use Mail merge feature a. Use mail merge to prepare Use Mail merge
of MS Word individually addressed letters feature
b. Use mail merge to print
envelopes.
12. To use Equations and a. Explore various symbols Enter Mathematical
symbols features. available in MS Word symbols and
b. Insert a symbol in the text Equations in the word
c. Insert mathematical equations
document
in the document
13. To Practice with MS-EXCEL a. Open /create an MS Excel a. Familiarize with
spreadsheet and familiarize excel layout and
with MS Excel 2007 layout like use
MS office Button- b. Use various
b. Use Quick Access Toolbar- features available

141
 Title Bar- Ribbon-Worksheets- in toolbar
Formula Bar-Status Bar

14. To access and Enter data in a. Move Around a Worksheets- a. Access and select
the cells Quick access -Select Cells the required cells
b. Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap by various
Text-Delete a Cell Entry-Save a addressing
File-Close Excel methods
b. Enter data and edit
15. To edit spread sheet Copy, a. Insert and Delete Columns and Format the excel
Cut, Paste, and selecting Rows-Create Borders-Merge sheet
cells and Center
b. Add Background Color-Change
the Font, Font Size, and Font
Color
c. Format text with Bold,
Italicize, and Underline-Work
with Long Text-Change a
Column's Width
16. To use built in functions a. Perform Mathematical Use built in functions
and Formatting Data Calculations verify -AutoSum in Excel
b. Perform Automatic
Calculations-Align Cell Entries

17. To enter a Formula for a. Enter formula

automatic calculations b. Use Cell References in
Formulae Enter formula for
c. Use Automatic updating automatic calculations
function of Excel Formulae
d. Use Mathematical Operators
in Formulae
e. Use Excel Error Message and
Help

18. To Create Excel Functions, a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel sheets
Filling Cells b. Work with sum, Sum if , involving cross
Count and Count If Functions references and
c. Fill Cells Automatically equations
b. Use the advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations

19. To sort and filter data in a. Sort data in multiple columns a. Refine the data in a
table b. Sort data in a row worksheet and
c. Sort data using Custom order keep it organized
d. Filter data in work sheet b. Narrow a
worksheet by
selecting specific

142
 choice

20. To Practice Excel Graphs a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart a. Use data in Excel
and Charts b. Produce sheet to Create
c. Excel Column Chart technical charts and
graphs Produce
Excel Line Graph
b. Produce a
Pictograph in Excel
21. To develop lab reports of Create Lab reports using MS a. Insert Practical
respective discipline Word and Excel subject name in
Header and page
numbers in Footer
22. To format a Worksheet in a. Shade alternate rows of data a. Format Excel sheet
Excel, page setup and print b. Add currency and percentage b. Insert headers
symbols &footers and print
c. Change height of a row and
width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
23. To familiarize with Ribbon Use various options in Access required
layout &features of PowerPoint options in the tool bar
PowerPoint 2007.
a. Home
b. Insert
c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint Presentation PowerPoint PowerPoint
b. Change the Title of a presentation with
PowerPoint Slide photographs/ClipAr
c. PowerPoint Bullets t and text boxes
d. Add an Image to a PowerPoint b. Use bullets option
Slide
e. Add a Textbox to a
PowerPoint slide

25. To Set up a Master Slide in a. Create a PowerPoint Design a. Setup Master slide
PowerPoint and add notes Template and format
b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template

143
 f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
g. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation
26. To Insert Text and Objects a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and
b. Set Indents and line spacing Objects
c. Insert pictures/ clipart
d. Format pictures Use 3d features
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
27. To insert a Flow Chart / a. Create a Flow Chart in Create organizational
Organizational Charts PowerPoint charts and flow charts
b. Group and Ungroup Shapes using smart art
c. Use smart art
28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and
b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend

29. To insert a Charts/Graphs a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and Bar
PowerPoint graphs, Pie Charts and
format.
b. Work with the PowerPoint
Datasheet
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart
Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background

30. To Insert audio & video, a. Insert sounds in the slide and a. Insert Sounds and
Hyperlinks in a slide hide the audio symbol Video in
appropriate format.
b. Add narration to
Add narration to the slide b. Adjust the volume in the
the slide
settings c. Use hyperlinks to
c. Insert video file in the format switch to different
supported by PowerPoint in a slides and files
slide
d. Use automatic and on click

144
 options
e. Add narration to the slide
f. Insert Hyperlinks

31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation effects

effects b. To explore and practice
special animation effects like
Entrance, Emphasis, Motion
Paths &Exit
32. Reviewing presentation a. Checking spelling and a. Use Spell check and
grammar Grammar feature
b. Previewing presentation b. Setup slide show
c. Set up slide show c. Add timing to the
slides
d. Set up resolution
d. Setup automatic
e. Exercise with Rehearse slide show
Timings feature in PowerPoint
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool
during slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out

33 To familiarize with a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph

standard toolbox b. Use various tools such as and save it in
i. The Layer Tool Photoshop
ii. The Color & Swatches Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The Text
Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool

34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit image

b. Trim edges by using
c. Change the shape and size of a corresponding tools.
photo
d. Remove the part of
photograph including graphics
and text
35 To insert Borders around a. Start with a single background Able to create a
photograph layer border or frame
b. Bring the background forward around an image to
c. Enlarge the canvas
add visual interest to
d. Create a border color
e. Send the border color to the a photo

145
 back
f. Experiment with different
colors
36 To change Background of a a. open the foreground and Able to swap
Photograph background image background elements
b. Use different selection tools to using the Select and
paint over the image
Mask tool and layers.
c. Copy background image and
paste it on the foreground.
d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to
reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag the
background layer below the
foreground image layer.
37 To change colors of a. Change colors using: Able to control color
Photograph i) Color Replacement tool saturation
ii) Hue/Saturation adjustment
layer tool

38 To prepare a cover page for a. open a file with height 500 and Able to prepare cover
the book in subject area width 400 for the cover page. page for the book

b. apply two different colors to

work area by dividing it into
two parts using Rectangle tool.
c. Copy any picture and place it
on work area→ resize it using
free transform tool.
d. Type text and apply color and
style
e. Apply effects using blended
options

39 To adjust the brightness a. open a file. Able to control

and contrast of picture to b. Go to image→ adjustments→ brightness/contrast.
give an elegant look Brightness/Contrast.

c. adjust the brightness and

contrast.
d. Save the image.

40 To type a word and apply a. open a file Able to apply shadow

the shadow emboss effects b. Select the text tool and type emboss effects
text.
c. Select the typed text go to
layer→ layer style→ blended

146
 option→ drop shadow, inner
shadow, bevel and emboss→
contour→ satin→ gradient
overlay
d. Save the image.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1 to 8
Unit test-2 From 9 to 22
Unit test-3 From 23 to 40

I Year Internal Lab Examination

UNIT TEST - I
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: AEI-110

MAX MARKS:40 Time:90Min

1. Identify the internal hardware components of a PC and assemble them.

2. Identify the external components or peripherals of a PC and connect them.

3. Identify the components on motherboard.

4. Perform the process of placing processor on CPU slot.

5. Perform the process of removing and placing the RAM in the corresponding slot.

147
6. Identify the CMOS battery and test whether it is working it or not.

7. Find details of following:

a) Operating System being used.

b) Processor name

c) RAM

d) Hard disk

8. Create a folder by your name, search a file or folder and find its path.

9. Draw the National Flag using MS Paint.

10. Create a word document that contains TEN names of your classmates (boys-5 & girls-5) and

perform the following tasks:

a) Save the document to your desktop.

b) Sort the names in each list alphabetically.

c) Set line spacing to 1.15.

d) Use bullet points for the names in both lists separately.

***

148
 I Year Internal Lab Examination
UNIT TEST - II
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:AEI-110

MAX MARKS:40 Time:90Min

1. Write individually addressed letters to your friends about the Republic Day celebration
using Mail Merge.

2. Create a Word document about your college and insert page numbers in footer and College
Name in header.
3. Create your class time table using Tables in MS Word.
4. Create a 2-page document about your College& insert hyperlinks for courses offered in the
college and insert Bookmarks next to College Name.
5. Write individually addressed letters to your friends (at least 5 members) to intimate the
External Examination time table using Mail Merge.
(𝑥+𝑦)2 𝑥 2 +2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
6. Write an equation (𝑥−𝑦)2 = 𝑥 2 −2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2 in MS word.

7. Create the organizational structure of your college in MS Word.

8. Create a spreadsheet by totaling marks of 3 or more subjects, then calculate percentage and
hence find grade based on boundary conditions of FIVE students:
Grades O >= 90%, A >=80%, B >=70%, C >=60%, D >=50%, E >=40%, F <40%
9. Create a Excel spreadsheet for the following data, making sure that the cell marked with
Category (A1) is pasted in cell A1 in the spreadsheet and perform the questions below.

Category (A1) Product Name Quantity Inventory Price per Unit Total Price

Office Supplies Binder 2 20 12.99 25.98

Office Supplies Pencil 20 20 0.99

Electronics Samsung 4K Smart TV 1 5 399.00

Electronics Bluetooth Speakers 4 5 44.49

Computers Lenovo X230 12in Laptop 2 2 279.90

a) Change the format of the “Total Price” column to “Currency” format.
b) Calculate Total Price by writing formula.
c) Turn on filtering for the table.
d) Sort the table by column “Category” from A to Z.
10. Create a spreadsheet to calculate Cumulative monthly attendance for a period of Three months.
***

149
 Year Internal Lab Examination
UNIT TEST - III
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: AEI-110

MAX MARKS:40 Time:90Min

1. Create a PowerPoint Presentation about your College in 5 slides only.

2. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on Computer Hardware in minimum 5 slides.
3. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on Computer Fundamentals with Entrance, Emphasis effects
in minimum 5 slides.
4. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on any topic with special animation effects like Entrance,
Motion Paths &Exit.
5. Resize the image using Photoshop.
6. Change the background of a Photograph.
7. Edit an image by using
a) Crop tool.
b) Resize the image
c) Save the new image with new name keeping original image as it is.
8. A Picture of two parrots (parrots.jpg) is given to you. Make anyone of one of the parrots in
Black & White.
9. Convert a colour image to monochrome and improve quality of photograph.
10. Copy three pictures and fit into the empty frames.

***

150
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING
MODEL PRACTICAL QUESTION PAPER-YEAR END EXAM
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB

SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:AEI-110

MAX MARKS:60 TIME: 3HOURS

1. Identify the internal hardware components of a PC and assemble them.

2. Identify the external components or peripherals of a PC and connect them.
3. Write the procedure to create the files and folders
4. Write the procedure to access Calculator, Paint and Notepad application
5. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word
(a) Change the Font Size
(b) Change the Font Style
(c) Change the Text Size
6. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word
(a) Change the Font Color.
(b)Use Various Text Alignment Options.
(c)Format text in Bold, Italic and Underline.
7. Create the hierarchy of your family in MS Word.
8. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word:
(a)Insert a Table
(b) Add a Row
(c) Add a column
(d) Delete a Row
(e) Delete a column
(𝑥+𝑦)2 𝑥 2 +2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
9. Write the procedure to use Equation(𝑥−𝑦)2 = 𝑥 2 −2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2 and Symbols.

10. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Excel

(a)To Modify Column Width
(b) To Modify Row Height
(c) Format text in Bold, Italic, and Underline.
11. Write the procedure to create charts and Graphs in MS Excel.
12. Write the procedure to create simple Power Point Presentation on your college in Three slides.
13. Write the procedure to perform Animation on Text and Objects in your presentation.
14. Take a photographic image. Give a title for the image. Put the border. Write your names. Write
the Name of Institution and Place.

151
15. Prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area. Plan your own design.
16. You are given a picture of a flower and associated background (Extract.jpg).Extract the Flower
only from that and organize it on a background. Select your own background for organization.
17. You are given a picture (BrightnessContrast.jpg). Adjust the brightness and contrast of the
picture so that it gives an elegant look.
18. You are given a picture (position.jpg). Position the picture preferably on a plain background of a
color of your choice - Positioning include rotation and scaling.
19. Remove the arrows and text from the given photographic image(Filename: photo.jpg).
20. Type a word; apply the following effects. Shadow Emboss.

***

152
III SEMESTER

153
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS

CURRICULUM-20

III SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period / week Total
Subject
Name of the Subject Periods
Code End
/semes Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals ter Exam
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks

THEORY

AEI-301 Mathematics – II 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

AEI-302 Electronic circuits 4 60 3 20 80 100

AEI-303 Digital Electronics 5 75 3 20 80 100

Electronic Measuring
AEI-304 4 60 3 20 80 100
Instruments

5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-305 Process Instrumentation

AEI-306 Programming in C 5 75 3 20 80 100

PRACTICAL

AEI-307 Electronic circuits Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100

AEI-308 Digital Electronics Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100

Electronic Measuring
AEI-309 3 45 3 40 60 100
Instruments Lab
Process Instrumentation
AEI-310 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
Programming In C and
AEI-311 3 45 3 40 60 100
MATLAB

TOTAL 27 15 630 - 320 780 1100

154
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Code Periods/week periods FA SA
Engineering
AEI-301 4 60 20 80
Mathematics-II

S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

1 Indefinite Integration 22 CO1
2 Definite Integration and its applications 24 CO2
3 Differential Equations of first order 14 CO3
Total Periods 60

(i) To Explainthe concepts of indefinite integrals and definite integrals with

applications to engineering problems.
Course Objectives (ii) To Explainthe formation of differential equations and learn various methods of
solving them.

CO1 Integrate various functions using different methods.

Course Outcomes CO2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
CO3 Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of first
order and first degree.

155
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
Learning Outcomes

Unit-I
C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods.
L.O.1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals  (u + v) dx and  ku
dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.
1.3. Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i)  f(ax + b) dx where f(x)dx is in standard form.
ii)  [f(x)]n f (x) dx
iii)  f (x)/[f(x)] dx
iv)  f {g(x)} g (x) dx
1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the above.
1.6. Evaluate the integrals of the form sinmx cosn x dx where m and n are suitable positive
integers.
1.7. Evaluateintegrals of suitable powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2

1 1 1
ii ) , ,
a x
2 2
a x
2 2
x  a2
2

iii ) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2
1.9. Evaluate the integrals of the type
1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos d and  a cos  b sin   cd .
1.10. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.11. Solve problems using integration by parts.
1.12 Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form  u.vdx .
1.13. Evaluate the integrals of the form ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.

Unit-II
C.O.2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
L.O.2.1. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
2.2. Explain the concept of definite integral.
2.3. Solve problems on definite integrals over an interval using the above concept.
2.4. State various properties of definite integrals.
2.5. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

156
 2.6. Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
2.7. Find the areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using integration.
2.8. Obtain the mean value and root mean square value of the functions in any given interval.
2.9. Obtain the volumes of solids of revolution.
2.10.Solve some problems using Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule for approximation of integrals.

Unit -III
C.O. 3 Form differential equations and solve differential equations of first order and first degree.
L.O.3.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
3.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.
3.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
3.4Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables separable method.
3.5 Solve Homogeneous differential equation of first order and first degree.
3.6 Solve exact differential equation of first order and first degree.
3.7 Solve linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q, where P and Q are functions of x or
constants.
3.8 Solve Bernoulli’s differential equation reducible to linear form.
3.9 Solve simple problems arising in engineering applications.

Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

157
 C-20
Engineering Mathematics – II
CO/PO – Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.6 2.6 2.6 3 2.3 2.6

3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)

PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be
planned and conducted.
PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.

PSO1: An ability to Explainthe concepts of basic mathematical techniques and to apply them in
various areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and
electronic systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tools, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.
PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.

Engineering Mathematics – II
PO- CO – Mapping strength
CO periods addressing PO in
column I
Mapped with CO Level
PO no Remarks
no (1,2 or 3)

Number %
1 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 >40% Level 3
2 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 Highly
3 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 addressed
4 CO2, CO3 38 63.3% 3
5 25% to 40%
6 Level 2
7 Moderately

158
 PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 addressed
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3 40 66.6% 3
5% to 25% Level
1 Low addressed
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3 48 75% 3
<5% Not
addressed

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
COURSE CONTENTS
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration.
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard functions. Properties of
indefinite integrals. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec

 sin
m
x, cosec x. Integrals of the form x.cos n x dx, where at least one of m and n is odd
positive integers. Integrals of suitable powers of tanx. secx and cosecx.cotx by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2

1 1 1
ii ) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii ) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebraic functions.
Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form  ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.

Unit-II
Definite Integral and its applications:
2. Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,
evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum. Area under plane
curves – Area enclosed between two curves. Mean and RMS values of a function on a given
interval Volumes of solids of revolution. Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an
approximate value of a define integral.

Unit -III
Differential Equations:
3. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a differential equation- formation of
differential equations-solutions of differential equations of first order and first degree using
methods, variables separable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s
equation.

Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-II, a textbook for third semester diploma courses, prepared & prescribed
by SBTET, AP.

159
 Reference Books:
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers, Moscow.

BLUE PRINT

S. Chapter/Unit No of Weighta Marks wise Questionwise COs

No title Periods geallott distribution of distributionof mapped
ed weightage weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I:
1 Indefinite 22 28 11 11 06 0 2 2 2 0 CO1
Integration
Unit – II:
Definite
2 Integration 24 33 11 03 11 08 2 1 2 1 CO2
and its
applications
Unit – III:
Differential
3 14 19 03 03 03 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Equations of
first order
Total 60 80 25 17 20 18 5 4 5 2
R: Remembering Type : 25 Marks
U: understanding Type : 17 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 20 Marks
An: Analysing Type : 18 Marks

Engineering Mathematics – II
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.5

Unit Test-II FromL.O 2.6 to L.O 3.9

160
 UNIT TEST MODEL PAPERS
Unit Test I C –20, AEI-301
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-II
Sub Code: AEI-301
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40
Part-A 16Marks
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each.

1. Answer the following.

 x dx
8
Evaluate (CO1)
1
Evaluate  4  x2
dx. (CO1)

 e  f ( x)  f ( x)  dx  e x f ( x)  c is true/false
x '
(CO1)

2
a. Evaluate cos xdx0
(CO2)

 1

Evaluate  3cos ec x  2 tan x sec x 
2
2.  dx. (CO1)
x
sin  log x 
3. Evaluate  dx. (CO1)
x
4. Evaluate  e x sin 2 xdx. (CO1)

2

 sin
2
5. Evaluate xdx (CO2)
0

161
 Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.

1
6. A) Evaluate  dx. (CO1)
5  4 cos x
or

B) Evaluate  sin 4 x cos3 xdx. (CO1)

 1  x2 
7. 
A) Evaluate cos 1  2 
 1 x 
dx. (CO1)

or

B) Evaluate  x 4 e2 x dx. (CO1)


2
8. A) Evaluate  cos 4 x cos xdx
0
(CO2)

or

2
sin10 x
B) Evaluate 0 sin10 x  cos10 x dx (CO2)

-o0o-

162
 Unit Test II C –20, AEI-301
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-II
Sub Code: AEI-301
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each.
1. Answer the following.

a. Volume of the curve y  f ( x) over the interval  a, b when rotated about X-axis is

____________ (CO2)

b. Mean value of f ( x) over the interval  a, b is____________ (CO2)

d2y
c. Order of differential equation 2
 p 2 y  0 is__________ (CO3)
dx

dy
d. Integrating factor of  Py  Q is________________ (CO3)
dx

2. Find the mean value of x 2  2 x  1 over the interval 1, 2 (CO2)

3. Find the area enclosed by curve x 2  4 y between the lines x  2 and x  4 (CO2)

4. Form the differential equation by eliminating the arbitrary constants from

y  A cos 2 x  B sin 2 x. (CO3)

dy 1 y2
5. Solve  . (CO3)
dx 1  x2

163
 Part-B 3×8=24
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.
6. A) Find the area bounded between the curve y  x 2  5x and the line y  4  2 x (CO2)
Or

B) Find the R.M.S value of log x between the lines x  e to x  e2 (CO2)

x2 y 2
7. A) Find the volume of the solid obtained by revolving the ellipse   1 about x axis
16 25
(CO2)
or
6
1
B) Calculate the approximate value of  1  x dx by taking n  6 using Trapezoidal rule
0

(CO3)

8. A) Solve  y 2  2 xy  dx   2 xy  x 2  dy  0. (CO3)
or
dy y
B) Solve x   x3 y 6 . (CO3)
dx x

-o0o-

164
 END EXAM MODEL PAPERS
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS AEI-301
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- I MAX.MARKS : 80M
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

 4 

1. Evaluate  2sin x  3 e 
x
 dx. CO1
1  x2 


x x
2. Evaluate e sin e dx. CO1


3. Evaluate sin 3x cos 2 xdx. CO1


x
4. Evaluate xe dx. CO1

1
1
5. Evaluate  1 x
0
2
dx. CO2

6. Find the mean value of y  x 2 from x  0 to x  1 CO2

7. Find the area of the region bounded by the curve y  sin x from x  0 to x  
CO2
2
 d3y 
2
 dy 
8. Find the order and degree of the differential equation  3   3    x 2  1
 dx   dx 
CO3

dy 1  y 2
9. Solve  CO3
dx 1  x 2

   
10. Solve x 2  y dx  y 2  x dy  0. CO3

165
 PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M
3x  1
11. A) Evaluate   x  1 x  3 dx. CO1

Or
1
B) Evaluate  5  4 cos x dx. CO1

12. A) Evaluate  x sin 3xcosxdx. CO1

Or

x
3
B) Evaluate cos xdx. CO1

1
x3
13. A) Evaluate  dx.
0
1  x8
CO2
Or

2
1
B) Evaluate  1  tan
0
3
x
dx. CO2

14. A) Find the area of the region bounded by the curves y 2  4 x and x 2  4 y . CO2
Or

B) Find the R.M.S values of 27  4x 2 from x  0 to x  3 CO2

x2 y 2
15. A) Find the volume of the solid generated by revolution of the ellipse   1 about
16 25
X-axis CO2
Or
11

 x dx by using Simpson’s 1/3

3 rd
B) Calculate the approximate value of rule by dividing the
1

range into 10 equal parts. CO2

PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M
dy
16. Solve 2sin x  y cos x  xy 3e x . CO3
dx
***

166
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS AEI - 301
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER-II MAX.MARKS : 80M
PART-A

Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

 3

1. Evaluate  3 e  2cos x 
x
 dx. CO1
x


2
2. Evaluate cos 2 xdx. CO1

tan 1 x
3. Evaluate  1  x2 dx. CO1


4. Evaluate x cos xdx. CO1

2
1
5. Evaluate 0 4  x2
dx. CO2

6. Find the mean value of i  a sin t over the complete wave. CO2

7. Find the volume generated by revolving the circle x 2  y 2  9 from x  0 to

x  2 about x-axis CO2

8. Obtain the differential equation by eliminating the arbitrary constants A and B

from the curve y  Ae x  Be x CO3

dy
9. Solve  e2 x  y CO3
dx

dy y
10. Solve  x CO3
dx x

167
 PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M
1
11. A) Evaluate  2x 2
 3x  5
dx. CO1

Or

B) Evaluate  sin 3 x cos5 xdx. CO1

 2  sin 2 x 
e
x
12. A) Evaluate   dx. CO1
 1  cos 2 x 
Or

e
2x
B) Evaluate x 4 dx. CO1

1
sec2 x
13. A) Evaluate  1  tan x 
0
2
dx. CO2

Or

2
B) Evaluate log 1  tan   d .
 CO2
0

14. A) Find the area bounded between the curves y  x 2 and the line y  3x  4 . CO3

Or

B) Find the R.M.S value of log x between the lines x  e to x  e2 CO2

15. A) Find the volume of right circular cone using integration. CO2
Or
1
1
B) Find the approximate value of  from  1 x
0
2
dx using Trapezoidal rule by dividing

0,1 into 5 equal sub-intervals. CO2

PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M
16. Solve xy 2 dy   x3  y 3  dx  0 CO3

***

168
 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA

AEI-302 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS 04 60 20 80

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 FET, MOSFET 09 CO1

2 Transistor biasing and stabilization 11 CO2

3 Small Signal Amplifiers 8 CO3

4 Feedback amplifiers& Power Amplifiers 10 CO4

5 Oscillators 10 CO5

6 Sweep circuits & Multivibrators 12 CO6

TOTAL 60

Upon completion of the course the student will be able to:

1. Explainthe operation of FET, and MOSFET.

2. Use various transistor biasing and stabilization circuits.

Course Objectives
3. Explain different small signal, and large signal amplifiers.

4. Explain different feedback amplifiers and oscillators.

5.Explaindifferent sweep circuits and multivibrators.

169
 CO1 AEI- Explain the working of FET and MOSFET.
302.1

CO2 AEI- Explain transistor biasing and stabilizing techniques

302.2

CO3 AEI- Explain the working of small signal amplifiers

Course 302.3
Outcomes
CO4 AEI- Analyze power amplifiers and feedback amplifiers
302.4

CO5 AEI- Analyse the various oscillator circuits

302.5

CO6 AEI- Explain various sweep circuits and multivibrators

302.6

LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0Explainthe construction and working of FET, andMOSFET’s.

1.1Classify FETs.
1.2List the advantages of JFET over BJT.
1.3Draw the symbols of P-channel and N-channel JFET.
1.4Explain the construction and working of N-channel JFET.
1.5Draw the drain and transfer characteristics of N-channel JFET.
1.6List the applications of FET.
1.7List the types of MOSFETs.
1.8Explain the construction and principle of operation of N- channel depletion and
Enhancement type MOSFETs.
1.9Explain the construction and principle of operation of CMOSFET.

2.0Transistor biasing and stabilization

2.1 Explain the transistor as an amplifier in CB, CE and CC modes.
2.2State,why CE Mode is widely used in amplifier circuits.
2.3Define DC load line and AC load line.
2.4Determine the Q- point (operating point) on the DC load line.
2.5Define transistor biasing.
2.6State the need for proper biasing in amplifier circuits.
2.7 List the types of biasing circuits.
2.8 Explain potential divider method of biasing.
2.9 Define the term stabilization.
2.10 State the need for stabilization in amplifier circuits.
2.11 Define stability factors S, SV and Sβ.

170
2.12 List the compensation techniques.
2.13 Explain Diode and Thermistor compensation techniques.
3.0Small signal Amplifiers
3.1 Classify the amplifiers based on frequency, period of conduction, and coupling.
3.2 State the need of multistage amplifier (Cascading of amplifiers).
3.3 List the types of couplings used in amplifiers.
3.4Explain the principle of operation of two-stage RC coupled amplifier with circuit
diagram and draw its frequency response.
3.5Explain the principle of operation of two-stage transformer coupled amplifier
with circuit diagram and draw its frequency response.
3.6Draw and explain the circuit of Direct Coupled Amplifiers.
3.7Compare RC coupling, transformer coupling and Direct Coupling schemes used
in amplifiers.
4.0Feedback Amplifiers and power amplifiers
4.1 Compare Negative and Positive feedbacks.
4.2 Explain the principle of negative feedback in amplifiers.
4.3 Classify negative feedback amplifiers.
4.4 Draw and explain the following block diagram arrangements, of negative
feedback amplifiers.
(a)Voltage –Series (b) Voltage –Shunt (c) Current- Series (d) Current - Shunt
4.5 Draw and Explain the Emitter follower circuit and mention its advantages.
4.6 Draw and Explain the working of Darlington amplifier circuit.
4.7 Distinguish between voltage amplifiers and power amplifiers.
4.8 Classify power amplifier circuits on the basis of frequency, period of conduction,
and configurations.
4.9 Draw and explain the circuit of Push Pull Amplifier.
4.10 List the advantages of push-pull amplifiers.
4.11 List the applications of power amplifier.
4.12 State the necessity of Heat sink for a power transistor and power I.C. device.
4.13 List the different types of heat sinks.
5.0Oscillators
5.1List the Barkhausen Criterion conditions for an amplifier to work as an
oscillator.
5.2List the essentials of an oscillator.
5.3Classify oscillator circuits.
5.4Draw and explain the working of an RC phase shift and Wein bridge oscillator
circuits.
5.5State the conditions of sustained oscillations and derive the expression for the
frequency of oscillations of RC phase shift oscillator and Wein bridge
oscillator circuits.
5.6Draw and explain the working of Hartley, and Colpitts oscillator circuits.
5.7Draw and explain the working of Crystal oscillator circuit.
5.8Write the expressions for frequency of oscillation and mention the conditions for
sustained oscillations of Hartley, Colpitts, and Crystal oscillator circuits.
5.9List the advantages of crystal oscillators over other types.

171
 5.10 State the reasons for instability in oscillator circuits.
5.11 Suggest the remedies for instability in oscillator.
5.12 List the applications of oscillators.

6.0Sweep circuits and Multivibrators

6.1Define Sweep Voltage.
6.2State the fundamental consideration of sweep waveform.
6.3Distinguish between voltage and current time-base generators.
6.4Explain how transistor works as a switch, in CE mode.
6.5Draw and explain the Bootstrap sweep circuit.
6.6Draw and explain Miller’s sweep circuit using transistor.
6.7Draw current sweep circuit using transistor and explain its working with waveform.
6.8Classify Multivibrators.
6.9Draw and explain the working of Transistorised Astable, Bistable and Monostable multivibrators
with waveforms.
6.10 Draw and explain the working of Schmitt trigger circuit using transistor with
waveforms.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-302.1 1 1 3 2

AEI-302.2 1 1 1 1 3 2

AEI-302.3 1 1 1 3 2

AEI-302.4 1 1 1 3 2

AEI-302.5 1 1 3 2

AEI-302.6 1 1 3 2

Average 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENT:

1.0 FET,MOSFET: FET- construction and working, characteristics, applications.

MOSFET – types, construction and working, applications.

2.0 Transistor Biasing & Stabilization: Transistor as an amplifier, operating point,

DC load line, Biasing- types of biasing, potential divider biasing, Stabilization, stability
factors, Compensation techniques.

172
 3.0 Small Signal Amplifiers: Classification of amplifiers, working and frequencyresponse of
two- stage RC coupled ,transformer coupled amplifiers, and Direct coupled Amplifier .

4.0 Feedback Amplifers & Power Amplifiers: Feedback Amplifers- negative andpositive feedback.
Classification of negative feedback amplifiers, Darlingtonamplifier, Emitter follower. Power
Amplifiers- push-pull Amplifier, Comparisonof voltage and power amplifiers, Applications of
power amplifiers. Necessity of a heat sink-Types of heat sink.

5.0 Oscillators: Barkhausen criterion conditions, Classification of oscillators, RC oscillators - RC

phase shift oscillator and Wein bridge oscillator. LC Oscillators -Hartley and Colpitts
oscillators. Crystal Oscillator working, advantages of crystaloscillator. Reasons and remedies
for instability in oscillator circuits. Applications ofoscillators.

6.0 Sweep circuits &Multivibrators: Sweep circuits - Time base generators, Bootstrap sweep
circuit, Miller sweep circuit, Current sweep circuit. Multivibrators-Classification of
multivibrators, TransistorisedAstable, monostable and bistablemultivibrators with
waveforms. Schmitt trigger using transistor - operation andwaveforms.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. G.K.Mithal - Electronic Devices and Circuits, S.Chand.
2. David A.Bell - Electronic Devices and Circuits 4th edition, PHI .
3. T.F. Bogart Jr, J.S.Beasley and G.Rico - Electronic Devices and Circuits , Pearson Education,6th
edition, 2004.
4. Albert Malvino. – J Bates - Electronic Principles 7th edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
(TMH) Publishers.
5. V.K. Mehta - Principles of Electronics, S Chand & Company, 2008.
6. A.P.Godse - Electronic Devices and Circuits, S.Chand.
7. Milliman and Halkies - Integrated electronics, MGH.

173
 BLUE PRINT
Marks Wise Question Wise
No of distribution of distribution of
Sl Chapter/ Weightag COs
Period weightage Weightage
No Unit Title e Allotted mapped
s
R U Ap An R U Ap An

FET,MOSFE
1 10 14 6 8 2 1 CO1
T

Transistor
Biasing and
2 10 14 6 8 2 1 CO2
Stabilizatio
n

Small
3 Signal 8 11 3 8 1 1 CO3
Amplifiers

Feedback
amplifiers&
4 10 14 6 8 2 1 CO4
Power
amplifiers

5 Oscillators 10 14 6 8 2 1 CO5

Sweep
circuits and
6 12 03 3 1 - CO6
Multivibrat
ors

Higher
Order
Question 10 10 1 CO5
from
chapter 5

Total 60 80 30 16 24 10 10 2 4 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.7

Unit Test-II From 4.1 to 6.10

174
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMNATIONS (C-20)
DAEIE – III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS (AEI-302)
Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 80
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. List the types of MOSFETs. (CO1)

2. List the advantages of JFET over BJT. (CO1)

3. Why CE Mode is widely used in Amplifier Circuits. (CO2)

4. State the necessity of stabilization in amplifier in amplifier circuits. (CO2)

5. List the types of couplings. (CO3)

6. List any three advantages of Push pull amplifier. (CO4)

7. List the different types of heat sinks. (CO4)

8. List any three reasons for instability in oscillator circuits. (CO5)

9. State the merits of crystal oscillator over other oscillators. (CO5)

10. Define Sweep Voltage. (CO6)

175
 PART- B

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks
2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer. 5x8=40 M

11. (A). Explain the construction and working of N-channel JFET. (CO1)

or

(B). Explain the construction and principle of operation of CMOS FET. (CO1)

12. (A). Explain potential divider method of biasing. (CO2)

or

(B). Determine the Q-point on the DC load line. (CO2)

13. (A). Explain the principle of operation of two stage Transformer coupled amplifier and

draw its frequency response . (CO3)

Or

(B) Explain the two stage RC Coupled Amplifier with circuit diagram and draw

its frequency response. (CO3)

14. (A)Explain the following block diagram arrangements of negative feedback amplifiers with
diagram.
(a)Voltage –Series (b) Current – Shunt (CO4)

or

(B). Explain the circuit of Push Pull Amplifier with diagram. (CO4)

15. a)Explain the working of RC phase shift oscillator circuit with diagram(CO5)

Or

b)Explain the working of Colpitts oscillator circuit with diagram(CO5)

PART- C 1×10=10

Instructions: 1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.

2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the
content but not the length of the answer.

16Derive the expression for frequency of oscillations of Wein’s bridge oscillator (CO5)

***

176
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS (AEI-302)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i)Draw the symbol of FET. (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) Write the full form of MOSFET. (CO1)
iii)FET is a _____________ controlled Device. (CO1)
iv) A current ratio of IC/IE is usually less than one and is called ------ (CO2)
2 List the types of MOSFETs. (CO1) 3M
3. Define the term stabilization. (CO2) 3M

4. List the three types of couplings used in amplifiers. (CO3) 3M

5. List any three compensation techniques. (CO2)3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and ,each question carries
Eightmarks.

6. (A). Explain the construction and working of N-channel JFET. (CO1)

Or
(B). Explain the construction and principle of operation of Depletion mode MOSFET.
(CO1)

7. (A). Explain Diode compensation technique. (CO2)

Or
(B). Explain potential divider method of biasing. (CO2)

8.(A). Explain the principle of operation of two-stage transformer coupled amplifier. (CO3)
Or
(B). Classify the amplifiers based on frequency, period of conduction, and coupling. (CO3)

***

177
 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks

Course code Course title
per week periods for FA for SA

DIGITAL
AEI-303 5 75 20 80
ELECTRONICS

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

Basics of Digital
1 18 CO1
Electronics
Combinational CO2
2 16
Logic circuits
Sequential Logic CO3
3 Circuits 19

Registers and CO4

4 Memories 12

A/D and D/A CO5

5 converters 10

TOTAL 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Usevarious number systems, postulates of Boolean algebra, logic gates.
Acquaint with the combinational logic circuits.
Course ii) Acquaint with the Sequential logic circuits.
Objectives iii) Acquaint with the registers and memories.
iv) Acquaint with the A/D and D/A converters.
v)
CO1 Convert a number from one system to another system, logic gates;
AEI- simplify logic expressions using Boolean laws and K-map.
303.1
CO2 Implement combinational logic circuits.
AEI-
303.2
CO3 Implement sequential logic circuits.
Course AEI-
outcomes 303.3
CO4 Classify different registers, semiconductor memories.
AEI-
303.4
CO5 Explain the principle of operation of A/D and D/A convertors.
AEI-
303.5

178
 1.0 Explainthe basics of Digital Electronics
Learning
Outcomes 1.1 Explain Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal number systems and compare with
Decimal system.
1.2 Convert one number system to another of the above systems.
1.3 Perform binary addition, subtraction, Multiplication and Division.
1.4 Write 1‘s complement and 2‘s complement numbers for a given binary
number.
1.5 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 2‘s complement method.
1.6 Compare weighted and Un-weighted codes.
1.7 Write Binary equivalent number for number in 8421, Excess-3 and Gray code and
vice-versa.
1.8 State the use of alphanumeric codes (ASCII & EBCDIC) .
1.9 State the importance of parity Bit.
1.10 List the types of parity bits.
1.11 State different postulates in Boolean algebra.
1.12 Write Boolean expressions for the given statement of the problem (Limited 3
variables only).
1.13 State De-Morgan‘s theorems.
1.14 Apply De-Morgan‘s theorems and other postulates to simple Boolean
expressions.
1.15 Write Boolean expressions from the given truth table.
1.16 Use Karnaugh map to simplify Boolean Expression (up to 3 variables only).
1.17 Explain AND, OR, NOT operators with truth table.
1.18 Explain the working of an exclusive – OR gate with truth table.
1.19 Explain the working of NAND, NOR gates using truth tables.
1.20 Develop AND, OR, NOT operations using NAND, NOR gates.
1.21 List the numbers of two input Digital IC Logic gates.

2.0 Explainthe working of combinational logic circuits

2.1 Define combinational logic circuit.

2.2 State the function of the Half-adder.
2.3 Draw Half adder circuit using Exclusive OR gate and an AND gate.
2.4 Realise a Half-adder using NAND gates only and NOR gates only.
2.5 State the function of the full-adder.
2.6 Draw full adder using basic gates.
2.7 Show that two Half-adders and an OR – gate constitutes a full-adder.
2.8 Draw a 4 Bit parallel adder using full – adders.
2.9 Explain the working of the above circuit.
2.10 Draw and Explain 2‘s compliment parallel adder/ subtractor circuit.
2.11 Explain the working of a serial adder with a Block diagram.
2.12 Distinguish between serial and parallel adder.
2.13 Draw and explain the operation 4 X 1 Multiplexer
2.14 Draw and explain the operation 1 X 4 De-multiplexer
2.15 Draw and explain 2 X 4 and 3 X 8 decoders.
2.16 List the applications of Multiplexer and decoder.
2.17 Explain the working of 4 X 2 encoder.
2.18 Draw and explain one-bit digital comparator.

179
3.0 Explainthe working of Sequential logic circuits

3.1 Define Sequential logic circuit.

3.2 Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous sequential logic circuits.
3.3 Construct SR flip flop using NAND gates and explain its operation.
3.4 Explain JK flip flop with the help of truth table.
3.5 State the need for preset and clear inputs.
3.6 State the race around condition.
3.7 List the conditions for eliminating the race around condition.
3.8 Explain JK Master Slave flip flop with truth table.
3.9 Explain the D flip flop and T flip-flop with the help of truth table and diagram.
3.10 Define counter.
3.11 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous counters.
3.12 Define Modulus of the Counter.
3.13 Explain asynchronous ripple counter (MOD-16) with the help of flip-flops and
timing diagrams.
3.14 Explain asynchronous ripple counter (MOD-10 or Decade. counter) with the help
of flip-flops and gates.
3.15 Explain synchronous ripple counter (MOD-16) with the help of flip-flops and gates.
3.16 Explain the working of Ring counter and list its applications.

4.0 Explainworking of Registers and memories

4.1 Define the term Register.
4.2 State the need for a Register.
4.3 Explain the working of serial in Serial out, serial in Parallel out, Parallel in serial out
and Parallel in parallel out Registers.
4.4 Explain the working of shift left and shift right Registers.
4.5 Explain the working of Universal shift register (74194 or equivalent)
4.6 List the applications of Register.
4.7 List various types of memories.
4.8 Differentiate between ROM and RAM.
4.9 Explain the principle of working of ROM.
4.10 State different types of ROM.
4.11 Explain the principle of working of RAM.
4.12 Compare static RAM and dynamic RAM.
4.13 List different ROM and RAM ICs.

5.0 A/D and D/A converters

5.1 State the need for A/D converters.

5.2 State the need for D/A conversion.
5.3 Explain the basic principle of D/A conversion.
5.4 Define the terms resolution, Accuracy, Monotonicity and settling time of D/A
converter.
5.5 Explain D/A conversion using weighted resistors.
5.6 Explain D/A conversion using R-2R ladder network.
5.7 Explain A/D conversion using counter method.
5.8 Explain A/D conversion using successive approximate method.

180
COURSE CONTENTS

1.0 Basics of Digital Electronics

Binary, Octal. Hexadecimal numbering systems. Conversion from one system to another
number system. Binary codes, excess-3 and gray codes. Logic gates: AND, OR, NOT, NAND,
NOR, Exclusive-OR. Boolean algebra, Boolean expressions.Demorgan‘s Theorems. Karnaugh
map.

2.0 Combinational logic circuits

Half adder, Full adder, Serial and parallel Binary adder. Parallel adder,
Multiplexer,Demultiplexer, decoder, encoder, Digital comparator

3.0 Sequential logic circuits

Principle of flip-flops operation, RS, D, JK, T, JK Master Slave flip-flops. Binarycounter,
asynchronous ripple counter, decade counter., synchronous counter, RingCounter.

4.0 Registers and memories

Shift Registers- serial in Serial out, serial in Parallel out, Parallel in serial out andParallel in
parallel out Registers. Universal shift registers-Applications.RAM, ROM,static RAM, dynamic
RAM.

5.0 A/D and D/A Converters

Necessity of A/D and D/A converters.Weighted resistors and R-2R ladder method ofD/A
converters.Counter and SAR method of A/D converters.

Reference Books

1RP JAIN - Modern Digital Electronics, TMH.

2. Tokhem - Digital Electronics, TMH.
3. Puri - Digital Electronics, TMH.
4. Bartee, Digital Computer Fundamentals, McGraw Hill Education India.
5. B. Somanathan Nair - Digital Electronics and logic design, PHI.
6.Malvino - Digital Computer Electronics , TMH.
7.M. Morris Mano - Digital logic and computer design, Pearson.
8. C.V.S. RAO - Switching theory and logic design, Pearson.
9. Samuel C.Lee - Digital circuits and logic design, Prentice Hall.
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-303.1 1 1 1 3 2
AEI-303.2 1 1 1 3 2
AEI-303.3 2 2 3 2
AEI-303.4 1 1 2 3 2
AEI-303.5 1 3 2
Average 1.2 1 1.25 2 1 3 2 1
3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

181
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Weightag Distribution of Distribution of COs
No. of
e of Weightage Weightage Mapp
S. Major Topics period
marks ed
No
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Basics of Digital 17 6 3 8 2 1 1
1 18 CO1
Electronics
Combinational 17 9 8 3 1 CO2
2 16
Logic circuits
Sequential Logic CO3
14 6 8 2 1
3 Circuits 19

Registers and CO4

11 3 8 1 1
4 Memories 12

A/D and D/A CO5

11 3 8 1 1
5 converters 10

Higher order
CO1,C
question from
10 10 1 O2,CO
chapter 1 or 2 or
3
3

Total 75 80 27 27 26 - 9 4 3 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.5

Unit Test-II From 3.6 to 5.8

182
 C-20-AEI-303
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)
DAEIE- THIRDSEMESTER EXAMINATION
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) Each question carries three marks
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple
sentences.

1. State the importance of parity bits. (CO1)

2. State De-Morgan’s theorem. (CO1)

3. Compare weighted and un weighted codes. (CO1)

4. List any three applications of Multiplexer. (CO2)

5. Draw the half adder circuit using basic gates. (CO2)

6. Sate the difference between serial and Parallel Adder (CO2)

7. Define the term “sequential logic circuit” (CO3)

8. Define the term “counter” (CO3)

9. List any three applications of a register. (CO4)

10. State the need for D/A converters . (CO5)

PART- B

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer. 5x8=40 M

11. (A). Explain the working of exclusive OR gate and OR gates with truth tables . (CO1)
or
(B). Explain the working of NAND, NOR gate with truth table . (CO1)

12. (A). Explain 2’s complement parallel adder /sub tractor circuit (CO2)
or
(B). Explain one bit digital comparator with diagram (CO2)

183
 13. (A). Explain JK master/Slave flip-flop with truth table (CO3)
Or
(B). Explain the working of Ring counter (CO3)

14. (A). Explain the principle of working of ROM (CO4)

Or
(B). Explain the working of universal shift register (CO4)

15. (A). Explain D/A conversion using R-2R Ladder network (CO5)
Or
(B). Explain A/D conversion using successive approximation method (CO5)

PART- C
1×10=10

Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.

(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. Design a synchronous ripple counter(MOD-16) with the help of flip-flop and gates.(CO3)

***

184
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS (AEI-303)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) (1100)2=(----)10 (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) (-----------)2=(265)8 (CO2)
iii) Define sequential logic circuit. (CO1)
iv)Write the sum equation of the half adder. (CO2)
2. Compare weighted and unweghted codes in any three aspects. (CO1) 3M
3. State De-Morgan’s theorem (CO1) 3M
4. Draw 4 Bit parallel adder using full – adders. (CO2) 3M
5. State the need for present and clear inputs (CO3) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question andeach question carries
Eight marks.

6. (A). Explain the working of NAND, NOR gates using truth tables. (CO1)
or
(B). Explain the working of an exclusive – OR gate with truth table. (CO1)

7. (A). Explain the working of a serial adder with a Block diagram. (CO2)
Or
(B). Draw and explain the operation 4 X 1 Multiplexer. (CO2)

8. (A). Construct SR flip flop using NAND gates and explain its operation. (CO3)

or
(B). Show that two Half-adders and an OR – gate constitutes a full-adder. (CO2)

***

185
 DAEIE- SECOND UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS (AEI-303)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1) i) Define counter (CO4) 4X1M=4M

ii) List various types of memories. (CO4)
iii) List the applications of Register. (CO4)
iv) Define the terms Accuracy of D/A converter. (CO5)
2. List different applications of Ring counter . (CO4) 3M
3. Draw the diagram of MOD-16 counter (CO4) 3M
4. State the need of a Register (CO4)3M
5Define the terms resolutionof D/A converter (CO5) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries
Eight marks.

6 (A). Explain JK Master Slave flip flop with truth table.

(or)
(B)Explain asynchronous ripple counter (MOD-10 or Decade. counter) with the help of flip-flops
and gates.
7 (a)Explain the working of Universal shift register (74194 or equivalent)
(or)

(b)Explain the principle of working of RAM.

8 (a)Explain D/A conversion using weighted resistors.

(or)

(b)Explain A/D conversion using successive approximate method.

***

186
 AEI-304 ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

No of Total no Marks
Course Code Course title Marks for SA
periods/week of periods for FA

ELECTRONIC
MEASURING
AEI-304 INSTRUMENTS 04 60 20 80

S. No. of
Major Topics COs Mapped
NO Periods
1 Analog instruments 17 CO1
Digital instruments 11 CO2
2
Cathode Ray Oscilloscope 17 CO3
3
Signal generators 8 CO4
4
Test instruments 7 CO5
5

TOTAL 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Familiarize with Analog and digital instruments.

(ii) Explain the working of cathode ray oscilloscope.

Course
Objectives (iii) Explain the working of signal generators.

(iv) Explain the working of test instruments.

CO1 Explain the working of analoginstruments.

AEI-304.1
CO2 Explain the working of Digital instruments.
AEI-304.2
Course CO3 Analyse the working of cathode ray oscilloscope for different
outcomes AEI-304.3 wave forms.
CO4 Explain the working of AF and RF signal generators.
AEI-304.4
CO5 Explain the working principles of test instruments.
AEI-304.5

187
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Analog instruments

1.1 Classify the analog measuring instruments.
1.2 List the different torques needed for driving analog instruments.
1.3 Explain the construction and principle of operation of PMMC instrument.
1.4 Explain the principle of operation of extending the range of DC ammeter.
1.5 Explain the principle of operation of extending the range of DC voltmeter.
1.6 Explain the construction and principle of operation of Moving Iron instrument.
1.7 Explain the principle and working of rectifier type voltmeters.
1.8 Explain the construction and principle of operation of series and shunt type ohmmeters.
1.9 State the need for high input impedance for a voltmeter.
1.10 Explain the working of FET input voltmeter with necessary circuit (DC/AC).
1.11 Explain the working of differential voltmeters.
1.12 Define sensitivity of voltmeter and explain loading effect.
1.13 State the use of Megger for insulation measurements.
1.14 Give the classification of bridge circuits.
1.15 Mention the balancing conditions of bridges (AC and DC).
1.16 Explain the resistance measurement using Wheatstone bridge.
1.17 Explain the inductance measurement using Maxwell’s bridge.
1.18 Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering bridge.
1.19 Solve problems on sensitivity of voltmeter and above bridges.

2.0 Digital instruments

2.1 List the advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments.
2.2 Explain the working of digital voltmeters (RAMP type, successive approximation type) with
block diagrams.
2.3 List the specifications of digital voltmeters.
2.4 Explain the working of Digital Multimeter with block diagram.
2.5 List the specifications of Digital Multimeter.
2.6 Explain the working of Digital frequency meter with block diagram.
2.7 List the specifications of Digital frequency meter.
2.8 Explain the working of Digital LCR meter with block diagram.
2.9 List the specifications of Digital LCR meter.

3.0 Cathode Ray Oscilloscope

3.1 Draw the block diagram of general purpose CRO and Explain the function of each block.
3.2 Sketch CRT and Explain the function of each block.
3.3 State the necessity of time base generator.
3.4 Write the expression for deflection sensitivity.
3.5 List the conditions for stationary and flicker free waveforms.
3.6 Explain triggered sweep with necessary circuit, and mention its advantages.
3.7 List the front panel controls of CRO and state their function.
3.8 List its specifications of CRO.

188
 3.9 List the applications of CRO.
3.10 Explain the procedure for measurement of voltage (DC and AC), frequency and phase using
CRO.
3.11 Explain the Dual Trace Oscilloscope with block diagram.
3.12 Explain the principle of operation of Storage oscilloscope with block diagram.
3.13 Explain the principle of operation of Digital oscilloscope with block diagram.

4.0 Signal generators

4.1 Explain the working of AF Oscillator (sine and square) with block diagram.
4.2 List the front panel controls of AF Oscillator and state their function.
4.3 List specifications of AF Oscillator.
4.4 Explain the working of Function generator with block diagram.
4.5 List the applications of AF oscillators and function generators.
4.6 Explain the working of RF signal generator.
4.7 List specifications and applications of RF signal generator.
4.8 State the importance of shielding in RF generators.

5.0 Test Instruments

5.1 Define Q-Factor.
5.2 Explain the working of Q-meter with diagram.
5.3 Explain the working of Digital IC tester with block diagram.
5.4 Explain the working of Logic analyzer with block diagram.
5.5 State the necessity of Plotter and Recorders.
5.6 List the different Recorders.
5.7 Explain the working of XY recorders.
5.8 Explain the working of Plotter.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-304.1 2 2 1

AEI-304.2 1 2 1

AEI-304.3 2 1 2 2 1

AEI-304.4 1 1 2 1

AEI-304.5 1 1 2 1

Average 1.4 1 1.5 2 1

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

189
COURSE CONTENTS

1. Analog instruments:
PMMC Instrument, extending the range of instruments, Moving Iron Instruments, rectifier
type voltmeter, Series and Shunt type ohmmeter, FET input voltmeter, Meggar, differential
voltmeter, Wheatstone, Maxwell, Schering Bridge.

2. Digital Instruments:
Digital voltmeter (Ramp Type, Successive Approximation Type), Digital Multimeter,Digital
frequency meter, Digital LCR Meter.

3. Cathode Ray Oscilloscope:

Block diagram of general purpose CRO, triggered sweep circuit, front panel
controls of CRO. Specifications and applications of CRO, dual trace CRO, Storage CRO, Digital
CRO.

4. AF and RF signal generators

AF oscillator-specifications, function generator, RF signal generator-specifications.

5. Test instruments:
Q meter, Plotter and Recorders. Digital IC tester, Logic analyser.

Reference Books
1. David A Bell - Electronic instrumentation and measurements, PHI.
2. H S Khalsi - Electronic Instrumentation,TMH.
3. Cooper - Electronic Measurements & Instruments, PHI.
4. Khandpur - Modern Electronic Equipment,TGH.
5. A K Sawhney - Electrical, Electronic Measurements and Instruments,Dhanpat Rai.

BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

No. of Weightage Distribution of Distribution of
Weightage Weightage COs Mapped
S. Major Topics periods of marks
No
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Analog 17 17 9 8 3 1
1 CO1
instruments
Digital 11 14 6 8 2 1 CO2
2 instruments
CRO 17 14 6 8 2 1 CO3
3

190
 Signal 8 14 6 8 2 1 CO4
4 generators
Test 7 11 3 8 1 1 CO5
5 instruments
Higher order
question
10 10 1 CO1,CO2,CO3
from 1or 2 or
3 Chapters

Total 60 80 30 40 10 - 10 5 1 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.9

Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.8

191
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS (C-20)
DAEIE-III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
ELETRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS- AEI (304)
Time: 3 Hours Max Marks: 80

PART –A

Instructions:1) Answer all Questions. 10x3=30 M

2) Each carries THREE marks
3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not simple
exceed five sentences.

1. Classify the analog measuring instruments. (CO1)

2. State the need for high input impedance for a voltmeter. (CO1)

3. Define sensitivity of voltmeter. (CO1)

4. List any three advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments. (CO2)

5. List the specifications of digital LCR meter. (CO2)

6. State the procedure for measurement of AC voltage. (CO3)

7. List the front panel controls of CRO . (CO3)

8. List the applications of AF oscillators. (CO4)

9. State the importance of shielding in RF generators. (CO4)

10. Define Q-meter (CO5)

192
 PART-B

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but not
the length of the answer. 5x8=40 M

11. (A) Explain the construction and principle of operation of moving iron instrument. (CO1)

Or
(B) Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering bridge. (CO1)

12. (A) Explain the working of Ramp type digital voltmeter with block diagram. (CO2)
Or
(B) Explain the working of digital frequency meter with block diagram. (CO2)

13. (A) Explain the working of dual trace oscilloscope with a block diagram. (CO3)
Or
(B) Explain triggered sweep with necessary circuit. (CO3)

14. (A) Explain the working of RF signal generators with diagram. (CO4)

Or
(B) Explain the working of function generator with diagram (CO4)

15. (A) Explain the working of digital IC tester with block diagram. (CO5)

Or
(B) Explain the working of X-Y recorder (CO5)

PART- C
1×10=10
Instructions: 1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. A 1 mA meter movement with an internal resistance of 100Ω is to converted into a 0-100mA.
Calculate the value of shunt resistance required. (CO1)

***

193
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS (AEI-304)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- ATotal: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i)The balancing equation of AC bridge is --------- (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) The digital multimeter is used to measure ------- (CO2)
iii) The PMMC instrument is AC measurement (T/F) (CO2)
iv) The use of Megger is ------------- (CO2)
2. Classify the analog measuring instruments (CO1) 3M

3. Define sensitivity of voltmeter (CO2) 3M

4. List the advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments (CO2) 3M

5. List the specifications of Digital Multimeter (CO1) 3M

PART- B 3×8M=24M
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries
Eight marks

6. (A). Explain the construction and principle of operation of PMMC instrument. (CO2)

Or
(B). Explain the resistance measurement using Wheatstone bridge (CO1)

7.(A). Explain the working of RAMP type digital voltmeters (CO2)

Or
(B). Explain the working of Digital LCR meter with block diagram. (CO2)

8. (A). Explain the principle and working of rectifier type voltmeters. (CO2)

Or
(B). Explain the working of Digital frequency meter with block diagram. (CO2)

***

194
 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION

Total no. of Marks Marks

Course code Course title
Periods/Week periods for FA for SA

Process Instrumentation
AEI-305 75 20 80
05

S. NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Fundamentals of Instrumentation 10 CO1
11 CO1
2 Displacement and position measurement
Temperature measurement 08 CO2
3

4 Pressure measurement 08 CO3

14 CO3
5 Flow measurement
Level measurement 08 CO3
6
Density and Viscosity measurement 08 CO4
7
Measurement of Weight &Humidity 08 CO5
8

TOTAL 75

195
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Explain the importance of instrumentation fundamentals.

Course
(ii) Explainthe various measurement techniques used for the measurement
Objectives
of displacement, position, temperature, pressure, flow, level, density,
viscosity, weight and humidity process Industries.

CO1 AEI- Use transducers for the measurement of Displacement and position
305.1

CO2 AEI- Analyse the working of transducers for the measurement of

305.2 temperature

Course
outcomes CO3 AEI- Use transducers for the measurement of pressure, flow and Level
305.3
Use of densitometers and viscometers for measurement of Density
CO4 AEI- and Viscosity
305.4
CO5
AEI- Use of load cells and Hygrometers for measurement of weight and
305.5 Humidity.

1 Fundamentals of Instrumentation
Learning
Outcomes 1.1 To Explainthe following terms.

(a) Accuracy
(b) Precision
(c) Error
(d) Linearity
(e) Hysteresis
(f) Resolution and scale readability
(g) Threshold
(h) Repeatability
(i) Reliability and maintainability
(j) Span
1.2 Define calibration and state the need of calibration.
1.3 Define the terms transducer and Sensor.
1.4 Give the classification of thetransducers.
1.5 Define Active transducer and passive transducer with examples.
1.6 State the basic requirements of Transducers.

196
2.0Displacement and position measurements

2.1 Explain the principle of operation of the following.

a. Linear potentiometers
b. Linear variable differential transformers (LVDT)
c. Linear variable Reluctance transducers (LVRT)
2.2 Explain the principle of Inductive and capacitive proximity sensors
for position measurement.

2.3. a) Explain the principle of Resistance strain gauge.

b) Derive the expression for gauge factor and solve simple problems.
2.4.Explain the principle of operation of Rotary variable
differential transformer (RVDT).
2.5. State the importance of vibration monitoring.
2.6. Explain the principle of operation of the following for linear velocity
measurement.
a. Moving coil type velocity transducer
b. Moving iron type velocity transducer

2.7 Explain the principle of operation of the following for angular velocity
measurement.
a. A.CTacho generators
b. Photo electric Tachometer
c. Toothed rotor variable reluctance Tachometer.
3.0 Temperature measurement

3.1 Define the term Temperature

3.2 Classify the temperature transducers.

3.3. Explain the principle of operation of the following :

(a) Bi-metallic strip

(b) Liquid filled thermometers.

3.4 a) Explain the principle of operation of Resistance

Temperature Detector.

b) Derive the expression of coefficient of temperature for RTD

α= (R T - R 0) / R0 (T2 - T1)and solve simple problems.

3.5. Explain the principle of operation of the following

a) Thermocouple
b) Thermistor

3.6List the types of pyrometers.

197
3.7 Explain the principle of operation of the following:
a) Optical pyrometer
b) Radiation pyrometers
3.8 List range and applications for the following:
a) Bi-metallic strip
b) Liquid filled thermometers.
c) Resistance Temperature Detector
d) Thermocouple
e) Thermistor
f) Optical pyrometer
g) Radiation pyrometers

3.9 a) Explain the principle of operation of Solid state sensors.

b) List any three IC temperature sensors with its ranges and uses

4.0 Pressure measurement

4.1 To know the description and principle of operation of Elastic

elements for pressure measurement Like

(a) Membrane diaphragm

(b) Thin plate diaphragm
(c) corrugated diaphragm
(d) Single capsule
(e) Double capsule
(f) Bellow
(g) C-shaped bourdon tube
(h) Twisted bourdon tube
(j) Helical bourdon tube
4.2 Know the description and principle of operation of Electrical
pressure transducers such as
(a) Potentiometric device
(b) Strain gauge transducer
(c) Variable reluctance sensor
(d) LVDT type transducer
(e) Variable capacitance device
(f) Thin film pressure transducer
(g) Force – Balance Transducer
(h) Piezo – electric pressure transducer

4.3 State the necessity and principle of pressure multiplexer

4.4 Explain the pressure calibration using dead weight tester.

5.0 Flow measurement

5.1 Explain the principle of operation and list the applications of the
following.

198
 (a) Head – type flow meter based on differential pressure
measurement like such as
I. Orifice plate
II. Venturi tube
III. Pitot tube
(b) Electromagnetic flow meters.
(c) Rotameters (variable – area meters)
(d) Mechanical flow meters
I. Positive displacement type (Nutating disc type)
II. Turbine flow meters.
(e) Anemometers
I. Cup type Anemometers
II. Hot wire/hot film type Anemometers.
(f) Ultrasonic flow meters
(g) Thermal flow meters.
(h) Laser anemometers.

6.0 Level measurement

6.1 Explain the principle of operation and list the applications of the
following.

(a) Liquid level sight glass

(b) Float Actuated level indicators
(c) Resistive type level indicator.
(d) Inductive type level indicator.
(e) Capacitance type level indicators
(f) Nucleonic level gauge.
(g) Ultrasonic level gauge

7.0 Density and viscosity measurement

7.1 Define the term density

7.2 State the necessity of density measurement.
7.3 Explain the principle of operation of the following :
(a) Displacement type densitometer
(b) Fluid dynamic type densitometer
(c) Capacitance type densitometer
7.4 Define the term Viscosity.
7.5 State the necessity of Viscosity measurement
7.6 Explain the principle of operation of the following :
(a) Capillary viscometers
(b) Falling ball viscometers
(c) Rotating viscometers

199
 8.0 Measurement of Weight &Humidity

8.1 Explain the principle of operation of the following for weight

measurement and list their applications.

a. Hydraulic load cells

b. Pneumatic load cells
c. Strain gauge load cells
8.2 Define Humidity and relative Humidity.
8.3 Explain the description and principle of operation of the following.
(a) Condensation type Hygrometers
(b) Electrolytic Hygrometers.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-305.1 1 1 3 2

AEI-305.2 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-305.3 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-305.4 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-305.5 1 1 3 2 1

Average 1 1 1 1 3 2 1

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENTS

1. Fundamentals of Instrumentation
Accuracy, Precision, Error, Linearity, Hysteresis, Resolution, scale readability, Threshold,
Repeatability, Reliability, Maintainability, Span,, Calibration. Classification of Transducers,
Basic Requirements of transducers.
2. Displacement and Position Measurements
Linear potentiometers, L.V.D.T, linear variable Reluctance Transducers, Inductivity &
capacitive proximity sensors, Resistance strain gauge, RVDT, vibration monitoring, linear
velocity measurement- moving coil type velocity transducers, moving iron type velocity
transducers, Angular velocity speed measurements -AC Tacho generators, Photo electric
tachometer, Toothed rotor variable reluctance tachometer

200
3. Temperature measurement
Bimetallic strip ,liquid filled thermometer. Resistance temperature Detectors, thermocouple,
Thermistor , Pyrometer, IC temperature sensors
4. Pressure measurement: Elastic elements used for pressure measurements and principle of
pressure transducers, principle of pressure multiplexer ,pressure calibration
5. Flow measurement:Head type of flow meters , electromagnetic flow meters, rotameters ,
mechanical flowmeters, Anemometers, Ultra sonic flow meters, thermal flowmeters ,
Pneumatic transmitters. Orifice plate, Electromagnetic flow meters and Turbine flow meters.
6. Level measurement: Liquid level sight glass , float actuated level indicator, resistance,
inductance, capacitance type level indicators, nucleonic, Ultrasonic level gauges.
7. Density and viscosity measurements : Displacement type, Fluid dynamic type, Capacitance
type density measurement. Capillary viscometers, Falling ball viscometers, Rotating
viscometers,
8. Measurement Weight &Humidity : Hydraulic load cells, Pneumatic load cells, Strain gauge
load cells,Humidity, Relative humidity, Condensation type Hygrometer, Electrolytic
hydrometer.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Patranabis - Principles of Industrial Instrumentation ,McGraw-Hill Education – Europe.

2. S.K.Singh - Industrial Instruments and Control ,TMH.
3. D. S. Kumar, Mechanical Measurements and Control, Metropolitan Book Company Pvt.
Limited, 1979.
4. Liptack - Instrument Engineer Hand Book, CRC press.
5. M.M.S. Anand - Electronics Instruments and Instrumentation Technology,PHI.
6. Rangan Mani and Sharma - Instrumentation Measurement, Devices and systems, TMH.
7. E.B. Jones - Instrument Technology Vol-I,Newnes-Butterworth, 1957.
8. DVS Murthy - Transducers Technology, PHI.
9. Nakra & Chowdary - Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation,TMH.
10. A.K. Sahwney - Electrical and Electronics Measurement and Instrumentation, Dhanapathi Rai.
11. Instrumentation design studies by Nernest O.Doebelin

201
 BLUE PRINT
Marks wise Question wise
Distribution of Distribution of
COs
No. of Weightage Weightage Weightage
Mapp
S. Major Topics periods of marks
ed
No A
R U Ap An R U An
p

Fundamentals of 6 2
1 10 06 C01
Instrumentation
Displacement and CO1
11 03 3 1
2 position
measurement
Temperature CO2
08 06 6 2
3 measurement

Pressure 11 3 8 1 1
4 08 CO3
measurement
Flow 14 14 6 8 2 1 CO3
5
measurement
Level CO3
08 11 3 8 1 1
6 measurement

Density CO4
measurements
08 11 3 8 1 1
7 and Viscosity
measurements

Measurement of CO5
weight & 08 08 8 1
8
Humidity

Higher order
question from 10 10 1 CO2
--
chapter 3

Total 75 80 30 40 10 - 10 5 1 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 4.1

Unit Test-II From 4.2 to 8.3

C-20-AEI-305

202
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)
DAEIE- THIRD SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple
sentences.

1. Define the terms Accuracy and precision. (CO1)

2. Define the terms Span and Range. (CO1)

3. State the importance of vibration monitoring. (CO1)

4. Define the term Temperature. (CO2)

5. List any three applications of Thermistor. (CO2)

6. State the necessity pressure multiplexer. (CO3)

7. List any three applications of Orifice meter. (CO3)

8. Draw the diagram of rotameter . (CO3)

9. State the principle of Ultrasonic level gauge. (CO3)

10. State the necessity of density measurement. (CO4)

PAR- B

203
 Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content
but notthe length of the answer. 5x8=40 M

11 (A). Explain the principle of operation of Force balance transducer with diagram. (CO3)
or
(B). Explain pressure calibration using Dead Weight Tester. (CO3)

12. (A). Explain the principle of operation of Electromagnetic flow meter with diagram. (CO3)
Or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of Venturi flow meter with diagram. (CO3)

13 (A). Explain the principle of operation of Liquid level sight glass with diagram. (CO3)
Or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of Nucleonic level gauge with diagram. (CO3)

14.(A). Explain the principle of operation of Displacement type densitometer. (CO4)

Or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of Capillary viscometer. (CO4)

15. (A). Explain the principle of operation of Hydraulic load cell with diagram. (CO5)

Or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of Condensation type Hygrometer with diagram.(CO5)

PART- C 1×10=10

Instructions: 1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.

2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16.Derive the expression of coefficient of temperature for RTD (CO2)

α= (R T - R 0) / R0 (T2 - T1)

***

DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST

MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)

204
 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION(AEI-305)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks.
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1 i)Define Linearity (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) Degree of closeness to the true value is called ------- (CO2)
iii) The unit of Temperature is --------- (CO2)
iv) Bellows is an elastic element used for pressuremeasurement (True/False). (CO3)
2. State the principle of AC Tachometer (CO1) 3M
3. State the importance of vibration monitoring. (CO1) 3M
4. Classify temperature transducers. (CO2) 3M
5. List three applications of Thermocouple. (CO2) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M

Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries
Eight marks.

6. (A). Explain the principle of operation of LVRT with diagram. (CO1)

or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of Moving iron type velocity transducer with diagram.
(CO1)
7. (A). Explain the principle of operation of radiation type pyrometer with diagram.(CO2)
Or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of Thermister.
(CO2)

8. (A). Explain the principle of operation of C-shaped bourdon tube for the measurement of
pressure.
(CO3)
or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of single capsule and double capsule for the
measurement of pressure.(CO3)

***

PROGRAMMING IN ‘C’

205
 No.of Total no. of Marks Marks
Course code Course title periods/week periods for FA for SA

Programming in 05
AEI-306 75 20 80
‘C’

S. NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 C Programming Basics 16 CO1
Decision & Loop Control 18 CO2
2
Statements
Arrays & Strings 16 CO3
3
Functions in C 13 CO4
4
12 CO5
5 Structures, Unions & pointers

TOTAL 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

i) programming in C language
Course ii)Explainthe programming in C language
Objectives iii)Learn the practical importance and applications of programming in C language

CO1 Explain the statements of C Programming.

AEI-
306.1
CO2 Explain decision and loop control statements of C Programming.
AEI-
306.2
CO3 Analyse the concepts in strings and arrays C programming.
Course AEI-
outcomes 306.3
Co4 Explain the functions in C-Programming.
AEI-
306.4
Co5 Explain the structures , unions and pointers in C-Programming.
AEI-
306.5

1.0 ‘C’ Programming Basics

Learning
Outcomes 1.1 Define High level language and low level language
1.2 Explain the structure of C language Program
1.3 State the function of pre-processor directives
1.4 List pre-processor directives.

206
 1.5 Explain the pre-processor directives: #define, #include by taking
examples
1.6 List the steps involved in executing the C program
1.7 Mention the character set of C language.
1.8 Define the Keywords and list them
1.9 Define the Identifiers and give examples.
1.10 List the data types used in C and explain them with examples.
1.11 Explain constants and variables.
1.12 State the declaration of variables.
1.13 List the five Arithmetic Operators and give their precedence.
1.14 State the assignment statement.
1.15 List the shorthand assignment operators and explain with examples.
1.16 Define an expression and show how to evaluate an Arithmetic
Expression.
1.17 Explain the increment and decrement operators.
1.18 List the relational operators used in C.
1.19 List the logical operators supported by C
1.20 Give the operator precedence.
1.21 Explain evaluating a logical expression.
1.22 List the bitwise logical operators
1.23 Explain bitwise logical operators.
1.24 Explain printf () and scanf () functions with examples.

2.0 Decision & Loop Control Statements

2.1 State the importance of decision making statements in programming
2.2 List decision making statements
2.3 Write the syntaxes of the following decision making statements and
explain
a. If
b. If.. else.
c. Nested if …else
d. If… else ladder ..
2.4 Write the syntax of switch statement and explain.
2.5 Explain conditional operator.
2.6 Write simple programs using decision making statements.
2.7 Define a loop in a C and list loop/iterative statements
2.8 Write the syntaxes of the following loop control statements and
explain
a. for
b. while
c. do… while
2.9 Define nested loops.
2.10 Compare between while and do .. while loop statements
2.11 Compare between for and do .. while loop statements
2.12 Write a program to display first n natural numbers using loops.
2.13 Write a program to find sum of given numbers using loops.
2.14 Write a program to print fibonacci series using loops.
2.15 Differentiate between break and continue statements.
3.0 Arrays & Strings
3.1 Define an Array.
3.2 Explain declaration and initialization of One Dimensional Array.

207
 3.3 Explain accessing the elements in the Array.
3.4 Write a C program to find largest / smallest number in an array
3.5 Write a C program to sorting the numbers in an array.
3.6 Explain declaration and initialization of two Dimensional Arrays.
3.7 Explain accessing elements of two dimensional arrays with sample
program of matrix addition/subtraction.
3.8 Define String
3.9 State the declaration and initialization of String variables.
3.10 List and Explain the functions used for reading and writing strings.
3.11 Explain the String handling functions strcat(),strcmp(),strcpy() and
strlen() with examples.
3.12 Write a c program to check whether the given string is palindrome or
not.
3.13 Write a c program to reverse the given string.
4.0 Functions in ‘C’
4.1 Define function.
4.2 List various standard built in functions
4.3 State the need for user defined functions
4.4 Explain function declaration in programs
4.5 Define function prototype
4.6 Define a function call
4.7 Explain return values and their types
4.8 Illustrate functions with no arguments and no return values with a
program to find sum and average of any 5 numbers.
4.9 Illustrate functions with arguments with no return values with a
program to findsum and average of any 5 numbers.
4.10 Illustrate functions with arguments with return values with a program
to find sumand average of any 5 numbers.
4.11 Illustrate functions with no arguments with return values with a
program to findsum and average of any 5 numbers.
4.12 Differentiate between Local and External Variables
4.13 List the four storage classes supported by ‗C‘
5.0 Structures, Unions and Pointers
5.1 Define a structure
5.2 Explain declaring structure variable.
5.3 Explain initialization of structure.
5.4 Explain the concept of structure assignment.
5.5 Explain accessing members of a structure with example.
5.6 Illustrate structures with a program to read & print a book database
consisting of Title of book, author, no. of pages, price as fields.
5.7 Define a Union.
5.8 Differentiate between structure and union.
5.9 Define a pointer.
5.10 Declare a pointer ,assign a pointer ,initialize a pointer.
5.11 Differentiate address and dereferencing operators.
5.12 Write a sample programs to declare and initialize the pointers.

COURSE CONTENT

208
1.0 C-Programming Basics
Structure of a C programme, Character Set, Constants, Variables, Data types,
Arithmetic, Logical, Relational operators and precedence – Assignment, Increment,
Decrement operators, evaluation of expressions.

2.0 Decision and Loop control Statements

If, If-else, Nested If else, Break, Continue and Switch statements. Loops:- For, While,
Do-while, Nesting of Loops.

3.0 Arrays and Strings

1 D Array declaration, Initialization, 2 D Array declaration, Initialization, Accessing
of Array elements, Character Arrays declaration and Initialization of Strings, Display
of strings with format.

4.0 Functions in C
Function-Definition, Declaration, Return statement-
Function calls, Storage classes of variables.

5.0 Structures, Unions and Pointers

Structure features, Declaration and Initialization, Accessing of Structure members,
Union, Pointer concepts.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1C,Balaguru Swamy.E- Programming in ANSI, 3rd Edition, TMH.

2.Samarjit Ghosh- Programming In C,PHI.
3. Kamthane - Programming with ANSI and Turbo C, Pearson Education.
4.Gottfried- Programming in C,Schaum Series.
5. Reema Thareja - Programming in C , Oxford university press.
6.Yashwant Kanetkar- Let us C, BPB Publication, New Delhi.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

209
 CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-306.1 1 3 2
AEI-306.2 1 1 1 3 2
AEI-306.3 1 1 1 3 2
AEI-306.4 1 1 1 3 2
AEI-306.5 1 1 3 2
Average 1 1 1 3 2

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped
BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

COs
S. No. of Weightage Distribution of Distribution of
Major Topics Mapp
No periods of marks Weightage Weightage
ed
R U Ap An R U Ap An
C Programming CO1
1 16 14 6 8 2 1
Basics
Decision & Loop CO2
2 Control 18 17 9 8 3 1
Statements
CO3
3 Arrays & Strings 16 14 6 8 2 1
CO4
4 Functions in C 13 14 6 8 2 1

Structures, Unions CO5

5 12 11 3 8 1 1
& pointers
Higher order
CO2,C
question from 10 10 1
O3
chapters 2 or 3

Total 75 80 30 24 26 - 10 3 3 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.15

Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.12

210
 C-20-AEI-306

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, UNIT TEST- 1 (C-20)

DAEIE- THIRD SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PROGRAMMING IN C
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. (a) Keyword for Decimal Number data type in C _______ (CO1)

(b) Logical AND operation is denoted by _____________ . (CO1)
(c) The instruction a += 2; represents _________________ . (CO1)
(d) An array contains 10 elements. The index of last element is 10 : True / False (CO3)
2. List any six data types supported by C. (CO1)
3. State the importance of conditional expressions in a C program. (CO1)
4. Differentiate ‘break’ and ‘continue’ statements. (CO2)
5. What is Array and how do access the elements of it? (CO1)
PART- B
3×8M=24M
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question andeach question carries
Eight marks.

6. (A).Explain different arithmetic, relational and logical operators with their precedence in
C programming. (CO1)
(OR)
(B).Explain the assignment statement, increment and decrement operators in C
programming. (CO1)
7. (A). Explain the working of various conditional statements available in C. (CO1)
(OR)
(B). Explain the working of various iterative loops available in C. (CO2)

8. (A). Write a C program to find the biggest number in a given array of numbers. (CO3)
(OR)
(B). Write a C program using any four String Handling functions. (CO3)

***

211
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, UNIT TEST- II (C-20)
DAEIE- THIRD SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PROGRAMMING IN C
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. (a) _______ is a reading string in C (CO3)

(b) _______ is a storage class in C (CO4)
(c) _______ is a symbol for pointer variable in C (CO5)
(d) a[10] is a ----------- dimensional array (CO3)
2. State the syntax of array in C. (CO3)
3. Define function in C.. (CO4)
4. Define structure in C. (CO5)
5. Define a union in C. (CO5)
PART- B
3×8M=24M
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries
Eight marks.

6. (A).Explain declaration and initialization of two Dimensional Arrays.

(CO3)
(Or)

(B) Write a c program to check whether the given string is palindrome or not. (CO3)

7. (A). Explain return values and their types

(CO4)
(or)

(B) Differentiate between Local and External Variables (CO4)

8. (A)Differentiate between structure and union. (CO5)

(or)

(B)Differentiate address and dereferencing operators. (CO5)

***

212
 C-20-AEI-306

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- THIRD SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PROGRAMMING IN C
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simplesentences.

1. Write the basic structure of a C program. (CO1)

2. List any six data types supported by C. (CO1)

3. List the bit wise logical operators. (CO2)

4. Differentiate ‘break’ and ‘continue’ statements. (CO2)

5. State the declaration of variables (CO2)

6. What is Array and how do access the elements of it. (CO3)

7. What is the operation of ‘string’ function? (CO3)

8. What is the need of User Defined Function in programming? (CO4)

9. List the four storage classes supported by C. (CO4)

10. Define Structure and give an example to it. (CO5)

213
 PART- B

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer. 5x8=40 M

11. (A). Explain different arithmetic, relational and logical operators with their precedence in
C programming. (CO1)
(OR)

(B).Explain the assignment statement, increment and decrement operators in

C programming. (CO1)

12. (A). Explain the working of various conditional statements available in C. (CO2)
(OR)

(B). Explain the working of various iterative loops available in C. (CO2)

13. (A). Write a C program to find the biggest number in a given array of numbers. (CO3)
(OR)

(B). Write a C program using any four String Handling functions. (CO3)

14. (A). Write a C program using user define Function returning a value to the main function.
(CO4)
(OR)

(B). Write a C program using Local and External variables. (CO4)

15. (A). Explain how to find the Size of a Structure in C, with an example. (CO5)
(OR)

(B). Explain how a pointer can be used to realize the effect of parameter passing by
reference in C, with an example. (CO5)

PART- C

1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content but not the
length of the answer.

16. Write a C program to display even numbers between 1 and 50 using Loops (CO3).

***

214
 Electronic Circuits Lab

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA

Electronic Circuits
AEI-307 3 45 40 60
Lab

No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods

CO1
I FET & MOSFET 09
CO2
II Amplifiers 12
CO3
III Oscillators & Multivibrators 12

IV Circuit simulation using Pspice or equivalent 12 CO4

TOTAL 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to:

1. Plot the characterises of electronic devices and to construct amplifiers and

Oscillators.
Course
Objectives 2. Simulate rectifiers, amplifiers and Oscillator circuits using simulation software.

3. Learn the practical importance of Electronic Circuits.

CO1 AEI- Plot the characteristics of FET and MOSFET.

307.1

AEI- Construct the Amplifiers to Plot their frequency responses.

Course Out CO2 307.2
comes Construct Oscillators & Multivibrators and obtain their output
CO3 AEI- waveforms.
307.3
Simulate amplifiers, Oscillators and multivibrator using P-spice or
CO4 AEI- equivalent.
307.4

215
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. FET & MOSFET :

1. Identify the terminals of FET and plot the drain and transfer characteristics of FET.
2. Identify the terminals of MOSFET and plot the drain characteristics of MOSFET and calculate
the values of Transconductance (gm) and drain resistance (rds).
II. AMPLIFIERS:
3. Perform an experiment on RC coupled Amplifier, plot its frequency response and measure the
bandwidth (BW).
4. Perform an experiment on CE amplifier with and without feedback and compare its frequency
response.
III. OSCILLATORS and MULTIVIBRATORS:
5. Implement Colpitt’s oscillator and verify the effect of varying the tank circuit component
values and observe output waveforms.
6. Implement Crystal oscillator and observe output waveforms.
7. Implement RC Phase shift oscillator and verify the effect of varying the RC component values
and observe output waveforms.
8. Construct transistorised astable multivibrator and draw its waveforms.
IV. Circuit simulation using Pspice or equivalent:
9. Familiarize with the Pspice modelling using e-CAD software
 Representation of passive elements
 Representation of active elements
 Representation of time Vary signals
10. Simulate of CE amplifier and observe the effect of disconnecting bypass capacitor.
11. Simulate Hartley oscillator circuit and observe the effect of change in component values.
12. Simulate transistorised Monostable circuit and observe the effect of change in component
values.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 1 1 3 3 2
307.1

AEI- 1 1 3 3 2
307.2

AEI- 1 1 3 3 2
307.3

AEI- 1 1 1 3 2 1
307.4

Average 1 1 3 1 3 2 1
3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

216
 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB
No. Of
Total no. of Marks for Marks for
Course code Course title periods
periods FA SA
per week

AEI-308 DIGITALELECTRONICS 45 3 40 60
LAB

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

Combinational 18 CO1
I Logic circuits

Sequential Logic 21 CO2

II Circuits

A/D and D/A 06 CO3

III Converters

TOTAL 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

Course i)Implement different combinational, sequential logic circuits and obtain truth tables.
ii)Explain A/D and D/A converters.
Objectives
CO1 Implement combinational logic circuits and verify truth tables.
AEI-
308.1
Course CO2 Implement Sequential logic circuits and verify truth tables.
AEI-
outcomes 308.2
CO3 Verify the working of A/D and D/A converters
AEI-
308.3

COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS

Learning 1. Verify the truth tables of Logic gates - AND, OR, NOT (Using IC’s).
Outcomes 2. Verify the truth tables of Logic gates - NAND, NOR, Exclusive OR (using IC’s).

3. Implement Half-adder using IC logic gates.

4. Implement Full-adder using IC logic gates.

217
 5. Verify the truth table of Multiplexer using IC 74153

6. Verify the truth table of De-multiplexers

7. Implement any given Boolean function using logic gates.

I. Sequential Logic Circuits

8. Verify the truth tables for RS, D, T, and JK and Master - Slave JK

Flip-flops.

9. Verify function of counter (ICs like 7490, 7492, 7493, 74 C 93, 74160).

10. Verify function of shift register (ICs like 74104, 74185, 74 C 164, 7495,

74194 etc.)

11. Construct a comparator circuit using 7485 and verify the truth table.

II. A/D and D/A converters

12. Verify the working Successive Approximation type A/D

converter.

13. Verify the working of R-2R D/A converter.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-308.1 2 3 2

AEI-308.2 3 3 3 2

AEI-308.3 1 1 3 2

Average 2 3 1 3 2

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

218
 ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS LAB

No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks

Course code Course title
per week periods for FA for SA

AEI-309 ELECTRONIC 3 45 40 60
MEASURING
INSTRUMENTS LAB

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

I Analog instruments 15 CO1

CO2
II Digital instruments 15

CO3
III Signal generators & CRO 15

TOTAL 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

Course (i) Measure various parameters of electrical & electronics using

measuring Instruments.
Objectives

CO1 Use analog instruments.

AEI-
309.1
Course CO2 Use digital instruments for the measurement of various parameters.
AEI-
outcomes 309.2
CO3 Use of signal generator & CRO for measurement of different
AEI- parameters.
309.3
I. Analog Instruments:-

1. Conduct an experiment to Calibrate Ammeter and Voltmeter.

2. Conduct an experiment to extend the range of Ammeter and Voltmeter.
3. Conduct an experiment to convert an Ammeter to Voltmeter.
4. Conduct an experiment to construct series and shunt Ohmmeter.
5. Measure the Insulation resistance of a given equipment by using Megger.
II. Digital Instruments:-
6. Study the front panel of a Digital LCR meter.

219
Learning 7. Measure Inductance (L), Capacitance (C) and Resistance (R) using digital LCR
Outcomes meter.
8. Study the front panel of a digital IC tester.
9. Test some digital ICs using using Digital IC tester.
10. Measure the frequency of a given signal using digital frequency meter.
III. Signal Generator and CRO:-
11. Measure the frequency of an Unknown Signal Using Lissajous figures on CRO.
12. Study the use of different types of probes used for CRO.
13.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 2 1 2 2
309.1

AEI- 2 1 1 2 2
309.2

AEI- 2 1 2 2
309.3

Average 2 1 1 2 2
3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

220
 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION LAB
No. Of
Total no.
periods Marks Marks
Course code Course title of
per for FA for SA
periods
week

AEI-310 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 3 45 40 60

LAB

S. NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

I Displacement measurement 9 CO1

Velocity measurement 3 CO2

II
Temperature measurement 12 CO3
III

IV Pressure measurement 3 CO4

3 CO5
V Flow measurement

Level measurement 6 CO6

VI

Density and Viscosity measurement 6 CO7

VII

Weight & Humidity measurement 6 CO8

VIII

TOTAL 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Practice various measurement techniques used for the
measurement of displacement, Velocity, temperature, PH,
Course Conductivity, humidity and moisture in process industries.

Objectives

CO1
AEI-310.1 Perform exercises to measure the linear displacement, angular
displacement using different transducers
Course
outcomes
CO2
AEI-310.2 Perform exercises to measure the velocity using tachometer

221
 CO3
AEI-310.3
Perform exercises to measure the temperature using RTD,
Thermocouple, Thermistor

CO4 Conduct an experiment to measure the pressure using pressure

AEI-310.4 transducers.
CO5 Conduct an experiment to Measure the flow using flow
AEI-310.5 meters.

CO6 Conduct an experiment to Measure the level using Level

AEI-310.6 Indicators.
CO7 Conduct an experiment to Measure the density using
AEI-310.7 densitometers and viscosity using viscometers
CO8
AEI-310.8 Conduct an experiment to measure the weight using load
cells, and relative humidity using Hygrometer
I. DISPLACEMENT MEASUREMENT
1. Measure the Linear Displacement using LVDT and plot a graph between voltage
and displacement.
2. Measure the Linear Displacement using Resistive Transducer and plot a graph
between resistance and displacement.
3 Measure the Angular Displacement using Resistive Transducer and plot a graph
between resistance and displacement.

Learning II. Velocity measurement

Outcomes 4. Measure the angular velocity using Tachometer and plot graph between voltage
and velocity.
III. Temperature measurement
5. Measure the Temperature using RTD and plot graph between temperature and
resistance.
6. Measure the Temperature using Thermister and plot the following graphs
( a) Between temperature and resistance
(b) Between voltage and temperature
7. Measure the Temperature using Thermocouple and plot a graph between
temperature and voltage.
8.Measure the temperature using IC LM335
IV. PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
9. Measure the Pressure using Strain gauge pressure transducer.

V. FLOW MEASUREMENT

222
 10.Measure the Flow rate using Rotameter
VI .LEVEL MEASUREMENT
11. Measure the Level using
i. Float type level indicator
ii. Resistive type level indicator
VII. DENSITY & VISCOSITY MEASUREMENT
12. Measure the Density of given sample using a densitometer.
13. Measure the viscosity of given sample using falling Ball viscometer.
VIII. WEIGHT & HUMIDITY MEASUREMENT
14. Measure Weight using Load cell.
15. Measure the relative humidity using hygrometer.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-310.1 1 3 2

AEI-310.2 1 3 2

AEI-310.3 1 1 3 2

AEI-310.4 1 3 2

AEI-310.5 1 1 3 2

AEI-310.6 1 3 2

AEI-310.7 1 3 2

AEI-310.8 1 3 2

Average 1 1 3 2
3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

223
 PROGRAMMING IN C& MATLAB

Total no
Course No of Marks Marks
Course title of
Code periods/week for FA for SA
periods

AEI-311 PROGRAMMING IN C & MATLAB 03 45 40 60

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

I C Programming Basics 6 CO1

II Decision & Loop Control Statements 9 CO2
III Exercises on functions 6 CO3
IV Arrays, Strings and Pointers in C 9
CO2
V Structures and Unions 6 CO3
VI MAT Lab 9 CO4
Total 45

1. To familiarize with programming in Programming In C and MATLAB

Course 2. To Explainthe programming concepts of Programming In C and MATLAB
Objectives 3. To learn the practical importance and applications of programming in C and
MATLAB.

AEI-
CO1 311.1 Explain the usage of C Compiler.

AEI- Apply loop, control statements, Arrays and strings in C

Course Out CO2 311.2 language
comes
AEI- Apply pointers, functions, structurers and unions in C-
CO3 311.3 Language.

AEI-
CO4 311.4 Practice on basics of MATLAB.

224
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. C Programming Basics
1. Familiarize with turbo Compiler features.
2. Write a program to display “WELCOME TO C PROGRAMMING” on the screen
3. Write a program to accept input of various data types and display on the sreeen

II. Decision & Loop Control Statements

4. Write a program to find the largest of given three numbers using Decision (if, if-else, nested
if –else) statements
5. Write a program to perform arithmetic functions using Switch –case statements
6. Write a program to find the factors of a given number using ‘for’ loop
7. Write a program to print n natural numbers using ‘while’ loop
8. Write a program to find the sum of n natural numbers using ‘do_while’ loop

III. Exercises on functions

9. Write a program to find the factorial of a given number using recursion

IV. Arrays, Strings and Pointers in C

10. Write a program to find the smallest element in an array
11. Write a program to find addition of two ( 3 X 3 ) matrices
12. Write a program using string functions for string comparison, copying and concatenation
13. Write program to swap two numbers using pointers

V. Structures and Unions

14. Write a program to store information of students using Structures
15. Write a program to access Union members in C

VI. MAT LAB

16. Familiarize with MATLAB Compiler environment, command line arguments, HELP and know
about various tool boxes available in MATLAB
17. Write a program to check whether the entered year is leap year or not using decision
making statements (if-end, if-else-end, nested if –else-end)
18. Write a program to find the factorial of a given number using loop control statements (while
, for loops)

19. Write simple programs to create simple 1D & 2D arrays and perform addition & subtraction
operations

225
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 1 1 1 3 2
311.1

AEI- 1 1 1 3 2
311.2

AEI- 1 1 1 3 2
311.3

AEI- 1 1 1 3 2
311.4

Average 1 1 1 3 2
3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

226
IV SEMESTER

227
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS

CURRICULUM-20

IV SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods/week
Subject Total
Name of the Subject
Code Periods
/semester Duration Sessional EndExam Total
Theory Practicals
(hours) Marks Marks Marks

THEORY
Engineering Mathematics
AEI-401 3 - 45 3 20 80 100
– III
5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-402 Linear Integrated Circuits
Micro Controllers and
5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-403 Applications

Process control 5 75 3 20 80 100

AEI-404

4 60 3 20 80 100
AEI-405 Industrial Electronics

Analytical 5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-406
Instrumentation
PRACTICAL
Linear IC Applications
AEI-407 and e-CAD 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
AEI-408 Communication Skills 3 45 3 40 60 100

Micro Controllers and

AEI-409 3 45 3 40 60 100
Applications Lab

AEI-410 Process control Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100

Analytical
AEI-411 3 45 3 40 60 100
Instrumentation Lab

TOTAL 27 15 630 - 320 780 1100

AEI-401,408 common with all branches.

228
 C-20
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III
Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Code Course Title Periods/week periods FA SA

Engineering
AEI-401 3 45 20 80
Mathematics-III

S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

Higher order Linear Differential

1 15 CO1
equations with constant coefficients

2 Laplace Transforms 18 CO2

3 Fourier Series 12 CO3

Total Periods 45

(i) To learn the principles of solving differential equations of second

and higher order.
Course Objectives (ii) To comprehend the concept of Laplace transformations and
inverse Laplace transformations.
(iii) To Explainthe concept of Fourier Series expansion of functions.

CO1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential

equations of second and higher order.

Course Outcomes CO2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various
functions.

CO3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier
Sine and Cosine series.

229
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
Differential Equations of higher order
C.O. 1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equation of second and
higher order.
L.O1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c) y = 0 where a, b, c are real numbers
and provide examples.
1.2 Solve higher order homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients and
provide examples.
1.3 Define complementary function, particular Integral and general solution of a non-
homogeneous differential equation.
1.4 Explain the methods of solving f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of nth order and X is a

function of the forms k , eax , sin ax, cos ax, x, x n and their linear combinations where n is
a positive integer, with examples.

Unit-II
Laplace Transforms
C.O. 2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various functions.
L.O. 2.1 Define Laplace Transform and explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace
Transform
2.2. Obtain Laplace transforms of standard functions and solve simple problems.
2.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First shifting theorem
(without proof) and Change of Scale property and solve simple problems.
2.4. Write the Laplace Transform of unit step function and second shifting theorem (without
proof) and solve simple problems.

2.5. Write formulae for Laplace transform of functions with multiplication by t n and division by
t, Laplace transform of derivatives, evaluation of some definite integrals using Laplace
Transforms and solve simple problems.

Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

230
 2.6 Define inverse Laplace Transform, obtain inverse Laplace Transforms of standard functions
and solve simple problems.
2.7 Write linearity property, first and second shifting theorems (without proof), change of
scale property of inverse Laplace transform and solve simple problems.
2.8 Write inverse Laplace transforms of derivatives and integrals and solve simple problems.
2.9 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions with multiplication by s and division by s and
solve simple problems.
2.10 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions using partial fractions and solve some
simple problems.
2.11 Define convolution of two functions, state convolution theorem (without proof) and
solve simple problems.

Unit-III
Fourier series
C.O. 3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier Sine and Cosine
series
L.O. 3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the intervals (c, c  2 ) and (c, c  2l ) and write the
Euler’s formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series expansion of a function.
3.4 Find Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0 , 2π) and (-π , π)
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval ( ,  ) and (l , l ) expand
simple functions.
3.6 Write Fourier series expansion of a function over the interval (0, 2l) and and

expand simple functions.

3.7 Write half-range Fourier sine and cosine series of a function over the interval (0, π) and
and expand simple functions.

Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

231
 Engineering Mathematics – III
CO/PO - Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Avg 3 2.66 2.33 2.33 2.66 3 2.66

3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)

Note:
PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be
planned and conducted.
PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.

PSO1: An ability to Explainthe concepts of basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in various
areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and electronic
systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.

PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.

PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.

232
 C-20
Engineering Mathematics – III
PO- CO – Mapping strength

CO periods addressing PO in
column I
Mapped with Level
PO no Remarks
CO no (1,2 or 3)

No %

1 CO1, CO2, CO3 45 100% 3

2 CO1, CO2, CO3 37 82.2% 3 >40% Level 3

3 CO1, CO2, CO3 32 71.1% 3 Highly

addressed
4 CO1, CO2, CO3 32 71.1% 3

5
25% to 40%
6 Level 2
Moderately
7
addressed
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3 37 82.2% 3

PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3 45 100% 3

5% to 25%
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3 36 80% 3 Level 1 Low
addressed

<5% Not
addressed

233
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III
(Common Subject)
Course Content

Unit I: Differential Equations of higher order

1. Solve Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and
higher with emphasis on second order.

2. Solve Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form f(D)
y = X where X is in the form k(constant), eax, sinax, cosax, xn, where n is a positive integer, finding
complimentary function, particular integral and general solution.

Unit II: Laplace Transforms

3. Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of LT, LT of elementary functions, linearity property,
state first shifting theorem, change of scale property, multiplication by tn, division by t, LT of
derivatives and integrals, LT of unit step function, state second shifting theorem, inverse Laplace
transforms- state shifting theorems and change of scale property, multiplication by sn and division
by s, derivatives, integrals, examples of inverse LT using partial fractions, state convolution
theorem with simple examples.

Unit III: Fourier series

4. Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over the
interval and , Euler’s formulae , sufficient conditions for existence of
Fourier series expansion of a function, Fourier series expansion of basic functions limited to
k(constant), and their combinations over the intervals
, Fourier series for even and odd functions over

, Fourier half-range sine and cosine series over and

Textbook:

Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed
by SBTET, AP.

Reference Books:
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers
2. M.R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline of Laplace Transforms, Schaums’ Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers,
Moscow.

234
 BLUE PRINT

Weighta Question
Marks wise
S. Chapter/ No of ge COs
distribution of wise distribution
No Unit title Periods mapped
allotted weightage
of weightage

R U Ap An R U Ap An

Unit – I
Higher order
Linear
1 Differential 15 28 11 11 3 3 2 2 1 1 CO1
equations
with constant
coefficients

Unit - II CO2
2 Laplace 18 33 11 11 11 0 2 2 2 0
Transforms

Unit - III
3 12 19 3 3 3 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Fourier Series

Total 45 80 25 25 17 13 5 5 4 2

R: Remembering Type : 25 Marks

U: understanding Type : 25 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 17 Marks
An: Analysing Type : 13 Marks

C-20
Engineering Mathematics – III
Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test-I From LO 1.1 to 2.5

Unit Test-II From LO 2.6 to 3.7

235
 Unit Test I C –20, AEI-401
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-II
Sub Code: AEI-401
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each

1. Answer the following:

a. Write the auxiliary equation for given differential equation (CO1)

1 1 1
i) , ,
a x
2 2
a x
2 2
x  a2
2

1 1 1
b. For given differential equation ii ) , , , if roots of
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii ) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2

auxiliary equation are

1,-1,then _____________ (CO1)

c. ___________ (CO2)

d. then : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)

2. Solve (CO1)

3. Find the particular integral of ( CO1)

4. Evaluate (CO2)

5. Evaluate (CO2)

236
 Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.

6. A) Solve (CO1)
or

B) Solve (CO1)

7. A) Solve (CO1)
or

B) Solve (CO1)

8. A) Evaluate (CO2)
or

B) Evaluate (CO2)

-o0o-

237
 C –20, AEI-401
Unit Test II
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-II
Sub Code: AEI-401
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40

Part-A 16Marks

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each

1. Answer the following:

a. then : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)

b.

(CO2)

c. (CO2)

d. Write the Fourier series for the function in the interval (CO3)

2. Evaluate (CO2)

3. Evaluate (CO2)

4. Evaluate (CO2)

5. Evaluate Fourier coefficient for in the interval (CO3)

238
 Part-B 3×8=24

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.

6. A) Evaluate (CO2)
or

B) Evaluate (CO2)

7. A) Evaluate (CO2)

or

B) Evaluate (CO2)

8. A) Obtain the Fourier series for the function in the interval (CO3)
or

B) Obtain the half range Fourier cosine series of in (CO3)

-o0o-

239
 END EXAM MODEL PAPER
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS –AEI- 401

TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- I MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

1. Solve CO 1

2. Solve CO 1

3. Find the particular integral of differential equation CO 1

4. Find the particular integral of differential equation CO 1

5. Find CO2

6. Find CO2

7. Find CO2

8. Find the value of in the Fourier expansion of in the interval CO3

9. Find the Fourier coefficients of in the interval CO3

10. Find the value of in the half range cosine series of in the interval

CO3

240
 PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

11. A) Solve CO 1

Or

B) Solve CO 1

12. A) Solve CO1

Or

B) Solve CO1

13. A) Evaluate CO2

Or

B) Evaluate CO2

14. A) Evaluate CO2

Or

B) Evaluate CO2

15. A) Find CO2

Or

B) Using convolution theorem find CO2

PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

16. Find the Fourier expansion of in the interval and hence deduce

that CO3

***

241
 STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – AEI-401

TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- 2 MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M

1. Solve CO 1

2. Solve CO 1

3. Find the particular integral of differential equation CO 1

4. Find the particular integral of differential equation CO 1

5. Find CO2

6. Find CO2

7. Find CO2

8. Find the value of in the Fourier expansion of

in the interval CO3

9. Write Euler’s formula of Fourier expansion of in the interval CO3

10.Find the value of in the half range cosine series of in the interval

CO3

242
 PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M

11.A) Solve CO 1

Or

B) Solve CO 1

12.A) Solve CO1

Or

B) Solve CO1

13.A) Evaluate CO2

Or

B) Evaluate CO2

14.A) Evaluate CO2

Or

B) Using Laplace transforms evaluate CO2

15.A) Find CO2

Or

B) Using convolution theorem find CO2

PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

16. Find the Fourier expansion of in the interval and hence deduce

that CO3

***

243
 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

Total no. of Marks Marks

Course code Course title
Periods/Week periods for FA for SA

LINEAR
AEI-402 INTEGRATED 75 20 80
05
CIRCUITS

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Introduction to Operational amplifiers 12 CO1
18 CO2
2 Linear applications of Operational amplifiers

Active filters 15 CO3

3

555 Timer IC 12 CO4

4
Nonlinear applications of operational 18 CO5
5
amplifier
TOTAL 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

i) Familiarize with the characteristics of operational amplifiers.

Course
ii)Know the applications of operational amplifiers.
Objectives
iii)Explain the operation of LPF, HPF, BPF and BSF using OP Amp.
iv)Explain the operation of 555 timer and its applications.
CO1 AEI-402.1 Anayse the characteristics of operational amplifiers.

CO2 AEI-402.2 Analyse the op-amp application circuits

Course
outcomes
CO3 AEI-402.3 Explain the operation of LPF, HPF, BPF and BSF using OP Amp.

CO4 AEI-402.4 Explain the operation of 555 timer and its applications.

CO5 AEI-402.5 Analyse the non linear applications of op-amp.

244
Learning 1.0 Introduction to operational amplifiers
Outcomes
1.1 State the requirements of an operational amplifier.
1.2 Draw the circuit of differential amplifier.
1.3 Explain the operation of differential amplifier.
1.4 Draw and explain the block diagram of a typical integrated
circuit operational amplifier.
1.5 Draw the schematic symbol of operational amplifier.
1.6 List and sketch different package styles of analog ICs.
1.7 Draw the pin diagrams of metal can package and dual-in-line
package for a typical IC 741 or equivalent.
1.8 List the basic specifications of ideal operational amplifier.
1.9 Define Voltage gain AV, output impedance Zo, input impedance Zi,
Bandwidth BW, input offset voltage Vio, input offset current Iio, input
bias current IB, and also give the typical values for an ideal op-amp and IC
741 or equivalent operational amplifier.
1.10 Define C.M.R.R and give the typical values for an ideal and practical
operationalamplifier.
1.11 State the need for high C.M.R.R.
1.12 Define slew rateand give the typical values for an ideal and practical
operational amplifier.
1.13 List the applications of Operational Amplifier.

2.0 Linear applications of operational amplifiers

2.1 Explain the open loop operation of an operational amplifier.

2.2 Mention the effects of negative feedback on an amplifier.
2.3 Draw and explain the operation of inverting and non- inverting
amplifiers.
2.4 Draw and explain the operation of Voltage follower circuit using
operational amplifier.
2.5 Draw and explain the operation of summing amplifier anddifference
amplifier using OP-amp.
2.6 Solve simple problems on summing amplifier and difference amplifier
using OP-amp.
2.7 Draw and explain the operation of ideal and practical integrator and
differentiator circuits.
2.8 Draw and explain the operation of current to voltage converter using OP-
amp.
2.9 Draw and explain the operation of voltage to current converter using OP-
amp.
2.10 Draw and explain the operation of Instrumentation amplifier using Op-
amp. and also with bridge circuit.
3.0Explainthe active filters
3.1 Define Filter.
3.2 List the types of Active filters.
3.3 List the limitations/disadvantages of passive filters.
3.4 State how active filters overcome the above limitations.
3.5 Draw the ideal and practical frequency response plots for a
LPF, HPF, BPF, BSF and All Pass Filter.
3.6 Define Pass band and Stop band.

245
 3.7 Draw and explain the operations of first order LPFand HPF using
operational amplifier with its frequency responses.
3.8 Draw and explain the operations of first order BPF(narrow & wide) and
BSF ( narrow & wide) using operational amplifiers with its frequency
responses.
3.9 List the disadvantages of active filters.

4.0 Explainthe operation and application of 555 Timer IC.

4.1 Draw the block diagram of 555 timer IC.

4.2 Explain the operation of various blocks of a 555 timer IC.
4.3 Draw the pin diagram of 555 IC and Mention the function of each
pin.
4.4 Draw and explain the operation of monostable Multivibrator
using 555 IC timer.
4.5 Draw and explain the operation of Astable multivibrator using IC 555
timer.
4.6 Mention the applications of 555 Timer IC.

5.0 Non-Linear Applications of operational amplifier

5.1 Draw and explain the operation of square wave generator.
5.2 Draw and explain the operation of wien bridge oscillator.
5.3 Draw and Explain the operation of Triangular wave generator.
5.4 Draw and explain the operationof basic comparator circuit.
5.5 Draw and explain the operation of Schmitt trigger circuit with its
waveforms.
5.6 Explain the principle of operation of phase locked loopwith the help of
block diagram.
5.8 List the applications of PLL.

COURSE CONTENTS

1.0 Introduction to Operational amplifiers: Block diagram of typical operational amplifier; IC

package, pin identification, Definitions: Input offset voltage, input offset current, input bias
current, Voltage gain, input and outputimpedances, bandwidth,slew rate, CMRR with
reference to operational amplifier, specifications of ideal op-amp.

2.0 Linear Applications of Operational amplifiers: Open loop op-amp configuration, inverting
and non-inverting amplifier. Op-amp with feedback: adder, subtractor, integrator,
differentiator, Instrumentation amplifier, voltage to current converter and current to voltage
converter.

3.0 Active Filters: Low pass, high pass, Band pass and Band elimination filters, frequency
responses.

4.0 555 Timer IC: Block diagram and operation of 555 timer IC, Monostable, As table
multivibrator operations using 555 timer IC.

246
5.0 Non-Linear applications of Operational amplifier: Square wave generator, wein bridge
oscillator, Triangular wave generator, Basic comparator, Schmitt trigger, PLL.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ramakanth AGaykwad- Op Amps & Linear Integrated Circuits,Pearson .
2. Roy Chowdary- linear Integrated Circuits, New Age International Publisher.
3. Botkar -Integrated Circuits,Khanna publications.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-402.1 1 1 3 2

AEI-402.2 1 1 1 3 2

AEI-402.3 1 1 3 2

AEI-402.4 1 1 3 2

AEI-402.5 1 1 1 3 2

Average 1 1 1 3 2

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

247
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Weightag Distribution of Distribution of COs
No. of
e of Weightage Weightage Mapp
S. Major Topics periods
marks ed
No
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Introduction
to 14 6 8 2 1
1 15 CO1
Operational
amplifiers
Linear
applications CO2
15 14 6 8 2 1
2 of
Operational
amplifiers
15 14 6 8 2 1 CO3
3 Active filters

CO4
4 15 14 6 8 2 1
555 Timer IC

Nonlinear CO5
applications
of 18 14 6 8 2 1
5
Operational
amplifiers
Higher order
CO2,C
question from 10 10 1
O5
chapter 2 or 5

Total 75 80 30 24 16 10 10 3 2 1 -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.10

Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.8

248
 C-20-AEI-402

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- FOURTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. List any three specifications of op-amp. (CO1)

2. Define Slew rate. (CO1)

3. Mention the effects of negative feedback on an amplifier. (CO2)

4. Draw the circuit of difference amplifier using operational amplifier. (CO2)

5. Define Filter. (CO3)

6. List any three limitations of passive filters. (CO3)

7. Mention any three applications of 555 Timer IC. (CO4)

8. Draw the pin diagram of 555 IC. (CO4)

9. List any three applications of PLL. (CO4)

10. Draw the basic comparator using op-amp. (CO4)

PART- B
5×8=40

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain the operation of differential amplifier. (CO1)

Or
(B). Draw and explain the block diagram of a typical integrated circuit operational amplifier.
(CO1)
12. (A). Draw and explain the operation of Instrumentation amplifier using Op-amp with
bridge circuit.
(CO2)
Or
(B). Draw and explain the operation of ideal integrator circuit using OP-amp. (CO2)

249
 13. (A). Draw and explain the operation of first order LPF using operational amplifiers
with its frequency response. (CO3)
Or
(B). Draw and explain the operation of first order narrow BPF using operational
amplifier with its frequency response. (CO3)
14. (A). Draw and explain the operation of Astable multivibrator using IC 555 timer. (CO4)
Or
(B). Explain the operation of various blocks of a 555 timer IC. (CO4)

15. (A). Explain the operation of Schmitt trigger circuit with its waveforms. (CO4)
Or
(B). Explain the operation of square wave generator using Op-Amp. (CO4)

PART- C
1×10=10

Instructions: 1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.

2)Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer..

16. Design Instrumentation amplifier of gain 10 using three op-amps (CO2)

***

250
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS- (AEI-402)

Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks.
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
not exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) Draw the circuit symbol of Op-Amp. (CO1)4X1M=4M

ii)For an Op-Amp with negative feedback the voltage gain is increased. (T/F)(CO2)
iii) The voltage gain of a Non –inverting Op-Amp is ---------. (CO2)
iv) Give the ideal and practical value of input impedance ofOp-Amp. (CO1)
2. Define C.M.R.R. (CO1) 3M
3. List any three applications of Operational Amplifier. (CO2) 3M
4. Draw the circuit of current to voltage converter using OP-amp. (CO2) 3M
5. Mention any three effects of negative feedback on an amplifier. (CO2) 3M

PART- B 3×8M=24M

Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question andeach question carries Eight
marks.

6. (A). Draw and explain the block diagram of a typical integrated circuit operational
amplifier. (CO1)
or
(B). Explain the operation of differential amplifier. (CO1)

7. (A). Explain the open loop operation of an operational amplifier (CO2)

Or
(B). Draw and explain the operation of practical differentiator circuit using operational
amplifier. (CO2)

8. (A). Draw and explain the operation of Instrumentation amplifier using Op-amp with
bridge circuit. (CO2)
or
(B). Define the terms . (CO2)
i)Voltage gain (AV)
ii) output impedance (Zo)
iii) input offset voltage (Vio ),
iv)Bandwidth (BW).

***

251
 MICRO CONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS

No of periods per Marks Marks

Course code Course title Total no. of periods
week for FA for SA

Micro
Controllers 5
AEI-403 75 20 80
And
Applications

S. NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Architecture of 8051 17 CO1
CO2
2 Instruction set of 8051 19
Programming concepts CO3
3 21
Interfacing CO4
4 Peripherals ICs 09

Applications CO5
5 09

TOTAL 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

Course (i) Explainarchitecture, programming and its applications
Objectives
CO1 AEI-403.1 Explain the functional block diagram of 8085 & 8051 .
Explain the instruction set and addressing modes of 8051
CO2 AEI-403.2 microcontroller.
Course Write the assembly level language programs of 8051
outcomes CO3 AEI-403.3 microcontroller.
Illustrate interfacing different peripherals 8255, 8257with 8051
CO4 AEI-403.4 microcontroller.
CO5 AEI-403.5 Explain the applications of 8051 microcontroller.
1.0 Architecture of Microcontroller 8051
Learning 1.1 Explain the functional block diagram of 8085 Microprocessor.
Outcomes 1.2 List the differences between Microprocessors and microcontrollers.
1.3 List the features of 8051 micro controller..
1.4 Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8051 microcontroller.
1.5 Explain the register structure of 8051.
1.6 State the importance of special function registers and list them.
1.7 Draw the pin diagram of 8051 micro controller & specify the purpose of
each pin.

252
1.8 Explain internal memory and external memory organization of 8051.
1.9 State the need of timers/counters in 8051
1.10 List the timers/counters of 8051
1.11 Explain the timers/counters of 8051.
1.12 List the input/output ports of 8051.
1.13 Explain the input/output ports of 8051
1.14 Define an interrupt
1.15 List the interrupts of 8051.
1.16 Explain the following interrupts of 8051.
i. Timer interrupts (TF0 and TF1)
ii. Serial port interrupts (TI/RI)
iii. External interrupts (INT0 and INT1)
2.0 Instruction set of 8051 micro controller
2.1 State the need for an instruction set.
2.2 Draw and explain the instruction format of 8051 with an example.
2.3 Define fetch cycle, execution cycle and instruction cycle.
2.4 Distinguish between machine cycle and T-state.
2.5 Draw the timing diagrams for memory write, memory read
operations of 8051.
2.6 Define the terms machine language, assembly language, and
mnemonics.
2.7 Differentiate machine level programming and assembly level
programming.
2.8 List the major four groups in the instruction set.
2.9 Explain the data transfer, arithmetic, logic and branching instructions.
2.10 Classify the 8051 instructions into one byte, two byte and three byte
instructions.
2.11 List the five addressing modes of 8051.
2.12 Explain the following addressing modes of 8051.
a. Immediate
b. Register
c. Direct
d. Register indirect
e. indexed
2.13 List and explain data transfer instructions.
2.14 List and explain the arithmetic instructions
2.15 List and explain the logic instructions.
2.16 List and explain the branching instructions.
3.0 Programming concepts
3.1 Draw the various symbols used in flow charts.
3.2 Draw flow charts for following simple problems.

3.2.1 Addition of two 8-bit numbers

3.2.2 Subtraction of 8-bit numbers
3.2.3 Multiplication of 8-bit numbers
3.2.4 Sum of n-numbers
3.3 Write programs of instructions to perform single byte, double byte
and multi byte addition and subtraction.
3.4 Write a program to find largest (or smallest) number in an array using
jump instruction.
3.5 Write a program using timer/counter techniques.

253
3.6 Define a subroutine
3.7 List the advantages of subroutine.
3.8 Define Program Counter, Stack, and Stack pointer.
3.9 Explain the sequence of program when subroutine is called and
executed.
3.10 Explain how information is exchanged between the program counter
and the stack and identify the stack pointer register when a
subroutine is called.
3.11 Explain LCALL and ACALL instructions.
3.12 List and explain unconditional and conditional Return instructions
3.13 Explain PUSH, and POP instructions.
3.14 Write programs using PUSH, and POP instructions.
3.15 Write instructions to set up time delay
3.16 Explain the nesting, multiple ending and common ending techniques
in subroutines.
3.17 Define the term debugging.
3.18 Explain the following dynamic debugging techniques.
a) Single step
b) Break point
4.0 Interfacing of Peripheral ICs
4.1 Define the term interfacing.
4.2 State the need for interfacing.
4.3 List and name the different types of interfacing peripheral ICs.
4.4 List the features of 8255.
4.5 Draw the pin diagram of 8255.
4.6 Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8255.
4.7 List the operating modes of 8255.
4.8 Write CWR (Control Word Register) format of 8255.
4.9 Draw and explain the interfacing diagram of 8255 with micro
controller 8051.
4.10 List the features of 8257.
4.11 List the operating modes of 8257.
4.12 Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8257- DMA
controller.
4.13 Draw and explain the interfacing diagram of 8257 with micro
controller 8051.
5.0 Applications of micro controllers 8051.
5.1 Explain Traffic light control interface using 8051.
5.2 Explain the Printer interface using 8051.
5.3 Explain the Stepper motor control interface using 8051.
5.4 Explain the seven segment display interface using 8051.

254
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-403.1 2 3 2

AEI-403.2 2 3 2

AEI-403.3 2 2 3 2

AEI-403.4 1 3 2

AEI-403.5 1 1 3 2

Average 1.6 1 2 3 2

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENTS
1. Architecture of 8051:
Functional block diagram of 8085 microprocessors and Architecture of 8051 Microcontroller,
Pin diagram of 8051, registers, timers, interrupts of 8051.
2. Instruction set of 8051:
Instruction set of 8051, instruction format, fetch cycle, execution cycle, instruction cycle,
machine cycle, timing diagrams, machine language, assembly language, classification of
instructions, addressing modes- Groups of instructions, opcode, and operand.
3. Programming concepts:
Flow charts, single and multi byte addition and subtraction, subroutines- nesting, multiple
ending and common ending- debugging, time delay programs.
4. Interfacing Peripheral ICs:
Functional block diagrams of 8255 and 8257, Interfacing of 8255, 8257 with 8051
5. Applications:
Traffic light control, printer interface, stepper motor control, Seven segment display interface

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi andJanice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin D. Mckinlay-The 8051 Micro controller
and embedded systems using assembly and C, Pearson Education Inc.
2. Kenneth J. Ayala - 8051 Micro controller, WEST PUBLISHING COMPANY.
3. Myke Predko - Programming customizing the 8051 Microcontroller, TMH.
4. Douglas V Hall - Microprocessors and interfacing, McGraw Hill.
5. Barry Brey - Intel Microprocessors, Prentice-Hall.
6. Mazidi and Mazidi - 8051Micro controllers,Pearson Education India.
7. Kenneth J. Ayala - 8051 Microcontrollers, WEST PUBLISHING COMPANY.

255
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Distribution of Distribution of COs
No. of Weightage
Weightage Weightage Mapp
S. Major Topics periods of marks
ed
No
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Architecture of 17 9 8 3 1
1 17 CO1
8051
Instruction set of 17 9 8 3 1 CO2
2 19
8051
Programming CO3
14 6 8 2 1
3 concepts 21

Interfacing CO4
14 6 8 2 1
4 Peripherals ICs 09

Applications 08 8 1 CO5
5 09

Higher order
question from 10 10 1 CO3
Chapter 3.

Total 80 30 32 18 - 10 4 2 - -
75

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.16

Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.4

256
 C-20-AEI-403
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)
DAEIE- FOURTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
MICROCONTROLLER AND APPLICATIONS
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A3×10=30
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. List the interrupts of 8051 micro controller. (CO1)

2. State the need of Special Function Registers in 8051. (CO1)

3. List any three differences between Microprocessors and Micro Controllers. (CO1)

4. Define the terms Fetch Cycle and Execution Cycle. (CO2)

5. List any three addressing modes of 8051. (CO2)

6. Define the term “Machine Language”. (CO2)

7. Define the term “Debugging” . (CO3)

8. Define the term “Program Counter”. (CO3)

9. Write Control word Register format of 8255. (CO4)

10. State the need of interfacing. (CO4)

257
 PART- B
5×8=40

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain the functional block diagram of 8085 Microprocessor. (CO1)
or
(B). Explain the functional block diagram of 8051 Micro Controller . (CO1)

12. (A). Explain the data transfer and arithmetic instructions with examples. (CO2)
or
(B). Explain the Immediate and Register addressing modes. (CO2)

13. (A). Explain the PUSH and POP instructions with examples. (CO3)
Or
(B). Write a programme to perform addition of two 8-bit numbers . (CO3)

14. (A). Explain the functional block diagram of 8255. CO4)

Or
(B). Explain the functional block diagram of 8257 DMA Controller . (CO4)

15. (A). Explain the interfacing of stepper motor using 8051 Micro Controller. (CO5)
Or
(B). Explain the interfacing of Traffic Light control using 8051 Micro Controller. (CO5)

PART- C
1×10=10

Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.

(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer..

16. Write a program to generate a rectangular wave of 1khz having 50% duty cycle from (TX0 )
pin of 8051 timer. Assume XTAL of 12Mhz frequency. (CO3)

***

258
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
MICRO CONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS (AEI-403)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- ATotal: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks.
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) 8051 is a ------- bit controller. (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) Define Mnemonics.(CO2)

iii) MOV A,B instruction belongs to arithmetic instruction of 8051. (True/False) (CO2)

iv) Which register is called permanent storage register in 8051. (CO1)

2. List the features of Microcontroller. (CO1)3M

3. Define fetch cycle and execute cycle. (CO2)3M

4. State the need for an instruction set . (CO2)3M

5. Draw the instruction format of 8051 . (CO2)3M

PART- B 3×8M=24M

Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and
(2)Each question carries Eight marks

6. (A). Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8051 . (CO1)
Or
(B). Draw the pin diagram of 8051 and specify the purpose of each pin . (CO1)

7. (A). Draw and explain the functional block diagram of 8085. (CO1)
Or
(B). Explain the data transfer instructions with examples . (CO2)

8. (A). Explain the addressing modes of 8051 with examples . (CO2)

Or
(B). Explain the arithmetic instructions with examples . (CO2)

259
 ***

PROCESS CONTROL

Course No of periods per Total no. of Marks Marks

Course title
code week periods for FA for SA

Process
AEI-404 75 20 80
Control 5

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Introduction to process control 10 CO1
15 CO2
2 Controller principles
Final control operation 20 CO3
3
Advanced process Control systems 15 CO4
4
Process instrument diagrams and standards 15 CO5
5
75
TOTAL

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Familiarize with the knowledge of a process control loop, controller principles,
tuning, final control operations and advanced process control systems.

Course Familiarize with the knowledge of process line diagrams and standards.
Objectives (ii)

CO1 Explainterms related to process control.

AEI-404.1
CO2 Explainthe controller principles
AEI-404.2
CO3 Explain the principle of operation of final controller elements
AEI-404.3
CO4 Explain the principle of operation of advanced process control
AEI-404.4 system
Course
outcomes CO5 AEI-404.5 Explainthe Process instrument diagrams and standards

260
Learning 1.0 Introduction to process control
Outcomes
1.1 Define the terms process and process control.
1.2 Explain the development of automatic process control with example.
1.3 Draw the block diagram of a process control loop.
1.4 Explain each element in a process control loop.
1.5 Explain batch process and continuous process.
1.6 Define the terms controlled variable and manipulated variable.
1.7 Explain controlled variable and manipulated variable with an
example.

2.0 Controller principles

2.1 Define the terms process load, process lag and self-regulation.
2.2 Define the terms error, control lag, dead time, and cycling.
2.3 List the Discontinuous control modes.
2.4 Explain two positions, multi position and floating control modes.
2.5 List the continuous control modes.
2.6 Define proportional control mode.
2.7 Explain proportional control mode.
2.8 Define the terms proportional band, and offset.
2.9 List the characteristics of proportional control mode.
2.10 Define integral control mode.
2.11 Explain integral control mode.
2.12 List the characteristics of integral control mode.
2.13 Define derivative control mode.
2.14 Explain the derivative control mode.
2.15 List the characteristics of derivative control mode.
2.16 List the composite control modes.
2.17 Explain the Proportional-Integral Control modes.
2.18 List the characteristics of Proportional-Integral Control modes.
2.19 Explain PD and PID control modes.
2.20 List advantages and disadvantages of PI, PD & PID controllers.
2.21 State the need for tuning of PID controllers.
2.22 Explain the following methods of tuning of PID controllers
a) Ultimate gain method
b) Process reaction curve method.
3.0 Final control Operation

3.1 Explain the Principle of final control operation.

3.2 Draw the block diagram of final control operation and explain its
each block.
3.3 State the need for electric to pressure and pressure to electric
converters.
3.4 Explain the basic principle of Nozzle-Flapper system with a diagram.
3.5 Explain the principle of operation of Electric to Pressure converter.

261
 3.6 Explain the principle of operation of Pressure to Electric converter.
3.7 List the different types of Actuators.
3.8 Explain the principle of Pneumatic Actuator with diagram.
3.9 Explain the principle of Hydraulic Actuator with diagram.
3.10 Explain the principle of Electro Pneumatic Actuator with diagram.
3.11 Explain the following Electrical actuators
a) Solenoid valve actuator
b) Stepper motor actuator
3.12 Solve simple problems on actuators.
3.13 Explain the constructional details of control valve.
3.14 Explain the following :
a) Flow – lift characteristics control valves such as Quick
opening, Linear, Equal percentage valves,
b) Sliding stem Control valves, such as Single seat Plug, Double
seat plug and Lifting gate control valves
c) Rotating shaft control valves, such as Rotating plug, Butterfly
valves and Louvers.
4.0 Introduction to Advanced process Control systems

4.1 Define the following control system configuration.

a) Single variable control system.
(i) Independent single variable control system
(ii) Interactive single variable control system
b) Compound variable control system and
c) Multivariable control system
4.2 Draw and explain the block diagram of cascade control system.
4.3 Justify how the cascade control system is better than single loop
control system with an example.
4.4 List the applications of cascade control system.
4.5 Draw and explain the block diagram of feed forward control system.
4.6 Explain the feed forward control system with an example.
4.7 Distinguish between feedback and feed forward control systems.
4.8 Explain the operation of Ratio control with a diagram.
4.9 List the applications of Ratio control system.
4.10 Define Adaptive control.
4.11 Explain programmed adaptive control system with block diagram.
4.12 List the applications of adaptive control system.
5.0 To Explainthe process line diagrams, standards
5.1 Draw the following line diagrams and symbols.
a) Process line, connection to process or instrument
supply
b) Fluid pressure Line.
c) Electric signal
d) Pneumatic signal
e) Hydraulic signal

262
 f) Capillary tube.
g) Electromagnetic or Sonic signal (guided and not
guided).
h) Undefined signal.
i) Mechanical link
j) Internal system link (software or data link or computer
signal)
k) Orifice installed line.
l) Point of measurement
5.2 Draw the symbols for the following controllers and transmitters.
(a) Pressure transmitter
(b) Flow Transmitter
(c) Level Transmitter
(d) Temperature Transmitter
(e) Pressure Controller
(f) Flow Controller
(g) Level Controller
(h) Temperature Controller
5.3 Draw the symbols for the following control valves
(a) Hydraulically operated control valve
(b) Pneumatically operated control valve
(c) Electrically operated control valve
(d) Butterfly valve
(e) Solenoid Valve
(f) Gate valve
(g) Gate valve-hand operated
(h) Globe Valve
(i) Globe valve- hand operated
5.4 Draw the following general instruments by Balloon symbols
(a) Instrument at locally mounted
(b) Instrument at control centre
(c) Instrument- bifunctional /two services
(d) Instrument-transmitting type
5.5 Define piping and instrumentation diagram.
5.6 Explain the use of letter codes for identification of instruments.
5.7 List different standards used in Instrumentation.
a) ISI
b) ANSI
c) BS
d) ISA
e) DIN

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

263
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-404.1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-404.2 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-404.3 2 1 1 2 2 1

AEI-404.4 1 1 2 2 1

AEI-404.5 1 1 3 3 1

Average 1.2 1 1 2.6 2.2 1

COURSE CONTENTS :
1. Introduction to process control:
Process control principle-process control block diagram –typical control variables-controlled
variable, manipulated variable- Continuous and Batch process
2. Controller principles: -
process characteristics –process load – process lag-self regulation-control system parameters: -
error-variable range–control lag-dead time - cycling. Controller modes–discontinuous-two-
position, multi-position, floating, continuous control modes: - proportional, integral, derivative
control mode. Composite control modes: - PI, PD and PID-Controller. tuning methods-Ultimate
gain method and process reaction curve method.
3. Final control operation: -
Different types of the Actuators: -Pneumatic, Hydraulic, Electrical Actuators-different types of
control valves.
4. Advanced process Control systems: -
Single variable – compound variable. Multivariable control systems–cascade control–feed
forward control-ratio controls– adaptive control systems.
5. Process instrumentation diagrams and standards:
Line diagrams-Definition of P & I diagrams- Use of letter code of identification of Instruments-
Introduction to standards that are widely used in instrumentation Viz., ISI, ANSI, BIS, ISA etc.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Donald.P.Eckmann - Automatic process control , Wiley India.
2. Liptak - Instrument Engineers Hand book, Volume II, CRC Press.
3. Chatwal & Anand - Control Valves, Himalaya Publishing House.
4. B.E.Jones - Instrument Technology, Volume I, II, III, Butterworths.
5. Krishnakanth - Computer based Industrial Control, PHI.
6. Peter Harriot - Process Control, J. Williams. Monsanto Company.
7. Coughnour - Process Analysis & Control , WIELY.
8. Curtis .D.Johnson - Process control instrumentation technology, Seventh edition, Pearson.
9. D.Patranabis - Process Control, Tata McGraw Hill Education.
10. George stephanopoulous - Chemical Process Control, Pearson.
11. K.Krishna swamy - Process Control, Anshan Ltd; 2nd edition (14 June 2011).
12. Process control instrumentation technology by Curtis .D.Johnson Seventh edition
13. Process Control by D.Patranabis
14. Chemical Process Control by George stephanopoulous
15. Process Control by K.Krishna swamy

264
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Distribution of Distribution of COs
No. of Weightage
Weightage Weightage Mapp
S. Major Topics periods of marks
ed
No
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Introduction to 14 6 8 2 1
1 10 CO1
process control
Controller 15 14 6 8 2 1 CO2
2
principles
Final control CO3
20 14 6 8 2 1
3 operation

Advanced process CO4

15 14 6 8 2 1
4 Control systems

Process CO5
instrument
15 14 6 8 2 1
5 diagrams and
standards

Higher order
6 question from 10 10 1 CO3
--
Chapter 3

Total 75 80 30 24 8 10 10 5 - 1 -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.6

Unit Test-II From 3.7 to 5.7

265
 C-20-AEI-404

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- FOURTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
PROCESS CONTROL

Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. Define the terms process and process control. (CO1)

2. Define the terms controlled variable and manipulated variable. (CO1)

3. List the characteristics of derivative control mode. (CO2)

4. State the need for tuning of PID controllers. (CO2)

5. List the different types of Actuators. (CO3)

6. State the need for electric to pressure and pressure to electric converters. (CO3)

7. List the applications of cascade control system. (CO3)

8. Define Adaptive control. (CO4)

9. Define piping and instrumentation diagram. (CO5)

10. Draw the symbols for the following: (CO5)

a) Hydraulically operated control valve

b) Pneumatically operated control valve

c) Electrically operated control valve

266
 PART- B
5×8=40

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain the development of automatic process control with example. (CO1)
or
(B). Explain batch process with diagram.(CO1)
12. (A). Explain the Ultimate gain method of tuning of PID controller. (CO2)
or
(B). Explain the Proportional-Integral Control modes and list its characteristics. (CO2)

13. (A). Explain the basic principle of Nozzle-Flapper system with a diagram. (CO3)
Or
(B). Explain the principle of Hydraulic Actuator with diagram. (CO3)

14. (A). Draw and explain the block diagram of cascade control system. (CO4)
Or
(B). Explain the operation of Ratio control with a diagram. (CO4)

15. (A). Explain the use of letter codes for identification of instruments. (CO5)
Or
(B). Explain the following standards used in Instrumentation. (CO5)
i). ISI
ii). ANSI

PART- C
1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. Find the working force resulting from 200N applied to a 1 cm radius forcing piston if the
working piston has a radius of 6 cm. And also find the hydraulic pressure. (CO3)

***

267
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
PROCESS CONTROL

(AEI-404)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) Define process (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) Define cycling. (CO2)

iii) Gain and proportional band are reciprocally related. (True/False) (CO2)

iv) -------= set point – control variable. (CO2)

2. Define control lag and dead time variable. (CO2) 3M

3. List the discontinues control modes. (CO2) 3M

4 List the characteristics of derivative control mode. (CO2) 3M

5. State the need for electric to pressure and pressure to electric converters.(CO3) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M

Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries
Eight marks.

6.(A). Explain the development of automatic process control with example. (CO1)
Or
(B) Explain controlled variable and manipulated variable with an example. (CO1)

7. (A). Explain the process reaction curve method of tuning of PID controller. (CO2)
Or
(B). Explain PD and PID control modes. (CO2)

8.(A). Explain the Principle of final control operation. (CO3)

Or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of Pressure to Electric converter. (CO3)

268
 ***

INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS

No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course Code Course title
periods/week periods for FA for SA
INDUSTRIAL
AEI-405 ELECTRONICS 04 60 20 80

No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods

1 Power Electronic Devices 14 CO1

2 Opto-electronic Devices 14 CO2
3 Ultrasonics 8 CO3
4 Industrial Heating and welding
10 CO4
5 Inverters, SMPS &UPS 14 CO5
Total 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Learn the principles and working of power Electronic devices, opto electronic
devices, SMPS, UPS, etc.
Course
Objectives 2. Explain the principle of Industrial heating and welding.

3. Learn the practical importance Industrial electronic devices and circuits.

Analyse Various Power Electronic Devices like SCR, DIAC, TRIAC

CO1 AEI-405.1 etc.

Explain Various Opto electronic Devices like Photo diode, Photo

AEI-405.2 Transistor, LED etc.
Course Out CO2
comes
CO3 Explain the methods of generation of Ultrasonics
AEI-405.3
CO4 Explain Industrial Heating and welding.
AEI-405.4
CO5 AEI-405.5 Explain the working of Inverters, SMPS & UPS

269
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Power Electronic Devices

1.1 List different thyristor family devices.
1.2 Sketch the ISI circuit symbols of SCR, SCS, SBS, SUS, DIAC, TRIAC and GTO SCR.
1.3 Explain the construction and working of SCR.
1.4 Explain the Two-transistor model of SCR and its V-I Characteristics.
1.5 Mention the ratings of SCR.
1.6 Explain the working of DIAC & TRIAC.
1.7 Explain Volt-ampere characteristics of DIAC & TRIAC
1.8 Analyse the TRIAC triggering in different modes with diagrams.
1.9 Explain the construction and working of UJT.
1.10 Define intrinsic stand-off ratio of UJT.
1.11 Draw and explain the V-I characteristics of UJT.
1.12 Explain SCR triggering using UJT.
1.13 List the applications of DIAC, TRIAC & SCR.
2.0 Opto Electronic Devices
2.1 Draw the circuit symbols of photo diode,photo transistor,LDR and LED.
2.2 Explain the working of photo diode and draw and explain its V-I characteristics.
2.3 Explain the working of photo transistor and draw and explain its V-I characteristics.
2.4 Explain the working of photo multiplier and draw and explain its V-I characteristics.
2.5 List the applications of photo diode,photo transistor and photo multiplier.
2.6 Explain the working of LDR.
2.7 State photovoltaic effect.
2.8 Explain the working of photovoltaic cell.
2.9 List the applications of photovoltaic cells.
2.10 Explain the working of LED.
2.11 Explain the working of LCD.
2.12 Explain the working of opto-coupler.
2.13 List the applications of opto-couplers.
2.14 List the applications of LED and LCD.
2.15 Explain the working of Discrete displays- Dot matrix, Bar matrix , Bar graph and Seven
segment display.

3.0 Ultrasonics

3.1 Define Ultrasonics.

3.2 List the properties of ultrasonics.
3.3 Explain the following methods of generation of ultrasonics:
i. Magnetostriction oscillator/generator.
ii. Piezo-electric oscillator/generator
3.4 List the applications of Ultrasonics.

4.0 Industrial Heating and welding

4.1 Mention different industrial heating methods.
4.2 Explain the principle of Induction Heating and mention its merits.
4.3 List the applications of Induction Heating.

270
4.4 Draw the circuit of H.F power source for Induction Heating and explain its working.
4.5 Explain the principle of Dielectric heating.
4.6 List the dielectrics used for dielectric heating.
4.7 Explain the electrodes used in dielectric heating and method of coupling to RF generator.
4.8 Mention applications of Dielectric heating.
4.9 List the types of resistance welding.
4.10 Explain principle of Resistance Welding process.
4.11 Draw basic circuit of A.C. resistance welding and explain the working.

5.0 Inverters, SMPS and UPS

5.1 State the need of inverters.

5.2 State the principle of operation of inverter.
5.3 Classify inverters.
5.4 Explain the working of single-phase bridge inverter using MOSFET.
5.5 Explain the working of voltage source inverter.
5.6 Explain the working of PWM inverter.
5.7 List the applications of inverters
5.8 Explain the working of SMPS with block diagram.
5.9 List the applications of SMPS.
5.10 Classify UPS.
5.11 List the storage batteries used in UPS.
5.12 Explain the working of Off Line UPS and Online UPS.
5.13 List the applications of UPS.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-405.1 1 1 1 1 3 2

AEI-405.2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-405.3 1 1 3 2

AEI-405.4 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
AEI-405.5
1 1 3 2

Average 1 1 1 1 3 2 1

3= Stongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= lightly mapped

271
COURSE CONTENTS

1. Power Electronic Devices

Thyristor family devices- ISI circuit symbols - working of SCR-Two-transistor model of SCR and its
VI Characteristics-ratings of SCR-working of DIAC & TRIAC- Volt-ampere characteristics of DIAC
& TRIAC-modes of TRIAC triggering-construction and working of UJT-intrinsic stand-off ratio of
UJT-negative resistance region of UJT-SCR triggering using UJT, applications of SCR,TRIAC and
DIAC.

2. OptoElectronic Devices
Operation and characteristics of photo diode- operation and characteristics of photo transistor-
operation and characteristics of photo multiplier -Applications of photo diode ,photo transistor
and photo multiplier- Working Principle of LDR-Principle of photovoltaic cell- Applications of
photovoltaic cells- working of opto-coupler- working of LED - working of LCD- Applications of
LED and LCD – working of discrete displays, dot-matrix and seven segment displays.

3. Ultrasonics
Generation of Ultrasonics and their applications .

4. Industrial Heating and welding

Induction heating, Dielectric heating, Resistance welding.

5 Inverters, SMPS ,UPS

Need of inverters –principle of Inverter-single phase bridge inverter using MOSFET working of
voltage source inverter- working of PWM Inverter -SMPS with block diagram-applications of
SMPS -Off Line UPS and Online UPS-applications of UPS

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. P.C.Sen -Power Electronics , TMH.
2. S.K.Bhattacharya, S.Chatterjee- Industrial Electronics and Control, TES.
3. Harish,C Rai -Industrial Electronics,Khanna publications.
4. Biswanth paul - Industrial Electronics and control,PHI.
5. J David Irvin - The industrial Electronics Handbook, CRC.

272
 BLUE PRINT

We Marks Wise Question Wise

ight distribution of distribution of
Sl Chapter/ Unit No of age weightage weightage COs
No Title Periods All mapped
ott R U Ap An R U Ap An
ed
1 Power
Electronic 14 17 9 8 3 1 CO1
Devices
2 Opto
Eelectronic 14 14 6 8 2 1 CO2
Devices
3 Ultrasonics 8 3 3 1 CO3
4 Industrial
Heating and 10 14 6 8 2 1 CO4
Welding
5 Inverters, SMPS
14 22 6 16 2 2 CO5
and UPS
Higher order
Question from 10 10 1 CO1
1
TOTAL 60 80 30 40 10 - 10 5 1 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.15

Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.13

273
 C-20-AEI-405

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- FOURTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. List different thyristor family devices. (CO1)

2. Define intrinsic stand-off ratio of UJT . (CO1)

3. Sketch the ISI circuit symbols of SCS and SBS. . (CO1)

4. List the applications of LED. (CO2)

5. State photovoltaic effect. (CO2)

6. Define Ultrasonics. (CO3)

7. Mention different industrial heating methods. (CO4)

8. List the dielectrics used for dielectric heating. (CO4)

9. Classify UPS. (CO5)

10.State the need of inverters. (CO5)

274
 PART- B
5×8=40

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain working of DIAC (CO1)

or
(B). Explain the construction and working of SCR. (CO1)

12. (A). Explain the working of photo diode and draw and explain its V-I characteristics.(CO2)
Or
(B). Explain the working of opto-coupler (CO2)

13. (A). Explain principle of Resistance Welding . (CO4)

Or
(B). Explain the principle of Induction Heating (CO4)

14. (A). Explain the working of PWM inverter. (CO5)

Or
(B). Explain the working of SMPS with block diagram (CO5)

15. (A). Explain the working of single-phase bridge inverter using MOSFET.(CO5)
Or
(B). Explain the working of Off Line UPS . (CO5)

PART- C
1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer..

16. Analyse the TRIAC triggering in different modes with diagrams.. (CO1)

***

275
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
INDUSTRIAL ELETRONICS (AEI-405)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks.
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) Sketch the ISI circuit symbol of SCR (CO1)4X1M=4M

ii) TRIAC stands for ------ (CO1)
iii) Define latching current . (CO1)
iv) Photo diode converts---------- (CO2)
2. Mention any three ratings of SCR. (CO1) 3M
3. State the different modes of TRIAC triggering. (CO1) 3M
4. State photo voltaic effect. (CO2) 3M
5. List three applications of opto couplers. (CO2) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M

Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries Eight
marks.

6. (A). Explain SCR triggering using UJT . (CO1)

or
(B). Explain the Two-transistor model of SCR and draw its VI Characteristics . (CO1)

7.(A). Explain Volt-ampere characteristics of DIAC . (CO1)

Or
(B). Explain the working of photo multiplier and draw and explain its V-I
characteristics. (CO2)
.
8. (A). Explain the working of LCD. (CO2)
or
(B). Explainthe working of seven segment display. (CO2)

***

276
 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION

Course Periods/Week Total no. of Marks Marks

Course title
code periods for FA for SA

ANALYTICAL 5
AEI-406 INSTRUMENTATION 75 20 80

No. of
S. NO Major Topics COs Mapped
Periods
Introduction to analytical 15
instrumentation and
1 CO1
spectrophotometer

Analyzers 15 CO2
2
Mass Spectrometry 12 CO3
3

4 Chromatography 13 CO4

PH& Conductivity 10 CO5

5 Measurement

6 Nuclear Instrumentation 10 CO6

Total 75

277
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
(i) Familiarize with the knowledge of analytical instrumentation and
Course
Spectrophotometer ,analyzers, Mass spectrometry,
Objectives
Chromatography, Nuclear Instrumentation
CO1 AEI-406.1 Familiarize with different analytical instruments.
CO2 AEI-406.2 Explain the principle of operation of different analyzers and flame
photometer, Refractometer Interferometer, polarimeter.
CO3 AEI-406.3 Explain the principles of Mass spectrometer.
Course
outcomes CO4 AEI-406.4 Explain the principles of Chromatography.

CO5 AEI-406.5 Explain the measurement of PH ,Conductivity using PH meter and

Conductivity meter
CO6 AEI-406.6 Explain the detection methods of Nuclear radiation.
1.0 Introduction to analytical instrumentation and Spectrophotometer
Learning 1.1 Draw and explain the block diagram of Analytical instrumentation.
Outcomes 1.2 Define the term spectroscopy.
1.3 Define the terms atomic spectroscopy and molecular spectroscopy.
1.4 Draw and explain Electromagnetic spectrum.
1.5 State the Beer Lamberts law.
1.6 List the components of a monochromator.
1.7 List types of monochromators (Prism and Grating).
1.8 Explain Prism and Grating Monochromators.
1.9 List different types of Visible, UV and IR light sources.
1.10 List different types of Visible, UV and IR light detectors.
1.11 Explain the principle of operation of the following and list their
applications
a. U.V Spectrophoto meter
b. Visible Spectrophotometer
c. IR Spectrophotometer.
2.0 Introduction to Analyzers
2.1 Explain the principle of operation of the following and list their
applications
a) Flame Photometer.
b) Spectrofluorometer.
c) Refractometer.
d) Interferometer.
e) Polari meter.
2.2 Explain principle of operation of the following and list their applications
a. Paramagnetic gas analyzer.
b. Zirconia gas analyzer.
c. Electro chemical gas analyzer.
d. Thermal conductivity type analyzer.
e. Auto analyzer.
3.0 Mass spectrometry
3.1 State the principle of Mass spectrometry.
3.2 List the advantages of mass spectrometer.
3.3 Derive the expression for mass charge ratio (m/e).
3.4 Draw and explain the block diagram of mass spectrometer.

278
3.5 Explain the operation of single deflection 1800 mass spectrometer with
schematic diagram.
3.6 Define the resolution of a mass spectrometer.
3.7 List the applications of mass spectrometer.
4.0 Chromatography
4.1 Define the terms absorption and adsorption.
4.2 Differentiate between the terms absorption and adsorption.
4.3 Define chromatography.
4.4 Classify chromatography.
4.5 List the components of a Gas Chromatography.
4.6 Explain the principle of operation of the Gas Chromatography.
4.7 List the applications of Gas Chromatography.
4.8 List the advantages of the Gas Chromatography
4.9 Explain the principle of operation of the Liquid Chromatography.
4.10 List the applications of Liquid Chromatography.
4.11 List the advantages of Liquid Chromatography
5.0 PH and conductivity measurement
5.1 Define PH.
5.2 Mention the importance of PH
5.3 State the principle of PH measurement.
5.4 Explain the measuring and reference electrodes used for PH
measurement.
5.5 State the effect of temperature on PH
5.6 List the temperature compensating methods in PH measurement.
5.7 Explain the operation of digital PH -meters.
5.8 List the specification of digital type of PH - meters.
5.9 Define conductivity.
5.10 State the necessity of conductivity cells.
5.11 Explain conductivity cells.
5.12 Explain the principle of operation of conductivity meter.
6.0 Nuclear Instrumentation
6.1 List the types of Radiations.
6.2 List the properties of the following :
a) Alpha Particles
b) Beta particles
c) Gamma particles
d) Neutrons
6.3 List the types of radiation detectors.
6.4 Explain the method of Detection of neutrons.
6.5 Explain the working of the following Detection Methods:
a) Geiger Muller method
b) Ionization chamber
c) Scintillation counter.

279
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-406.1 1 1 3 2

AEI-406.2 1 1 1 3 2

AEI-406.3 1 1 1 1 3 1

AEI-406.4 1 1 1 1 3 2
AEI-406.5
1 1 1 2 1
AEI-406.6
1 1 1 1 2

Average 1 1 1 1 2.5 1.6

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to analytical Instrumentation:
Block diagram of Analytical Instrumentation, Electromagnetic spectrum, beer lamberts law,
monochromators and lenses, light sources and detectors - UV, IR, and Visible Spectro
photometers.
2. Analyzers:
Flame Photometer, Spectro flourometer, Refracto meter, Interferometer. Polari meter.
Paramagnetic, Zirconia type, Electro chemical and thermal conductivity gas analyzers, Auto
analyzer.
3. Mass spectrometery:
Principle of operation, advantages and applications of Mass spectrometer.
4. Chromatography:
Absorption and adsorption, Principle of operation, advantages and applications of Gas and
Liquid chromatography.
5. PH and conductivity measurement
PH measurement, Electrodes, Effect of temperature, temperature compensation methods,
Digital type of PH meter, specifications of digital PH meter, Necessity of conductivity cell,
principle of conductivity meter
6. Nuclear Instrumentation:
Types of radiations- Alpha, Beta and Gamma Particles, Neutrons, Radiation detectors- Geiger
Muller counter, Ionization chamber, Scintillation counter.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis by Willard, Merritt, Dean, Settle (CBS Publications &
Distributors Pvt. Ltd.)
2. Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis by Chatwal & Anand (Himalaya Publishing house)
3. Hand Book of Analytical Instrumentation by R.S. Khandpur
4. Industrial Instrumentation by Donald P.Eckman.
5. Industrial Instruments and Control by S.K.Singh.
6. Instrument Engineer Hand Book by Liptack.

280
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Weightag Distribution of Distribution of COs
No. of Weightage Weightage
e of Mapp
S. Major Topics periods
marks ed
No A
R U Ap R U Ap An
n

Introduction to 15
analytical
instrumentation
17 9 8 3 1
1 and CO1
spectrophotomet
er

Analyzers 15 11 3 8 1 1 CO2
2

Mass 12 CO3
11 3 8 1 1
3 Spectrometry

Chromatography 13 6 6 2 CO4
4

PH & Conductivity 10 CO5

11 3 8 1 1
5 Measurement

Nuclear 10
6 14 6 8 2 1 CO6
Instrumentation

Higher order
7 question from 10 10 1
Chapter 3 or 4

Total 75 80 30 40 10 - 10 5 1 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.7

Unit Test-II From 4.1to 6.5

281
 C-20-AEI-406

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- THIRD SEMESTER EXAMINATION
ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.
(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple
sentences.
1. Define the term Spectroscopy. (CO1)

2. List the components of a Monochromator. (CO1)

3. State the Beer Lamberts law. (CO1)

4. List the applications of flame photometer. (CO2)

5. Define the resolution of a mass spectrometer. (CO3)

6. Classify chromatography. (CO4)

7. Give the advantages of Gas chromatography. (CO4)

8. Define PH. (CO5)

9. List the types of Radiations. (CO6)

10. List the proprieties of gamma particles. (CO6)

282
 PART- B
5×8=40
Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.

11. (A).Draw and explain the block diagram of Analytical Instrumentation. (CO1)
or
(B). Explain the operation of U.V Spectrophotometer. (CO1)
12. (A).Explain the operation of flame photometer. (CO2)
OR
(B).Explain the operation of Paramagnetic gas analyser. (CO2)
13. (A).Draw and explain the block diagram of mass spectrometer (CO3)
OR
(B).Explain the operation of single deflection 1800 mass spectrometer (CO3)
14.(A).Explain the operation of digital PH-meters. (CO5)

OR
(B). Explain the principle of operation of conductivity meter. (CO5)

15. (A). Explain the Ionization chamber method of detection of radiation. (CO6)
OR

(B). Explain the Geiger Muller method of detection of radiation. (CO6)

PART- C 1×10=10

Instructions:(1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.

(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer..

16.Why Gas chromatography-mass spectrometry is not suitable technique for detection of

compounds containing sulphur (CO3)

***

283
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION(AEI-406)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1.(a) Beer Lamberts law gives relation between ------- (CO1)

(b) Atomic absorption spectroscopy is also called as absorption flame photometry
(True/False) (CO1)
(c) Chromatography is a physical method that is used to separate and analyse-------(CO4)
(d) Write the expression of m/e ratio of Mass spectrometer. (CO3)
2. List the components of a monochromator. (CO1)3M
3. State the principle of Mass spectrometry. (CO3)3M
4. List the applications of auto analyzer. (CO2) 3M
5. Define the terms atomic spectroscopy (CO1) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M

Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries Eight
marks.

6.(A). Draw and explain the block diagram of Analytic instrumentation. (CO1)
Or
(B). Draw and explain Electromagnetic spectrum. (CO1)

7. (A). Explain the operation of single deflection 1800 mass spectrometer with schematic
diagram. (CO3)
Or
(B). Derive the expression for mass charge ratio (m/e). (CO3)

8. (A). Explain the principle of operation of the Gas Chromatography. (CO4)

Or
(B). Explain the principle of operation of the Liquid Chromatography. (CO4)

***

284
 LINEAR IC APPLICATIONS & E-CAD LAB

Total no
Course No of Marks Marks
Course title of
Code periods/week for FA for SA
periods

AEI-407 Linear IC Applications & e-CAD Lab 03 45 40 60

S.No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

I Operational Amplifier Circuits 21

CO1
II 555 Timers 06
CO2
III PSpice /Proteus simulation or equivalent 18
CO3
Total 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to:

Course
1.Implement OP-AMP circuits, timers and observe waveforms.
Objectives
2. Simulate OP-AMP circuits using simulation software.

AEI- Implement the Circuits using OP-AMP and observe the

CO1 407.1 waveforms.
Course Out AEI-
comes 407.2
CO2 Implement Timer circuits using 555 IC timer.

AEI-
CO3 407.3 Simulate OP-AMP circuits using P-spice or equivalent.

285
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. Operational Amplifier Circuits

1. To Implement and test IC 741 Op-Amp as
a) Inverting amplifier b) Non Inverting amplifier c) Voltage follower (Buffer) and observe the
wave forms.
2. To Implement and test 741 Operation amplifier as summer and Subtractor
3. To Implement and test 741 Operation amplifier as Differentiator, and Integrator and
observe the waveforms.
4. Implement Instrumentation Amplifier using Op-Amp and calculate the gain.
5. Implement Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp and observe the waveforms.

II. 555 Timer

6. Implement Monostable multi vibrator using 555 timers and observe output waveforms.
7. Implement Astable multi vibrator using 555 timers and observe output waveforms.

III. PSpice /Proteus simulation or equivalent

8. Simulate inverting and non-inverting amplifier circuits and observe the waveforms.
9. Simulate summer and Subtractor circuits using op-amp.
10. Simulate Differentiator and Integrator circuits using op-amp and observe the waveforms.
11. Simulate Astable multivibrator using OPAMP in Pspice.

286
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 3 3 1 3 2
407.1

AEI- 1 1 1 3 2
407.2

AEI- 2 2 1 3 2
407.3

Average 2 2 1 3 2

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

COMMUNICATION SKILLS
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks Marks
Code Periods/Week Periods for FA for SA
AEI-408 Communication 3 45 40 60
Skills

No of COs Mapped
S. No. Unit Title Periods

Listening Skills
1 6 CO1

Introducing Oneself
2 3 CO1, CO2, CO3

Short Presentation (JAM)

3 6 CO1, CO2, CO3

Group Discussion
4 6 CO1, CO2, CO3

Preparing Resume with Cover Letter

5 3 CO3

Interview Skills
6 9 CO1, CO2, CO3

Presentation Skills
7 9 CO1, CO2

Work place Etiquette

8 3 CO1, CO2

Total Periods 45

287
 To comprehend the features of communication needed for professional
success and display the use of these competently

Course Objectives To present ideas, opinions in group discussions and presentations on

topics of general and technical interest

To prepare for job selection processes

CO No. Course Outcomes

CO1 Interacts in academic and social situations by comprehending what is listened to when
others speak.
CO2 Demonstrates effective English communication skills while presenting ideas, opinions
in group discussions and presentations on topics of general and technical interest.
CO3 Exhibits workplace etiquette relevant in classroom situations for easy adaptation in
professional setting in the future.

CO-PO Matrix
Course Code Course Title: Communication skills No. of Periods: 45

AEI-408 Number of Course Outcomes: 4

POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks

with CO No. Column 1 Mapping

Number Percentage % (1,2,3)

PO1 Not directly applicable for Communication Skills Course however

interactive activities that use content from science and technology
PO2 relevant to the Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited
PO3 for communication in the Course.

PO4

PO5 CO1, CO2, 11 25% >60%: Level 3

CO3

PO6 CO1, CO2, 27 60% 16 -59%: Level 2

CO3

PO7 CO1, CO2, 7 15%

Up to 15%: Level 1
CO3

Level 3 – Strongly Mapped

Level 2- Moderately Mapped
Level 1- Slightly Mapped

288
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7

CO 1   

CO 2   

CO3   

Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:

Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following parameters of
communication in the rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource (Vocabulary)
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy

*Rubric Descriptors ‘Good/ Competent / Fair /Poor' for Communication

LEVEL OF Fluency and Coherence Lexical Resource Grammatical Range
COMPETENCE (Vocabulary) and Accuracy

Speaks at length without Uses vocabulary Uses a range of complex

noticeable effort or loss of resources flexibly structures with some
coherence. May during discussion. flexibility.
demonstrate language- Uses paraphrase
related hesitation at times, effectively.
or some repetition and/or
GOOD
self-correction.
(9-10*)
Uses a range of connectives Uses some less Mostly produces error-
and discourse markers with common vocabulary free sentences.
some flexibility. Articulates and shows some
and adapts to near awareness of style
naturalization. and collocation

Is willing to speak at length, Has enough Uses a mix of simple and

though may lose coherence vocabulary to discuss complex structures, but
at times due to occasional topics and make with limited flexibility.
repetition, self-correction or meaning clear in spite
COMPETENT hesitation. of inappropriacies.
(6-8) Uses a range of connectives Generally paraphrases May make mistakes with
and discourse markers but successfully complex structures
not always appropriately. though these rarely
cause comprehension
problems.
Tries to maintain a flow of Manages to talk about Produces only basic
speech but t uses repetition, familiar and sentence forms,
FAIR
self correction and/or slow unfamiliar topics but however, errors persist.
(3-5)
speech to keep going. uses vocabulary with
limited flexibility.

289
 Produces simple speech Attempts to use Uses a limited range of
fluently, but more complex paraphrase but with more complex
communication causes mixed success. structures, but these
fluency problems. usually contain errors
and may cause some
comprehension
problems
Speaks with long pauses. Uses simple Attempts basic sentence
Pauses lengthy before most vocabulary to convey forms but with limited
words. Merely imitates personal information success, or relies on
apparently memorized
utterances
POOR Has limited ability to link Has insufficient Makes numerous errors
(0 *-2) simple sentences vocabulary for less except in memorized
familiar topics expressions
Gives only simple responses Only produces Struggles to produce
and is frequently unable to isolated words or basic sentence forms
convey basic message memorized
utterances
s*10 marks to be awarded only if competence level shows flawless expertise in English.
*0 marks to be awarded when student shows incoherence and gives irrelevant responses.

Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.

Periods Marks Marks allotment for each Student Mapping

Questions based
Allocat Wise in the Rubric* of COs
S. on Course
ed for Distributio Poor Fair Competent Good
No. Outcomes
practic n of 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-10
al work Weightage
1 Explain the given CO 2
6 10
object in a minute
CO1, CO 2
Exchange ideas/
views in a group
discussion on
2 6 10
________ issue
(academic, technical
or social )

Present your ideas CO1, CO2,

/opinions on the CO 3
3 given issue/ topic 9 10
(individual to an
audience)
Role play an CO1, CO2,
4 imaginary work- 6 10 CO 3
place situation

290
 Individual CO1, CO2,
interaction with the CO 3
Examiner duly
submitting Resume (
5 12 10
Facing the Interview)
– Introducing
oneself and
answering questions
*Listen to and CO1, CO2,
comprehend any CO 3
6 audio 6 10
communication/
content
TOTAL 45 60

*Listen to and comprehend the given audio content: Giving the Students time to read the questions
(Fill in the Blanks, Select from Alternatives, True or False, Table fill, etc.) in chunks before listening to
audio inputs also played in chunks.

Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for Formative Assessment:
Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following parameters in
the rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy

Periods Marks Marks allotment for each Student Mapping

Questions based
Allocat Wise in the Rubric* of COs
S. on Course
ed for Distributio Poor Fair Competent Good
No. Outcomes
practic n of 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-10
al work Weightage
Formative Assessment - 1
Explain the given 10
1 3
object in a minute CO 2
Exchange ideas/
views in a group CO1, CO 2
2
discussion on
6 10
________ issue
(academic, technical
or social )
Present your ideas
/opinions on the CO1, CO2,
3
given issue/ topic 6 10 CO 3
(individual to an
audience)

291
4 *Listen to and
comprehend any CO1, CO2,
audio 3 10 CO 3
communication/
content
Total 18 40
Formative Assessment -2
Present your ideas
1 /opinions on the
given issue/ topic 10
3
(individual to an
audience)
Role play an CO1, CO2,
2 imaginary work- CO 3
6 10
place situation

Individual
interaction with the
Examiner duly CO1, CO2,
3 submitting Resume ( CO 3
15 10
Facing the Interview)
– Introducing
oneself and
answering questions
*Listen to and
comprehend any CO1, CO2,
4 audio 10 CO 3
3
communication/
content
TOTAL 27 40

LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. Listening Skills:
1.1 Listen to audio content (dialogues, interactions, speeches, short presentations) and
answer questions based on them
1.2 Infer meanings of words / phrases / sentences / after listening to audio content as
mentioned above
2. Introducing Oneself:
2.1 Prepare a grid different aspects for presentation about a person / oneself
2.2 Present a 1 or 2 minute introduction of oneself for an audience
3. Short Presentation:
3.1 Define an object
3.2 Explain an object, phenomenon, event, people
3.3 Speak on a topic randomly chosen
4. Group Discussion:
4.1 Practice Group Discussion. Techniques
4.2 Participate in group discussions

292
 5. Resume Writing and Cover Letter:
5.1 Prepare resumes of different sorts – one’s own and others.
5.2 Write an effective cover letter that goes with a resume
6. Interview Skills:
6.1 Prepare a good Curriculum Vitae
6.2 Exhibit acceptable (Greeting, Thanking, Answering questions with confidence)
7. Presentation Skills:
7.1 Prepare Posters, Charts, PPT’s on issue of general and technical interest
7.2 Present one’s ideas before an audience with confidence using audio visual aids and
answer questions that are raised.
8. Workplace Etiquette:
8.1 Show positive attitude & adaptability / appropriate body language to suit the work
place
8.2 Display basic of etiquette like politeness, good manners.

MICROCONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS LAB

No of periods Total no.

per week Marks for Marks
Course code Course title of
FA for SA
periods

3
AEI-409 Microcontrollersand 45 40 60
Applications Lab

S. NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

Familiarization of Microcontroller kit &Keil
I 06 CO!
software

Programming using Microcontroller Kit/ Keil CO2

II 21
software

Interfacing with 8051 Microcontroller 18 CO3

III

TOTAL 45

293
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
(i) Familiarize with 8051 microcontroller kit and Keil software.
(ii) Write the assembly language Programs of 8051 microcontroller to
Course the specific task.
Objectives
(iii) Interface the Stepper moter, traffic light controller, seven segment
display with 8051 Microcontroller.

CO1 Familiarize with 8051 microcontroller kit/keil software.

AEI-409.1
CO2 Write the assembly language Programs of 8051 microcontroller to
Course AEI-409.2
the specific task.
outcomes
CO3 Interface the Stepper moter, traffic light controller, seven segment
AEI-409.3
display with 8051 Microcontroller.
I. Familiarization of Microcontroller kit &keil software.
1). Familiarize with 8051 microcontroller kit
2). Familiarize with 8051 Simulator –KEIL software or
(simulator software)..
II. Programming using Microcontroller kit/ KEIL software.
Write an ALP to perform the following task using
8051 Microcontroller.
3). 8-bit addition &subtraction.
4). Multibyte addition.
5). Black transfer of data.
6). Sum of given n numbers.
Learning
7). Sum of first n natural numbers.
Outcomes 8). Multiplication of two 8 bit numbers using MUL instruction.
9). To find smallest number from given array of numbers.
10) To sort numbers in ascending order from given array of numbers.
11) Time delay program using counters.
III. Interfacing with 8051 Microcontroller.
12) Interface the push button switch and an LED to a 8051 microcontroller and
write a program to turn ON an LED when push button is pressed and
turn OFF when push button is released.
13) Interface a seven segment display with 8051 microcontroller and
write a program to display a given data.
14) Interface a traffic light controller with 8051 microcontroller and write a
program to control the traffic in a 4-way road in a certain period of
time.
15) Interface a stepper motor with 8051 microcontroller and write a program to
rotate in clockwise / anti-clock wise direction.

294
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 1 3 2
409.1

AEI- 3 3 2
409.2

AEI- 2 3 2
409.3

Average 1 3 2 3 2

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

295
 PROCESS CONTROLLAB
No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks
Course code Course title per week periods for FA for SA

AEI-410 Process control lab 3 45 40 60

S. NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

I P,PI,PID Control Modes 21 CO1

II 6 CO2
Open loop and Closed loop Response

III I/P & P/I Converters 9 CO3

IV Control Valves 9 CO4

TOTAL 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Observe the P,PI,PID control actions of pressure ,flow, level and
temperature processes.

(ii) Obtain open loop and closed loop response of pressure control loops.

Perform an experiment to convert I/P & P/I and to plot the

Course characteristics
(iii)
Objectives
Plot the flow-lift characteristics of Linear, Quick opening and Equal
(iv) percentage control valves

CO1 AEI-410.1 Observe the P,PI,PID control actions of pressure ,flow, level and
temperature processes.
CO2 AEI-410.2 Obtain open loop and closed loop response of pressure control loops.
Course
CO3 AEI-410.3 Perform an experiment to convert I/P & P/I and to plot the
outcomes
characteristics
CO4 AEI-410.4 Plot the flow-lift characteristics of Linear, Quick opening and Equal
percentage control valves

296
 I. P,PI,PID Control Modes
1. Observe the action of the following control modes to pressure process 14
i) Proportional Control
ii) Proportional Integral Control
iii) Proportional Integral & Derivative Control
2. Observe the action of the following control modes to flow process
i) Proportional Control
Learning ii) Proportional Integral Control
Outcomes iii) Proportional Integral & Derivative Control
3. Observe the action of the following control modes to level process
i) Proportional Control
ii) Proportional Integral Control
iii) Proportional Integral & Derivative Control
4. Observe the action of the following control modes to temperature process
i) Proportional Control
ii) Proportional Integral Control
iii) Proportional Integral & Derivative Control
II. Open loop and Closed loop Response
5. Obtain open loop and closed loop response of pressure control loop
III. I/P & P/I Converters
6. Perform an experiment to convert current (4-20mA) to Pressure(3-15 psi) using
I/P converter and plot the characteristics between input current and output
pressure.
7. Perform an experiment to convert Pressure(3-15 psi) to current (4-20mA) using
P/I converter and plot the characteristics between input pressure and output
current.
IV. Control Valves
8. Plot the flow- lift characteristics of the following
i) Linear control valve
ii) Quick opening control valve
iii) Equal percentage control valve

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-410.1 3 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-410.2 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-410.3 1 1 1 3 2 1

AEI-410.4 1 1 1 3 2 1

Average 1.5 1 1 3 2 1
3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

297
 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION LAB
Total no. of
Course code Course title Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods

AEI-411 ANALYTICAL 45 40 60
INSTRUMENTATION LAB

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

Spectro photometers 12
I CO1
Flame Photo Meter 6
II CO2
Dissolved Oxygen Meter 3 CO3
III
Refractometer 6 CO4
IV
Polarimeter 6 CO5
V
Measurement of pH&Conductivity 12 CO6
VI
Total 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

298
 (i) Familiarize with the use of analytical instruments

Course
Objectives (ii)
Measure the valve of pH and conductivity using pH meter and
conductivity meter.
CO1 Analyze the composition of the given sample using Spectro Photo
AEI- Meters
411.1
CO 2 Use flame photometer to determine the presence of metal in a
AEI-
411.2 given sample

CO 3 Use Dissolved oxygen meter to determine the dissolved Oxygen in

Course AEI- given sample
411.3
outcomes
CO 4 Find out the refractive index of the given sample using
AEI- refractometer
411.4
CO 5 Find the concentration of a given sample using Polarimeter
AEI-
411.5
CO 6 Measure the pH value of the given solution using pH meters and
AEI- conductivity using conductivity meter.
411.6

I. SPECTRO PHOTO METERS.

1. Analyze the composition of the given sample using UV Spectro Photo Meter.

2. Analyze the composition of the given sample using IR Spectro Photo Meter.

3. Analyze the composition of the given sample using Visible Spectro Photo Meter.

II. FLAME PHOTO METER

Learning
Outcomes 4. Using Flame Photo Meter, determine the presence of metal in a given sample.

III. DISSOLVED OXYGEN METER

5. Determine the dissolved Oxygen in given sample using Dissolved oxygen meter.

IV. REFRACTOMETER

6. Find out the refractive index of the given sample using refractometer.

V. POLARIMETER

299
 7. Find the concentration of a given sample using Polarimeter

VI. MEASUREMENT OF pH &CONDUCTIVITY

8. Measure the pH value of the given solution using pH meter using

a) Analog pH meter

b) Digital pH meter

9. Measure the conductivity of a given sample using conductivity meter.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-411.1 2 1 3 2

AEI-411.2 1 1 3 2

AEI-411.3 1 1 3 2

AEI-411.4 1 1 3 2

AEI-411.5 1 1 3 2

AEI-411.6 2 2 3 2 1

Average 1.33 1.33 1 3 2 1

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

300
V SEMESTER

301
 DIPLOMA IN APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
CURRICULUM-20

V SEMESTER

Instruction
periods / week Total Scheme of Examination
Subject
Name of the Subject Periods
Code Duration Sessional EndExam Total
Theory Practicals /semester
(hours) Marks Marks Marks

THEORY
AEI-501 IM&ST 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Biomedical
AEI-502 5 75 3 20 80 100
Instrumentation
AEI-503 Control Systems 5 75 3 20 80 100
AEI-504 Industrial Automation 5 75 3 20 80 100
Instrumentation in
AEI-505 4 60 3 20 80 100
Process Industries
Communication
AEI-506 4 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering
PRACTICAL

Biomedical
AEI-507 Instrumentation Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100

AEI-508 Life skills 3 45 3 40 60 100

PLC and SCADA Lab
AEI-509 3 45 3 40 60 100

AEI-510 Field Practices 3 45 3 40 60 100

Project Work
AEI-511 3 45 3 40 60 100

TOTAL 27 15 630 - 320 780 1100

AEI-508 common with all branches.

302
 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & SMART TECHNOLOGIES

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
INDUSTRIAL
MANAGEMENT & SMART
AEI-501 04 60 20 80
TECHNOLOGIES

No. of Periods/
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
week
Introduction to management and
1 12 CO1
organisation structure
Maintenance management & Industrial
2 12 CO2
Safety
3 Personal protective Equipment(PPE) 07 CO3

4 Quality control 07 CO4

5 Smart technologies 12 CO5

6 Entrepreneurship Development 10 CO6
TOTAL 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Familiarize the concepts of management and organisation structure and
importance of Maintenance Management & Industrial Safety
(ii) Usethe need of Personal Protective Equipment and explain the different PPEs.
Course
(iii) Familiarise the importance of quality control in an industry and smart
Objectives
technologies
(iv) Familiarise the role of entrepreneur in economic development and in improving
the quality of life.
CO1 AEI-501.1 Explain the Organisation Structure & organisational behaviour
CO2 AEI-501.2 Explain the importance of Maintenance Management & Industrial
Safety

CO3 AEI-501.3 State the need of Personal Protective Equipment and explain the
Course different PPEs.
outcomes
CO4 AEI-501.4 State the importance of quality control in an industry and explain
the key elements of quality control.

CO5 AEI-501.5 Explain smart technologies.

CO6 AEI-501.6 Explain the role of entrepreneur in economic development and in

improving the quality of life.

303
 1.0 Introduction to management and Organisation Structure
1.1 State the importance of management.
1.2 Explain the functions of management.
1.3 State the principles of management by Henry fayol.
1.4 Explain the principles of scientific management.
1.5 State the need of organisation structure in an industry.
1.6 Explain the line, staff and Functional organizations.
1.7 State the Authority and Responsibility Relationships
1.8 State the differences between Delegation and decentralization
1.9 State the factors of effective organisation.
1.10 Explain the process of effective communication.
1.11 List different leadership models.
1.12 State the need of motivation and list different theories of motivation.
1.13 Explain the process of decision making.
1.14 Explain Human resource requirements.
1.15 Explain Job analysis, Job description and job specifications
1.16 Explain the process of recruitment, selection, training and development
1.17 List types of business ownerships(Sole proprietorship, Partnership, Joint
Stock Companies ,PSU’s , Cooperatives) and differentiate between them.
1.18 State the objectives of Employee participation in management.
1.19 Define social responsibility and corporate social responsibility.

2.0 Maintenance Management & Industrial Safety

2.1 State the importance of maintenance management in Industry.
2.2 List the objectives of maintenance management
2.3 List the types of maintenance in an industry.
2.4 Explain scheduled maintenance
2.5 Explain breakdown maintenance.
2.6 Explain the principles of 5 s for good house keeping
2.7 State the importance of safety at workplace..
2.8 State important provisions related to safety.
2.9 Define the terms hazard and accident.
2.10 List different hazards in the Industry.
2.11 Explain the causes of accidents.
2.12 Explain the direct and indirect cost of accidents.

3.0 Personal Protective Equipment(PPE)

3.1 Define the term PPE.
3.2 State the the need of PPE in an industry.
3.3 List the types of PPE.
3.4 Name the non respiratory protective equipment.
3.5 Explain the following non respiratory protective equipment used in an industry.
(i) Head protection (ii) Face and eye protection
(iii) Hand and arm protection (iv) Foot and leg protection
(v) Body protection (vi) Hearing protection
3.6 State the need of respiratory protective equipment (RPE).
3.7 List the types of RPE.
3.8 Explain the following respiratory protective equipment (RPE).
(i) Gas Masks (ii) Air purifying respirators
(iii) Chemical cartridge respirators (iv) Supplied air respirators
(iv) Self contained breathing apparatus

304
 4.0 Quality Control

4.1 Define the term quality control with respect to an industry.

4.2 State the importance of quality control in an industry.
4.3 List and explain the key elementsof quality control.
4.4. Define the term quality assurance.
4.5 State the difference between quality control and inspection..
4.6 State the use of X-ray fluorescence machine in quality control of cement in cement
industry.
5.0 Smart Technologies
5.1 Define the termInternet of Things (IoT).
5.2 Explain the concept of IoT.
5.3 List the key features ofIoT.
5.4List the components of IoT : hardware, software, technology andprotocols.
5.5 List the advantages and disadvantages ofIoT.
5.6 List the applications of IoT.
5.7 Explain the application of IoT in the context of SmartCities.
5.8 Explain the application of IoT in the context of Smart Energy and the SmartGrid.
5.9 Explain the application of IoT in the context of Smart Transportation andMobility.
5.10 Explain the application of IoT in the context of Smart Home, Smart Buildings and
Infrastructure.
5.11 Explain the application of IoT in the context of Smart Factory and Smart
Manufacturing.
5.12 Explain the application of IoT in the context of SmartHealth.
5.13 Explain the application of IoT in the context of Food and Water Tracking and
Security.
5.14 Explain the application of IoT in the context of Social Networks.
6.0 Entrepreneurship Development.
6.1 Define the word entrepreneur.
6.2 Explain the requirements of an entrepreneur.
6.3 State the role of entrepreneurs in promoting Small Scale Industries.
6.4 Explain the details of self-employment schemes.
6.5 Explain the characteristics of successful entrepreneurs.
6.6 Explain the method of site selection.
6.7 List the financial assistance programmes.
6.8 List out the organisations that help an entrepreneur.
6.9 Explain the use of EDP Programmes.
6.10 State the concept of make in India, Zero defect and zero effect.
6.11 Explain the importance of start-ups.
6.12 State the need for demand surveys.
6.13 State the need for market survey.
6.14 State the necessity of evaluating Economic and Technical factors.
6.15 State the need to prepare feasibility report.

305
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-501.1 1 1 2 1 1

AEI-501.2 1 1 1 2 1 1

AEI-501.3 1 1 2 1 1

AEI-501.4 1 1 2 1 1

AEI-501.5 1 1 1 2 1 1

AEI-501.6 1 1 2 1 1

Average 1 1 1 2 1 1

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENT

1.0 Introduction to management and Organisation Structure

Management,functions, principles,scientific management, Organization structure- Line, Staff
and functional Organizations- Authority and responsibility-Decentralization and Delegation,
Effective Organisation; Communication, ; Leadership Models; motivation theories; Decision
making, Human resource requirements; Forms of Business ownerships: Types – Sole
proprietorship, Partnership, Joint Stock Companies, PSU’s, Cooperatives types of
Organizations; Employee participation in management;social responsibility, Corporate Social
responsibility;

2.0 Maintenance Management & Industrial Safety

Objectives and importance of plant maintenance, Different types of maintenance,
Scheduled and Breakdown maintenance, 5 S principles; Importance of Safety at work
places;Provisions related to safety, Hazard and Accident- Causes of accidents, direct and
indirect costs of accidents.

3.0 Personal protective Equipment(PPE)

Definition, Need and types of PPE, Non respiratory and respiratory protective equipments.

4.0 Quality control

Definition, importance and elements of quality control, use of X-ray fluorescence machine in
quality control of cement in cement industry.

306
5.0 Smart Technologies :
Overview of IoT - Define IoT, how IoT work, key features of IoT, components of IoT :
hardware, software, technology and protocols, advantages and disadvantages of IoT - IoT
Applications - Smart Cities, Smart Energy and the Smart Grid, Smart Transportation and
Mobility, Smart Home, Smart Buildings and Infrastructure, Smart Factory and Smart
Manufacturing, Smart Health, Food and Water Tracking and Security, Social Networks and
IoT.
6.0 Entrepreneurship Development.
Definition of Entrepreneur; Role of Entrepreneur; Concept of Make In India, zero defect,
Zero Effect, Concept of Start-up Company, Entrepreneurial Development: Role of SSI,
Entrepreneurial development schemes; financial assistance programmes; Market survey and
Demand survey; Preparation of Feasibility study reports

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. O.P Khanna - Industrial Engineering and Management
2. AK.Guptha-Industrial safety and environment(For UNIT-3)
3. Converging_Technologies_for_Smart_Environments_and_Integrated_Ecosystems_IERC_Boo
k_Open_Access_2013 pages-54-76

307
 BLUE PRINT

Marks Wise Question Wise

No of Periods

Weightage
distribution of distribution of

Allotted
Sl COs
Unit Title weightage weightage
No mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An

Introduction to
1 management and 9 8 3 1 CO1
12 17
organisation
structure

Maintenance
2 management & 12 14 6 8 2 1 CO2
Industrial Safety
Personal protective
3 07 11 3 8 1 1 CO3
Equipment(PPE)

4 Quality control 07 7 3 4 1 1/2 CO4

5 Smart technologies 12 10 6 4 2 1/2 CO5

6 Entrepreneurship 3 8 1 1 CO6
10 11
Development
Higher order CO2,
question from unit 10 10 1
1 or 5 CO5

Total 60 80 30 40 10 - 10 5 1 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.8

Unit Test-II From 4.1 to 6.15

308
 C-20-AEI-501

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- FIFTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND SMART TECHNOLOGIES

Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. State the factors of effective organization. (CO1)

2. Define corporate social responsibility. (CO1)

3. Write any three differences between proprietorship and partnership. (CO1)

4. State the importance of maintenance management in an industry. (CO2)

5. Define the term Hazard. (CO2)

6. State the need of PPE in an industry. (CO3)

7. State the importance of quality control in an industry. (CO4)

8. List the components of IoT. (CO5)

9. Write any three advantages of IoT. (CO5)

10. List any three financial assistance programmes. (CO6)

309
 PART- B
5×8=40

Instructions: 1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain the functions of management. (CO1)

or
(B). Explain the process of decision making. (CO1)

12. (A). Explain the need for scheduled maintenance. (CO2)

or
(B). Explain the direct and indirect costs of accidents in an industry. (CO2)

13. (A). Explain any two non-respiratory protective equipment. (CO3)

Or
(B). Explain any two respiratory protective equipment. (CO3)

14. (A). i) Explain the elements of quality control. (CO4) 4M

ii) Explain the concept of IoT. (CO5) 4M

Or
(B). i)Explain the application of IoT in the context of smart health. (CO5) 4M

ii) Differentiate between Quality control and Inspection. (CO4) 4M

15. (A). Explain the importance of start-ups. (CO6)

Or
(B). Explain any four self employment schemes. (CO6)

PART- C 1×10=10

Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.

(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. Explain Line and staff organisational structure with line diagram and explain how it is useful.
(CO1)

***

310
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND SMART TECHNOLOGIES (AEI-501)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1 i) Define management.. (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) The father of management is______________ (CO1)

iii) Hearing protection is releted to _________type of PPE in industry. (CO3)

iv) Supplied air resistors are releted to __________ type of PPE in industry. (CO3)

2. List different hazards in industry. (CO2) 3M

3. Define the term PPE. (CO3) 3M

4. List the types of business ownerships. (CO1) 3M

5. Define social responsibility. (CO1) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M

Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries Eight marks.

6. (A). Explain line organization with a legible sketch. (CO1)

Or
(B). Explain the process of job analysis. (CO1)

7. (A). Explain the principles of 5s for good housekeeping. (CO2)

Or
(B). Explain the causes of accidents (CO2)

8. (A). Explain PPE related to heat protection and body protection. (CO3)
Or
(B). Explain PPE related to gas masks and air purifying respirators. (CO3)

***

311
 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION

Course No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks

Course title
code per week periods for FA for SA

BIO MEDICAL
AEI-502 5 75 20 80
INSTRUMENTATION

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Introduction to bio-medical Engg. 10 CO1
Diagnostic Medical Instruments 15 CO2
2
Blood pressure and blood flow 12 CO3
3 Measurements

Therapeutic Instruments 12 CO4

4
Modern Imaging Systems 15 CO5
5
Patient monitoring system and patient
6 11 CO6
safety
TOTAL 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) familiarize with knowledge of bio-medical Engineering, Diagnostics Instruments,
Blood Pressure and blood flow measurements, bio-medication equipment
Course
Objectives

CO1 Explain different electrodes used for ECG, EEG and EMG
AEI-
502.1
CO2 Analyse the ECG, EEG,and EMG Waveforms
AEI-
502.2
CO3 Explain the working of blood pressure and blood flow measurements
AEI-
Course 502.3
outcomes CO4 Explain the working of therapeutic medical instruments.
AEI-
502.4
CO5 AEI- Explain the working of modern image and patient monitoring system
502.5 and safety of patient

CO6 AEI- Explain the patient monitoring system and safety of a patient
502.6

312
 1.0 Introduction to bio-medical Engineering
1.1 Define bioelectric potentials.
1.2 Define resting and action potentials.
1.3 Explain resting and Action potentials with waveform.
Learning 1.4 Explain about Sodium pump and transmission of impulses.
Outcomes 1.5 Define an electrode.
1.6 List the types of electrodes used for bioelectric potentials measurement.
1.7 Explain the different types of electrodes used for ECG, EEG and EMG.
1.8 Explain the electrical activity of heart.
1.9 Explain the bio-electrical potentials associated with muscle activity.
1.10 Explain the electrical activity of Brain.
2.0 Diagnostic medical Instruments.

2.1 List the Diagnostic Medical Equipments.

2.2 Draw and explain the building Blocks of an electro cardio graph (ECG).
2.3 Draw and explain the ECG Lead Configurations (Bipolar & Unipolar).
2.4 Compare bipolar and unipolar leads used for ECG measurement.
2.5 Draw the electrocardiogram. Indicate its amplitude and duration and state their
importance.
2.6 List the applications of ECG.
2.7 Explain the arrangement of electrodes while monitoring EEG.
2.8 Analyse the EEG waveformand explain the principle of EEG machine with block
diagram.
2.9 Classify the EEG frequency bands.
2.10 List the applications of EEG.
2.11 Draw the block diagram set up for EMG recording.
2.12 Mention the frequency and amplitude of EMG.
2.13 List the applications of EMG.

3.0 Blood Pressure and blood flow measurements.

3.1 List the types of direct blood pressure measurements (catheterization,

percutaneous insertion and implantation of transducer in a vessel).
3.2 Explain the above three methods with suitable diagrams.
3.3 List the types of indirect blood pressure measurements.
3.4 Explain indirect blood pressure measurement using sphygmomanometer and
Stethoscope.
3.5 Explain the working of electromagnetic blood flow meter with diagram
3.6 Explain the working of Ultrasonic blood flow meter based on transit time
with diagram.
3.7 Explain the working of Ultrasonic blood flow meter based on Doppler type
with diagram.
3.8 Explain with a block diagram the operation of LASER Doppler Blood flow
meter.

313
 4.0 Therapeutic instruments

4.1
State the need of pacemaker.
4.2
Classify different types of pacemakers.
4.3
Compare the internal pacemakers over external pacemakers.
4.4
List the types of Pacing modes.
4.5Draw the block diagram of a ventricular synchronous demand
pacemaker and explain its operation.
4.6 State the need of defibrillators.
4.7 Draw and explain the circuit diagram of AC defibrillators.
4.8 Draw and explain the circuit diagram of capacitive discharge DC defibrillators.
4.9 Compare AC defibrillators and DC defibrillators.
4.10 Define dialysis.
4.11 State the importance of dialysis.
4.12 List the functions of dialysis machine.
5.0 Modern Imaging Systems.

5.1 X-Ray imaging

1. List the properties of X-Ray.
2. Explain the interaction of X-Ray with matter.
3. Define Compton Effect.
4. Explain the Production of X-Rays with a diagram.
5. State the need for grid.
6. List the applications of X-rays.
7. List the limitations of X-rays.
5.2 Explain the operation of an X-ray machine with block diagram.
5.3 Explain the working of C.A.T Scanner with block diagram.
5.4 List the advantages of C.A.T imaging over X-ray imaging.
5.5 Explain the working of M.R.I with block diagram.
5.6 List the advantages of M.R.I.
5.7 List the applications of M.R.I.
6.0 Patient monitoring system and patient safety.
6.1 Explain patient monitoring in ICU and draw the system of arrangement.
6.2 Explain the effects of electrical current, magnetism and electromagnetic
radiations on human body.
6.3 Define micro and macro shock.
6.4 Differentiate between micro shock and macro shock.
6.5 List the preventive measures to reduce shock hazards.
6.6 List the general and safety requirements of electro medical equipment issued
by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS).

314
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-502.1 1 1 2 2 1

AEI-502.2 1 1 2 2 1

AEI-502.3 1 1 1 2 2 1

AEI-502.4 1 1 1 2 2 1
AEI-502.5
1 1 1 2 2 1
AEI-502.6
1 1 1 3 2 1

Average 1 1 1 2.16 2 1

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENTS

1.0 Introduction to Biomedical Engineering: Bioelectric potentials–Resting and action potential,

sodium pump, transmission of impulses, Electrodes used for Bio potential measurement,
Electrical activity of the heart, Electrical Activity of the muscles- Electrical Activity of the
brain.

2.0 Diagnostic Medical Instruments: Electro cardio graph (ECG) – Block diagram; ECG waveform,
Electro encephalograph (EEG) –Block diagram, EEG wave forms, Electro mayo graph (EMG) –
Block diagram, EMG Wave form .

3.0 Blood Pressure and Blood Flow Measurements: Direct and indirect Blood pressure
measurement, Blood Flow meters - Electromagnetic, Ultrasonic and Laser Doppler Blood flow
meters.

4.0 Therapeutic Instruments: Pacemakers - Need of Cardiac Pacemakers, internal and external
pacemakers, differences between internal and external pacemakers, Ventricular synchronous
demand pacemaker, Defibrillation-need of defibrillator, AC and DC defibrillator, dialysis-
importance and functions of dialysis machine.

5.0 Modern Imaging Systems: X-Rays - Properties, interaction, production of X-rays, Compton
Effect, need for a grid, Applications, Limitations of X-Ray imaging, operation of an X-Ray
machine, C.A.T. Scanner – operation, advantages and applications, M.R.I- operation,
advantages and applications.

315
6.0 Patient Monitoring system and patient safety: Patient monitoring in ICU, Physiological
effects of electricity, Electromagnetic radiation and magnetism on human body. Shocks-
micro and macro shocks, Preventive measures of shock. Safety requirement by BIS.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. R.S.Kandpur -Hand Book of Biomedical Instrumentation , Tata Mcgraw Hill.

2. Leslie Cromwell & Fred .J. Weibell and Erich A.Preiffer -Biomedical Instrumentation and
Measurements , PHI.

3. Dr. Arumugham -Biomedical Instruments

4. L.A.Taddes & Baker- Principles of Applied Bio medical Instrumentation

5. John.G.Webster- Medical Instrumentation

6. Levine - Advanced Biomedical Engineering

7. LELE- Computer the Machine, Tata McGraw Hill Co.,

8. Joseph Carr & Joseph Brown- Introduction to Biomedical equipment Technology

316
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Weightag Distribution of Distribution of COs
No. of Weightage Weightage
S. e of Mapp
Major Topics periods
No marks ed
A
R U Ap R U Ap An
n

Introduction to 10
14 6 8 2 1
1 bio-medical Engg. CO1

Diagnostic 15 CO2
Medical 14 6 8 2 1
2
Instruments

Blood pressure 12 CO3

and blood flow 11 3 8 1 1
3
Measurements

Therapeutic 12 CO4
11 3 8 1 1
4 Instruments

Modern Imaging 15 CO5

14 6 8 2 1
5 Systems

Patient
monitoring
6 6 6 - 2 -
system and 11 CO6
patient safety

Higher order 10
question from 1
CO2
chapters 2

Total 75 80 30 40 - - 10 5 1 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.8

Unit Test-II From 4.1to 6.6

317
 C-20-AEI-502

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- FIFTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION

Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. Define bioelectric potential (CO1)

2. Define an electrode. (CO1)

3. List different diagnostic Medical Equipment. (CO2)

4. Classify the EEG frequency bands. (CO2)

5. Mention the types of direct Blood pressure measurement. (CO3)

6. Classify the types of Pacemakers. (CO4)

7. List the advantages of C.A.T imaging over X-ray imaging. (CO5)

8. Define Compton effect. (CO5)

9. Define Micro shock and Macro shock. (CO6)

10. List the preventives measures to reduce shock hazards. (CO6)

318
 PART- B
5×8=40

Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain sodium pump and transmission of impulses. (CO1)

Or

(B). Explain electrical activity of brain (CO2)

12. (A). Draw and explain the building blocks of an electro Cardiogram. (CO3)

Or

(B). Draw the block diagram set up for EMG recording (CO3)

13.(A).Explain the working of LASER Doppler Blood flow meter with Diagram. (CO4)

Or

(B). Explain the working of Ultrasonic transmittype Blood flow meter with Diagram. (CO4)

14. (A). Draw and explain the circuit diagram of capacitive discharge DC Defibrillators. (CO5)
or

(B). Draw and explain the block diagram a ventricular synchronous demand pacemaker. (CO5)

15. (A). Explain the working of MRI with block diagram. (CO6)

or

(B). Explain the operation of an X-ray machine with block diagram. (CO6)

PART- C
1×10=10

Instructions: 1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.

2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. Analyse the EEG waveformand explain the principle of EEG machine with block diagram. (CO2)

***

DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST

319
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION- (AEI-502)

Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) Study of electrical activity of brain is called ------ 4X1M=4M

ii) Sphygnomanometer is used to measure the activity of heart . (True/False)

iii) Source of bioelectric potential is ionic in nature. (True/False)

iv) ----is an electrode for measuring EMG.

2. Define resting potential. 3M

3. List the applications of ECG. 3M

4.List the types of indirect blood pressure measurements. 3M

5. Classify the EEG frequency bands. 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M

Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries Eight marks.

6. (A). Explain the bio-electrical potentials associated with muscle activity.

Or
(B). Explain the different types of electrodes used for ECG .
7. (A). Explain the working principle of an EEG machine with Block diagram.
Or
(B). Draw and explain the ECG Lead Configurations (Bipolar & Unipolar).
8. (A). Explain the working of electromagnetic blood flow meter with diagram.
or

(B). Explain the working of Ultrasonic blood flow meter based on Doppler type with
diagram.

***
CONTROL SYSTEMS

320
 Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
AEI-503 Control Systems 05 75 20 80

S.No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 CO1
Introduction to Control system 10
2 CO2
Transfer functions 17

3 Block Diagram algebra & Signal flow 10 CO3

graphs

4 CO4
Time Domain Analysis 18

5 CO5
Frequency Domain Analysis 20

TOTAL
75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Explainthe importance of Control System Engineering in industry

2.Evaluate the transfer Functions of system using

Course Objectives block diagram algebra and signal flow graphs

3.Analyze the system in Time & Frequency Domains and to evaluate its
stability

321
 CO1 Explain the use of Control System Engineering in day
AEI-
503.1 to day life and industry

CO2 AEI- Obtain the transfer Functions for different circuits

503.2

AEI- Evaluate the system transfer function using block

CO3
503.3 diagram algebra and signal flow graphs
Course
Outcomes Time Domain analysis to predict and diagnose transient
CO4 AEI- performance of the system for standard input
503.4 functions.
AEI- Formulate different types of analysis in frequency
503.5 domain to explain the nature of stability of the system.
CO5

LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Introduction to Control System

1.1 Define system and control system.
1.2 State the importance of control engineering in day to day life and industry.
1.3 Define open loop and closed loop control systems.
1.4 Explain open loop and closed loop control systems with examples of water level controller
and Temperature controller.
1.5 Distinguish between open loop and closed loop control system.
1.6 Explain the following systems with example
a. Linear and Non-linear control system.
b. Time variant and time invariant system.
c. Continuous data and discrete data system.
d. Digital control systems

2.0 Transfer Functions

2.1 Define Transfer Function.

2.2 List the properties and limitations of transfer functions of system.
2.3 Define Laplace Transform of the function.

2.4 Obtain the Laplace transforms of

322
 (i) unit step (ii) unit ramp (iii) unit impulse (iv)eat
(v) teat (vi)sin at (vii)cos at (viii)eat sin at (ix) tn
2.5 State and prove initial value theorem and final value theorem.
2.6 Define inverse Laplace transform.
2.7 Obtain the inverse Laplace transforms of following functions.
i) F(s) = 1/s, ii) F(s) = 1/(s+a), iii) F(s) = a/s(s+a), iv) F(s) = ω/(s2+ ω2),
v) F(s) = s/(s2+ ω2), vi) F(s) = ω/((s+a)2+ ω2),
2.8 Derive the transfer functions of RLC series and RLC parallel circuits.

3.0 Block diagram algebra and signal flow graphs

3.1. Define block diagram of the system.

3.2 List the basic components of the block diagram.

3.3 Mention the Rules for Block diagram reduction.

3.4 Solve simple Problems on block diagram reduction.

3.5 Define the signal flow graph ofthe system.

3.6 State the Mason’s Gain formula.

3.7 Explain Mason’s Gain formula with an example.

3.8 Solve problems to determine the transfer function using Mason’s Gain formula.

4.0 Time Domain Analysis

4.1 Define the term time response of a system.

4.2 List the test signals in control system.
4.3 Obtain the time response of first order system for a unit step and unit impulse input.
4.4 Obtain the time response of second order system for a unit step input.
4.5 List the time domain specifications of second order system and define them.
4.6 Define Type and Order of a control system.
4.7 Define type 0, Type 1 and Type 2 control systems.
4.8 Obtain static error coefficients KP, KV, KA.
4.9 Obtain steady state error for Type 0, Type 1 and Type 2 systems
4.10 Simple problems on the above systems.

5.0 Frequency Domain Analysis

323
5.1 Define absolute and relative stability.
5.2 Define frequency response of a system.
5.3 List the frequency response plots.
5.4 State and explain Routh Hurwitz criterion for stability of a system.
5.5 Find the stability of a system using Routh Hurwitz criterion (simple problems).
5.6 Define Bode plot.
5.7 Explain the procedure for magnitude plot of Bode plot.
5.8 Explain the procedure for phase plot of Bode plot.
5.9 Define Gain margin and Phase margin.
5.10 Obtain bode plots for the following transfer functions:
i. G(s) = K ii) G(s) = K/s iii) G(s) = K/(1+sT)

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-503.1 1 1 2 2 1

AEI-503.2 1 1 2 2 1

AEI-503.3 1 1 1 2 2 1

AEI-503.4 1 1 1 2 2 1
AEI-503.5
1 1 1 2 2 1

Average 1 1 1 2 2 1

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENTS

1. Basic Concepts of Control Systems: Definition of system and Control, controlled variable,
manipulated variable, controller, Different types of control systems.
2. Transfer functions: Definition of transfer function and its properties. Definition of Laplace
transform, Laplace transforms of standard time functions, Inverse Laplace transforms–
problems on Inverse Laplace transforms - the transfer functions of RLC series and RLC
parallel circuits.

324
 3. Block diagram algebra and signal flow graph:
Block diagram reduction – rules for block diagram reduction, Signal flow graph and Mason’s
Gain formula.

4. Time Domain analysis: Transient response of first ordersystem for step input, Impulse input-
step response of II order system andspecifications .Type and order of a system – Type 0,
Type 1 and Type 2 control systems– error coefficients .
5. Frequency Domain analysis:
Relative and absolute stability -Routh Hurwitz criterion, bode plot.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Katsuhiko Ogata ,2002, Modern Control Engineering, Vol.4 London.

2 B.S.Manke, 2005, Linear Control Systems, Khanna Publishers

3. Nagrath, I. J., and Madan Gopal,2008, Control systems, New Age International

4. Nagoor&Khani, 2016, Control system Engineering, RBA Publication -

BLUE PRINT

Sl Chapter/ No of Weightag Marks Wise Question Wise COs

325
No Unit Title Period e Allotted distribution of distribution of mapped
s weightage weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Introductio
n to
1 10 14 6 8 2 1 CO1
Control
system
Transfer
2 17 14 6 8 2 1 CO2
functions
Block
Diagram
algebra & 10
3 14 6 8 2 1 CO3
Signal flow
graphs

Time
Domain 18
4 14 6 8 2 1 CO4
Analysis

Frequency
Domain 20
5 14 6 8 2 1 CO5
Analysis

Higher
order
question
CO2,
from
10 10 1 CO4,
chapters 2 CO5
or 3 or 4 or
5

Total 75 80 30 40 - 10 10 5 - 1 -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.4

Unit Test-II From 3.5to 5.10

C-20-AEI-503

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

326
 DAEIE- FIFTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
CONTROL SYSTEMS
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. State the importance of control engineering in day to day life and industry in any three
aspects. (CO1)
2. Distinguish between open loop and closed loop control system in any three aspects.(CO1)
3. Define Transfer Function. (CO2)

4. State initial value theorem and final value theorem. (CO2)

5. State the Mason’s Gain formula. (CO3)

6. Define block diagram of a system. (CO3)

7. List any three test signals in control system. (CO4)

8. Define Type and order of a control system. (CO4)

9. List three frequency response plots. (CO5)

10. Define Gain margin. (CO5)

PART- B
5×8=40

327
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
notthe length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain open loop and closed loop control systems with example of water level
controller. (CO1)
or
(B). Explain Time variant and time invariant system with an example. (CO1)
12. (A). Obtain the Laplace transforms of (i) eat sin at (ii) tn (CO2)
or
(B). Derive the transfer function of RLC series circuit. (CO2)
13. (A). Mention any four rules for block diagram reduction. (CO3)
Or
(B). Find the transfer function for given signal flow graph (CO3)

14. (A). Obtain the time response of second order system for a unit step input. (CO4)
Or
(B). Obtain the time response of first order system for a unit impulse input. (CO4)
15. (A). State and explain Routh Hurwitz criterion for stability of a system . (CO5)
Or
(B). Explain the procedure for magnitude plot of Bode plot. (CO5)

PART- C

1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. Sketch the Bode plot for the following transfer function G(s) = K/(1+sT). (CO5)

***

DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST

MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
CONTROL SYSTEMS (AEI-503)

328
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks.
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) Define system. (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii)Transfer function of a system is defined as the ratio of output to input is ---(CO2)
iii)Which system is also known as automatic control system. (CO1)
iv)In an open loop system , neither output nor any other variable has an effect on
input.(T/F) (CO1)
2. Define open loop and closed loop control systems (CO1) 3M
3. Obtain the Laplace transform of unit ramp input. (CO2) 3M
4. Define inverse Laplace transform. (CO2) 3M
5. List three basic components of a block diagram (CO3) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M

Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question and each question carries Eight marks

6. (A). Explain open loop and closed loop control systems with example of temperature
controller. (CO1)
or
(B). Explain Time variant and time invariant system with an example. (CO1)

7. (A). Obtain the inverse Laplace transform of F(s) = ω/(s2+ ω2). (CO2)
Or
(B). Derive the transfer function of RLC parallel circuit. (CO2)

8. (A). Mention any four rules for block diagram reduction. (CO3)
or
(B). State and prove initial value theorem. (CO2)

***

INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

329
 No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks
Course code Course title
per week periods for FA for SA

Industrial 5
AEI-504 75 20 80
Automation

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Introduction to PLC 15 CO1
20 CO2
2 PLC Programming
SCADA 15 CO3
3
Computer Control 15 CO4
4
Embedded systems 10 CO5
5

TOTAL 75

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

Course (i) Usethe knowledge of PLC, programming of PLC , SCADA, computer control and
Objectives Embedded systems.
CO1 Explain the block diagram of PLC and list the different types of
AEI-504.1 PLCs.
CO2 Draw and explain the ladder diagrams for different logic functions
AEI-504.2
and different applications.

CO3 Familiarize with SCADA.

Course AEI-504.3
outcomes CO4 Explain the block diagrams of data logger,DAS, DDC, DCS, ROBOT
AEI-504.4
and CNC machine.

CO5 AEI-504.5 Explain the software and hardware architectures of embedded

systems.

1.0 Introduction to PLC

1.1 Define automation.
1.2 State the importance of automation.
Learning 1.3 Explain Relay based Control panel.
Outcomes 1.4 Define Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and list the advantages of PLCs.
1.5 Compare Relay based and PLC based Control panel.
1.6 Explain the Block diagram of PLC.
1.7 List different types of PLCs based on I/O‘s ,memory and configuration

330
1.8 Explain Interfacing of PLC with PC.
1.9 List the manufacturers of PLC.
1.10 List the applications of PLC.
2.0 PLC Programming
2.1 List different types of PLC programming techniques.
2.2 Define Ladder diagram.
2.3 List the rules to follow in drawing Ladder diagram.
2.4 List and explain PLC Instruction set.
2.5 Draw ladder diagrams for AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, EXOR and EXNOR gates.
2.6 Explain Timers-T ON, T OFF and Retentive timer with ladder diagram.
2.7 Explain Counter instructions -CTU, CTD.
2.8 Explain ladder diagrams on arithmetic and comparison instructions.
2.9 Draw and explain the ladder diagrams for following applications:
I. DOL starter and STAR-DELTA starter
II. Sequential control of induction motors
III. Traffic light controller
IV. Level control controller
V. Conveyer belt controller.
3.0 SCADA
3.1 Define SCADA
3.2 Explain the hardware architecture of SCADA.
3.3 List the three main components of a SCADA.
3.4 Explain Remote Terminal Unit of SCADA.
3.5 Explain Master Station of SCADA.
3.6 Explain communication infrastructure of SCADA.
3.7 Explain the creation of graphic symbols using Graphic Display builder.
3.8 Explain Interfacing of SCADA with PLC.
3.9 List the applications of SCADA.
4.0 Computer Control
4.1 State the role of Computers in Process control.
4.2 Explain the block diagram of Data Logger.
4.3 List the applications of Data Logger.
4.4 Explain the block diagram of Data acquisition system.
4.5 Explain the block diagram of Direct Digital Control System (DDC).
4.6 Define a Robot.
4.7 Explain the operation of simple robot with block diagram.
4.8 List the applications of a Robot.
4.9 Explain CNC Machine with block diagram.
4.10 List the applications of CNC Machine.
5.0 Embedded Systems
5.1 Define the term Embedded system.
5.2 List the applications of embedded system.
5.3 List the components of Embedded system.
5.4 Explain the hardware architecture of Embedded system.
5.5 Explain the software architecture of Embedded system.
5.6 List the commonly used processors in embedded systems.
5.7 State the need for communication interfaces.
5.8 List the communication interfaces.
5.9 Explain serial communication using USB.
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

331
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-504.1 1 1 1 1 3 2

AEI-504.2 2 2 2 2 3 2

AEI-504.3 1 1 1 1 2 2

AEI-504.4 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
AEI-504.5
1 1 1 1 2 2 1

Average 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.3 1.7 1

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Introduction to PLC
Importance of automation- relay based and PLC based control panel- PLC Definition- Block
diagram of PLC- different types of PLCs- different types of PLC manufacturers-Interfacing of
PLC with PC.
2.0 PLC Programming
Types of PLC programming- rules for programming -Instruction set- Ladder diagrams for logic
functions- Ladder program for DOL starter, Star-Delta Starter, Traffic light control, level
control, conveyor controller.
3.0 SCADA
SCADA definition, Architecture and explanation, remote terminal unit, master station,
communication infrastructure of SCADA, Graphical symbols used in SCADA, Interfacing of
SCADA with PLC, applications of SCADA.
4.0 Computer Control
Role of computers in process control, Data Logger, Data Acquisition, Direct Digital Control
System,DCS, Robot and its Applications, CNC Machine.
5.0 Embedded Systems:
Definition of Embedded system, applications, software and hardware architectures, serial
Communication using USB.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Industrial control engineering by Jacob
2. Industrial automation and process control by Jon Sterenson
3. Programmable Logic controllers by John W.Webb
4. Introduction to PLC by Gary Dunning- Delmar Cengage learning.
5. Embedded Real Time Systems-Dr KVKK Prasad.
6. Computer based industrial control- Krishna Kanth.

BLUE PRINT

332
 Marks wise Question wise
Distribution of Distribution of
COs
No. of Weightage Weightage Weightage
Mapp
S. Major Topics periods of marks
ed
No A
R U Ap R U Ap An
n

Introduction to 14 6 8 2 1
1 15 CO1
PLC
14 6 8 2 1 CO2
2 PLC Programming 20

SCADA 14 6 8 2 1 CO3
3 15

Computer Control 14 6 8 2 1 CO4

4 15

Embedded CO5
14 6 8 2 1
5 systems 10

Higher order
question from 10 10 1 CO2
--
chapter 2

Total 75 80 30 32 18 - 10 4 2 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.4

Unit Test-II From 3.5 to 5.9

C-20-AEI-504

333
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)
DAEIE- FIFTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Industrial Automation
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A 3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. Define automation . (CO1)

2. List different types of PLCs based on I/O‘s . (CO1)

3. List different types of PLC programming techniques . (CO2)

4. Mention the rules to follow in drawing Ladder diagram . (CO2)

5. Define SCADA . (CO3)

6. List the three main components of a SCADA. (CO3)

7. List the applications of Data Logger. (CO4)

8. Define a Robot (CO5)

9. List the commonly used processors in Embedded system. (CO6)

10. List the communication interfaces. (CO6)

334
 PART- B
5×8=40

Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain the Block diagram of PLC . (CO1)

or
(B). Explain Relay based Control panel. (CO1)

12. (A). Explain PLC Instruction set . (CO2)

Or
(B). Draw the ladder diagrams & truth tables for AND, OR gates . (CO2)

13. (A). Explain Interfacing of SCADA with PLC. (CO3)

Or
(B). Explain Master Station of SCADA. (CO3)

14. (A). Explain the block diagram of Direct Digital Control System (DDC). (CO4)

Or
(B). Explain the block diagram of Data acquisition system. (CO4)

15. (A). Explain the software architecture of Embedded system. (CO6)

Or
(B). Explain serial communication using USB. (CO6)

PART- C

1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. Draw and explain the ladder diagram of Conveyer belt controller. (CO2)

***

DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST

MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)

335
 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION(AEI-504)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks.
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i)PLC stands for ------ (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii) SCADA stands for--------- (CO3)
iii) The part that monitors the input and make decision in a PLC is the CPU. (True/False)
(CO1)
iv) In a PLC I is used for out and O is used for input . (True/False) (CO2)
2. List the manufacturers of PLC. (CO1) 3M
3. Define ladder diagram. (CO2) 3M
4. Draw the ladder diagram of OR gate. (CO2) 3M
5. List the components of SCADA. (CO3) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) and each question carries Eight marks.

6.(A). Explain the Block diagram of PLC . (CO1)

Or
(B). Explain Interfacing of PLC with PC . (CO1)

7. (A).Draw the ladder diagram of traffic light controller and explain. (CO2)
Or
(B). Drawthe ladder diagram of level controller and explain. (CO2)

8. (A). Explain Relay based Control panel. (CO1)

Or
(B).Draw ladder diagram for Sequential control of induction motor and explain. (CO2)

***

DAEIE-SECOND UNIT TEST

MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)

336
 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION(AEI-504)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks.
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

2. i)DDC stands for ------ (CO4) 4X1M=4M

ii) SCADA stands for--------- (CO3)
iii) SCADA symbols are placed in ------------tab (CO3)
iv) CNC machine is used for ------------ (CO4)
2. Draw the diagram of Master station. (CO) 3M
3. Draw the diagram of DDC. (CO) 3M
4. List the components of Embedded system.(CO5) 3M

5. List the communication interfaces..(CO5) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) and each question carryeight marks.

6. (A) Explain Master Station of SCADA. (CO3)

(oR)
(B) Explain Interfacing of SCADA with PLC. (CO3)

7.(a) Explain the block diagram of Data acquisition system (CO4)

(or)

(b) Explain CNC Machine with block diagram (CO4)

8. (a)Explain the software architecture of Embedded system (CO5)

(or)

(b)Explain the hardware architecture of Embedded system (CO5)

INSTRUMENTATION IN PROCESS INDUSTRIES

337
 Course No.of hours per Total no. of Marks Marks
Course title week
code periods for FA for SA

Instrumentation in
AEI-505 4 60 20 80
Process Industries

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Methods of power generation in Power Plant 07 CO1
17 CO2
2 Instrumentation and control in power Plant
Petro Chemical Plant Instrumentation 12 CO3
3
Iron and Steel Plant Instrumentation 12 CO4
4
Pulp and Paper Plant Instrumentation 12 CO5
5

TOTAL 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Familiarize with the knowledge of methods of power generation in different
power plants like thermal, Hydroelectric, Wind, Solar ,Nuclear Power Plants.
Course
Objectives Familiarize with the knowledge of instrumentation control in Petrochemical
(ii) plant, Iron and steel Plant, Pulp and paper plant.

Explain the process of power generation in thermal, Hydroelectric,

CO1 AEI-505.1 Wind, Solar ,Nuclear Power Plants.
CO2 AEI-505.2 Explain the Instrumentation and control in power plant .
Course
outcomes CO3 AEI-505.3 Explain the Instrumentation and control in petro chemical plant .

CO4 AEI-505.4 Explain the Instrumentation and control in Iron and steel Plant.

CO5 AEI-505.5 Explain the Instrumentation and control in Pulp and paper plant.

1.0. Methods of power generation in Power Plant

Learning
Outcomes 1.1 List various power generation methods.
1.2 Give the principle of power generation in thermal power plant.
1.3 Draw the general layout of thermal power plant
1.4 Explain the above layout of thermal power plant.
1.5 Explain the process of power generation with the help of diagrams of following

338
 a) Hydroelectric power plant
b) Wind power plant
c) Solar power plant
d) Nuclear power plant
2.0 Instrumentation and Control in Power Plant
2.1 State the Importance of measurement and instrumentation in
power plant.
2.2 Draw the block diagram of boiler process in thermal power plant
and explain each block.
2.3 Draw and explain a typical combustion system of a boiler.
2.4 List the important variables that need to be measured in thermal
power plant.
2.5 List the measuring locations/points and types of sensors
instruments in a thermal power plants of the following parameters
a) Pressure
b) Temperature
c) Flow
d) Level
e) Vibration
2.6 Explain a method of measurement of flow of feed water with a
differential pressure transducer diagram.
2.7 Explain single element drum level control of boiler with a diagram.
2.8 Explain steam temperature control single-stage diagram.
2.9 Explain steam/header pressure control with a feed forward-plus-
Feedback control diagram.
2.10 Explain series fuel – air ratio control.
2.11 Explain furnace draft control
2.12 Explain the measurement of turbine shaft speed with a toothed-
wheel diagram
2.13 Mention the turbine trip conditions.
2.14 Explain eccentricity measurement of turbine with a diagram.
3.0 Petro Chemical plant Instrumentation.
3.1 Define petroleum refinery.
3.2 Draw the general layout of a Petro chemical plant.
3.3 Explain the above layout of petro chemical plant.
3.4 List basic steps in refinery process (separation, conversion &
treatment).
3.5 Define the following unit operations
a) Thermal cracking
b) Catalytic cracking
c) Polymerization
d) Alkalization
e) Isomerization
3.6 List the bi products of crude oil.
3.7 Define the term distillation column.

339
 3.8 Define batch distillation and continuous distillation columns.
3.9 Explain the working of batch distillation column with a diagram.
3.10 Explain the working of continuous distillation column with a diagram.
3.11 List various physical parameters to be measured in distillation
column.
4.0 Iron and Steel Plant Instrumentation (ISP)
4.1 Draw flow scheme of pig iron production and explain.
4.2 Draw flow scheme of steel production and explain.
4.3 List raw materials in ISP
4.4 List different types of furnaces used in ISP
4.5 Explain the working of blast furnace with a diagram
4.6 Explain the working of oxygen furnace with a diagram
4.7 Explain the working of electric furnace with a diagram
4.8 Explain the measurement of level of molten metal .
4.9 Explain the measurement of temperature of furnace.

5.0 Pulp and Paper Plant Instrumentation (PPPI)

5.1 Define the term pulp.
5.2 List the types of pulping processes (Mechanical and Chemical
processes).
5.3 Draw the block diagram of mechanical pulping process and explain.
5.4 Draw the block diagram of chemical pulping process and explain.
5.5 Define the term paper.
5.6 Draw the general layout of paper making process.
5.7 Explain the basic process of making the paper based on the layout.
5.8 List the raw materials for making paper.
5.9 List the various types of paper products.
5.10 List the physical properties of paper.
5.11 List types of control system units used in pulp and paper industry.
5.12 Explain the controlling of paper thickness with a diagram.
5.13 Explain the graphic displays and alarms in PPP.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

340
 CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI-505.1 1 1 3 2

AEI-505.2 2 2 3 2

AEI-505.3 2 2 3 2

AEI-505.4 2 2 3 2

AEI-505.5 2 2 3 2

Average 1.8 1.8 3 2

3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENT:

1.0 Methods of power generation in Power Plant: - Thermal power plant layout-Hydroelectric
power plant- Wind power plant-Solar power plant-Nuclear powerplant.
2.0 Instrumentation and Control in Power Plant: Block diagram of boiler process inthermal
power plant- combustion system of a boiler- measurement of flow offeed water - single
element drum level control of boiler- steam temperature and pressure control- series fuel –
air ratio control- furnace draft control measurementof turbine shaft speed- eccentricity
measurement of turbine.
3.0 Petro-chemical Plant Instrumentation: Plant layout- Crude oil-Distillationcolumn, Batch and
continuous distillations.
4.0 Iron and Steel Plant Instrumentation:-Manufacturing process of Iron andsteel- Furnace
types- blast, oxygen and electric furnaces- Measurement ofmolten metal level and
temperature of furnace.
5.0 Pulp and Paper Plant Instrumentation: - Mechanical and Chemical pulpingprocesses -Paper
production-Physical properties of paper-Types of paperproducts- controlling of paper
thickness - Control system units

Reference Books:
1. A course in power plant engineering – Arora and Domkundwar
2. Power plant Instrumentation – K.Krishnaswamy and ponnibala
3. Principles of Indusrial Instrumentation – D. Patranabis,TMGH.
4. Instrumentation in Process Industries -- Bela G.Liptak
5. Hand book of applied Instrumentation -- D.M. Consodine
6. Chemical Process Industries -- Austine G.T. Shreeves
7. Power Plant performance -- Gill A.B.
8. Power Station Instrumentation -- Jervis M.J.
BLUE PRINT

341
 Marks wise Question wise
Weight
S. No. of Distribution of Distribution of COs
Major Topics age of
No periods Weightage Weightage Mapped
marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Methods of power 10 11 3 8 1 1 CO1
generation in Power
Plant

2 Instrumentation 16 14 6 8 2 1 CO2
and control in
power Plant

3 Petro Chemical 11 17 9 8 3 1 CO3

Plant
Instrumentation

4 Iron and Steel Plant 12 11 3 8 1 1 CO4

Instrumentation

5 Pulp and Paper 11 17 9 8 3 1 CO5

Plant
Instrumentation

Higher order 10 10 CO1 to CO5

question from ANY
OF THE Chapters 1
From 1 TO 5

Total 60 80 30 40 10 - 10 5 -
1 -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.4

Unit Test-II From 3.5 to 5.13

C-20-AEI-505

342
 BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)
DAEIE- FIFTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
Instrumentation in Process Industries

Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) Each question carries three marks
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. Write the principle of power generation in hydroelectric power plant. (CO1)

2. Draw the diagram of single element drum level control of boiler. (CO2)

3. Write any three important variables that need to be measured in thermal power

plant. (CO2)

4. List any three physical parameters to be measured in distillation column. (CO3)

5. Define the term distillation column. (CO3)

6. List the basic steps in refinery process. (CO3)

7. Write any three types of furnaces used in ISP. (CO4)

8. List any three physical properties of paper. (CO5)

9. List any three types of paper products. (CO5)

10. Define the term Pulp. (CO5)

PART- B5×8=40

343
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight
marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain the general layout of thermal power plant with diagram. (CO1)
Or
(B). Explain the general layout of wind power plant with diagram. (CO1)
12. (A). Explain the block diagram of boiler process in thermal power plant with diagram.
(CO2)
Or
(B). Explain furnace draft control with diagram. (CO2)

13. (A). Explain the working of batch distillation column with diagram (CO3)
or
(B). Explain the general layout of a Petro chemical plant with diagram. (CO3)
14. (A). Explain the measurement of molten metal level with diagram. (CO4)
Or
(B). Explain the working of blast furnace with diagram. (CO4)
15. (A). Explain chemical pulping process with block diagram. (CO5)
Or
(B). Explain the controlling of paper thickness with a diagram. (CO5)

PART- C
1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16.Draw and explain the general layout of paper making process. (CO5)

***

DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST

MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)

344
 Instrumentation in Process Industries (AEI-505)

Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) The emergency shutdown of a power generation turbine due to unexpected events is called-
------- (CO2)4X1M=4M ii) In
steam boiler, --------------- can be known as attemperator as it can reduce
and control temperature of superheated steam. (CO2)
iii) Solar power plant converts solar energy into electrical energy.(True/False) (CO1)
iv) A ---------is used in nuclear reactor to slow down the speed of neutrons in nuclear
fission. (CO1)
2. State the importance of measurement and instrumentation in power plant. (CO1)3M
3. Define petroleum Refinery. (CO3) 3M
4. List the basic steps in refinery process. (CO3)3M
5. Write the principle of power generation in thermal power plant. (CO2)3M

PART- B3×8M=24M

Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question andeach question carries Eight marks.

6. (A). Explain the process of power generation in Hydroelectric power plant with diagram (CO1)
Or

(B). Draw the block diagram of boiler process in thermal power plant and explain each block.
(CO2)
7. (A). Explain single element drum level control of boiler with a diagram. (CO2)
Or
(B). Explain the general layout of petro chemical plant. (CO3)

8. (A). Explain furnace draft control. (CO2)

or
(B). Explain the process of power generation in Wind power plant with diagram (CO1)

***

COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

345
 No of periods
Course Total no. of Marks Marks
Course title per week
code periods for FA for SA

Communication 4
AEI-506 60 20 80
Engineering

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Analog communication 16 CO1

AM and FM detectors, CO2
2 13
Receivers
3 Pulse modulation 16 CO3,C04

4 Modern communication systems 15 CO5

TOTAL 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) UseAnalog communication, AM&FM detectors and receivers.
Course
Acquaint with pulse modulation techniques
Objectives
ii) Acquaint with modern communication
CO1 AEI-506.1 Explain analog modulation techniques i.e AM & FM.
CO2 AEI-506.2 Explain the principles of AM and FM detectors and Receivers.
Course CO3 AEI-506.3 Explain the Principles of pulse modulation.
outcomes CO4 AEI-506.4 Explain the different digital modulation techniques ASK, FSK &
PSK.
CO5 AEI-506.5 Explain the principles of modern communication systems.
1.0 Analog communication
1.1 Draw block diagram of basic communication system and explain
each block.
1.2 Define modulation and state the need for Modulation in
Learning communication system.
Outcomes 1.3 Name the different types of Analog modulation methods.
1.4 Explain AM, FM and PM with waveforms and give their expressions.
1.5 Explain SSB, DSBSC and VSB.
1.6 List the merits and demerits of AM and FM.
1.7 Distinguish between FM and PM.
1.8 Explain AM generation using base circuits and collector circuits.
1.9 Draw the block diagram and explain AM transmitter.
1.10 Explain the methods of FM generation by using Reactance tube
and Varactor diode.
1.11 Draw the block diagram and explain FM transmitter.

2.0 AM and FM detectors and Receivers.

346
 2.1 Explain the principle of TRF receiver.
2.2 State the need for heterodyning in radio receiver.
2.3 Draw and explain the block diagram of super heterodyne receiver.
2.4 Define the terms selectivity, sensitivity, fidelity and Image Frequency
Rejection.
2.5 Explain the basic principle of operation of AM detector.
2.6 Draw and explain single diode detector circuit.
2.7 List FM demodulator circuits.
2.8 Draw and explain Fosters – Seely demodulator.
2.9 Draw and explain FM receiver.
3.0 Pulse modulation
3.1 State the principle of pulse modulation.
3.2 List different types of pulse modulation methods.
3.3 Sketch the waveforms of PAM, PPM, PWM
3.4 Explain PCM with Block Diagram.
3.5 List the merits of PCM.
3.6 List the applications of the above four types of modulation.
3.7. List the digital modulation methods.
3.8 Draw the waveforms of ASK, FSK and PSK.
3.9 List the applications of ASK, FSK and PSK.
3.10 List different types of multiplexing methods and explain them with
neat diagrams
4.0 Modern Communication Systems
4.1 State the basic principle of Radar with a block diagram.
4.2 Explain the principle of fibre optic communication with a block
diagram.
4.3 List the Transmitters and receivers used in fibre optic communication.
4.4 Explain the principle of Satellite communication system.
4.5 Explain uplink and downlink and the frequencies used in satellite
communication system.
4.6 Explain the principle of cellular communication.
4.7 Explain FDMA, TDMA and CDMA.
4.8 List the features of GSM Mobile Technology.
4.9 List the features of CDMA Technology.
4.10 Compare CDMA &GSM.

347
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 1 1 1 1 2 1
506.1

AEI- 1 1 1 1 2 1
506.2

AEI- 1 1 1 1 2 1
506.3

AEI- 1 1 1 1 2 1
506.4

AEI- 1 1 1 1 2 1
506.5

Average 1 1 1 1 2 1
3= Strongly mapped
2= Moderately mapped
1= Slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENTS

1.0 Analog Communication

Modulation, AM, FM, PM, SSB, DSB and VSB, Generation of AM and FM, AM Transmitter, FM
Transmitter.
2.0 AM and FM Detectors / Receivers
TRF Receiver, Super heterodyne Receiver, Selectivity, Sensitivity and Fidelity, FM Receiver,
Diode detector, Foster-Seely Demodulator.
3.0 Pulse Modulation
Principle of pulse modulation, PAM, PWM, PPM, PCM and Applications, ASK, FSK and
PSK.Multiplexing methods.
4.0 Modern communication systems
Radar, Fibre optic communication, Satellite communication, GSM Mobile Technology, CDMA,
and GSM.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mobile Cellular Telecommunications - by William C.Y. Lee
2. Satellite Communication - by Martin
3. Communication systems - by Simon Hawkins
4. Electronic Communication Systems - by Kennedy
5. Wireless communication Systems - by William shallings
7. Principles of communication engineering –by Anokhsiagh and A K Chhapra
8. Principles of communication engineering –by Kennedy

348
 BLUE PRINT

Marks wise Question wise

Weight Distribution of Distribution of
S. Major Topics No. of COs
age of Weightage Weightage
No periods Mapped
marks A
R U Ap R U Ap An
n
Analog 16 CO1
1 17 9 8 3 1
communication
AM and FM 13 CO2
2 detectors, 14 6 8 2 1
receivers
Pulse modulation 16 CO3,C04
3 14 6 8 2 1

Modern 15 CO5
4 communication 25 9 16 3 2
systems
Higher order
question from 10 10 1 CO1 to CO5
chapters 1 to 4
60
Total 80 30 32 18 - 10 4 2 - -

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT tests.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.9

Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 4.10

349
 C-20-AEI-506

BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)

DAEIE- FIFTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Time: 3 Hours Total Marks: 80M

PART- A3×10=30

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) Each question carries three marks
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five
simple sentences.

1. Draw block diagram of basic communication system. (CO1)

2. Name any three types of Analog modulation methods. (CO1)

3. Distinguish between FM and PM in any three aspects. (CO2)

4. State the need for heterodyning in radio receiver. (CO2)

5. List FM demodulator circuits. (CO2)

6. State the principle of pulse modulation. (CO3)

7. List three merits of PCM. (CO4)

8. Sketch the waveforms of PAM (CO4)

9. Compare CDMA &GSM. (CO5)

10. State the basic principle of Radar. (CO5)

350
 PART- B
5×8=40
Instructions: (1) Answer either (A) or (B) from each question, each question carries Eight marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.

11. (A). Explain AM generation using collector circuits. (CO1)

or
(B). Explain AM with waveforms and give their expressions. (CO1)

12. (A). Explain the basic principle of operation of AM detector. (CO2)

or
(B). Explain the principle of TRF receiver. (CO2)

13. (A). Explain PCM with Block Diagram. (CO3)

Or
(B). List different types of multiplexing methods and explain any one of them with neat
diagram. (CO4)

14. (A). Explain the principle of fibre optic communication with a block diagram. (CO5)
Or
(B). (a)Explain uplink and downlink and the frequencies used in satellite
communication system. (CO5) 4M
(b) List the features of GSM Mobile Technology. (CO5) 4M

15. (A). Explain the principle of cellular communication. (CO5)

Or
(B). Explain FDMA technique. (CO5)

PART- C
1×10=10
Instructions: (1) Answer the following question carries ten marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.

16. Draw and explain single diode detector circuit (CO2)

***

351
 DAEIE- FIRST UNIT TEST
MODEL QUESTION PAPER(C-20)
COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING (AEI-506)
Time: 90 Mins. Total Marks: 40M

PART- A Total: 16M

Instructions: (1) Answer all questions

(2) First question carries four marks and each of rest carries three marks
(3) Answers for Q.NO.2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall not
exceed five simple sentences.

1. i) Define modulation. (CO1) 4X1M=4M

ii)For AM receivers the standard IF frequency is ------- (CO2)
iii) Fidelity means____. (CO2)
iv) In a FM receiver, amplitude limiter eliminates any change in amplitude of received FM
signals.(T/F) (CO2)
2. Name three types of analog modulation methods (CO2) 3M
3. List the merits and demerits of AM (CO2) 3M

4.Define the term selectivity. (CO2) 3M

5. List FM demodulator circuits. (CO2) 3M

PART- B
3×8M=24M
Instructions: Answer either (A) or (B) from each question andeach question carries Eight marks

6. (A). Explain the methods of FM generation by using varactor diode. (CO1)

or
(B). Draw block diagram of basic communication system and explain each block. (CO1)

7. (A). Explain AM generation using base circuits. (CO1)

Or
(B). Draw and explain the block diagram of super heterodyne receiver. (CO2)

8. (A). Draw and explain single diode detector circuit. (CO2)

or
(B). Draw and explain FM receiver. (CO2)

***

352
 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION LAB

No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks

Course code Course title per week periods for FA for SA

AEI-507 BIO MEDICAL 45 40 60

3
INSTRUMENTATION
LAB

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Measurement of non-Electrical Parameters 06 CO1

2 Diagnostic Medical Instruments 18 CO2

3 Therapeutic Instruments 06 CO3

4 Modern Medical Imaging Systems 15 CO4

TOTAL 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Measure the blood pressure using sphygmomanometer & Digital BP
(ii) meter.
Course
(iii) Record the ECG, EEG, EMG waveforms.
Objecti
ves (iv) Use defibrillator.

Demonstrate the X-ray Machine.

CO1 Use of sphygmomanometer and digital BP meter to measure blood

AEI-507.1
pressure.
Course
CO2 Use of ECG, EEG, EMGto record the waveforms.
outco AEI-507.2
CO3 Working of defibrillator.
mes AEI-507.3

CO4 Know the working of X-ray Machine and CT scanner.

AEI-507.4

353
 I. Measurement of non-electrical parameters:

1). Measure the blood pressure i.e systolic and diastolic blood pressure using
sphygmomanometer.

2). Measure the blood pressure using automated digital blood pressure
monitor.

II. Diagnostic Medical Instruments:

3). Obtain PQRSTU waveform from ECG.

Learnin
g 4). Record the EEG waveform.

Outco 5). Record the EMG waveform.

mes
III. Therapeutic Instruments:

6). Study the use of defibrillator.

IV. Modern Medical Imaging Systems

7). Study and demonstration of X-ray machine.

8). Study the use of CT scanner.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
507.1

AEI- 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
507.2

AEI- 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
507.3

AEI- 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
507.4

Average 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 1

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

354
 LIFE SKILLS
Course Code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for SA
Periods/Week Periods for FA

AEI-508 Life Skills 3 45 40 60

S. No. Unit Title No of Periods COs Mapped

Attitude 4
1 CO1
Adaptability 4
2 CO1, CO2
Goal Setting 4
3 CO1, CO2, CO3
Motivation 4
4 CO1, CO2, CO3
Time Management 4
5 CO2
Critical thinking 4
6 CO3
Creativity 4
7 CO3
Problem Solving 5
8 CO3
Team Work 4
9 CO4
Leadership 4
10 CO4
Stress Management 4
11 CO4

Total Periods 45

To Explainthe importance of Life skills for acceptable, sustainable and

ethical behaviour in academic, professional and social settings

To exhibit language competence appropriate to acceptable social and

Course Objectives professional behaviour.

To demonstrate time management, stress management, team skills,

problem solving ability to manage oneself in academic, professional and
social settings.

355
 CO No. Course Outcomes

CO1 Demonstrates positive attitude and be able to adapt to people and events
CO2 Fixes personal and professional goals and manages time to meet targets
CO3 Exhibits critical and lateral thinking skills for problem solving.
CO4 Shows aptitude for working in teams in a stress free manner and sometimes/ very
often/ mostly display leadership traits.

CO-PO Matrix
Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 45

AEI-508 Number of Course Outcomes: 4

POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks

with CO Column 1 Mapping
No.
Number Percentage % (1,2,3)

PO1 Not directly applicable for Life Skills Course. However activities that
use content and situations from academic, professional and social
PO2 settings relevant to the Programme shall be exploited for triggering
thought and interaction in the Course.
PO3

PO4

PO5 CO1, CO2, 11 25% >60%: Level 3

CO3, CO 4

PO6 CO1, CO2, 27 45% 16 -59%: Level 2

CO3, CO4

PO7 CO1, CO2, 7 30%

Up to 15%: Level 1
CO3, CO4

Level 3 – Strongly Mapped

Level 2- Moderately Mapped
Level 1- Slightly Mapped

356
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:

CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7

CO 1   

CO 2   

CO3   

CO4   

Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:

Note: Every Activity based Question that focuses on COs and responses as exhibited through
communication has to be given marks for the following parameters

 Clarity of Thinking as Exhibited through Content

 Features of Etiquette

*Rubric Descriptors ‘Outstanding/ Very Good/ Good/ Satisfactory/ Poor’ levels of Competence

Level of Parameters of Assessment

Competence
Clarity of thinking as exhibited through content Features of etiquette
Thinking is extremely logical and suggested course of
action is feasibile Exhibits courtesy to all most
Outstanding Shows creativity and uniqueness appropriately with
10
Exhibits expert use of expression (organizational devices confidence
and discourse markers) that denote clarity in thought.
Thinking is clear and logical
Suggested course of action is feasible
Exhibits courtesy to all to a
Very Good Shows traces of creativity
8/9 considerable level.
Exhibits good expression (organizational devices and
discourse markers) that denote clarity in thought.
Thinking is clear and logical most of the time. Lacks Exhibits courtesy /
Good creativity or out of the box thinking as expressed politeness to an acceptable
6/7
through content. level.
Thinking is logical; However expressing content is Has courtesy but often
Satisfactory
4/5 disjointed and disorganized. fumbles with language.
Thoughts as expressed through content are Fails to show courtesy to
Poor
3 or less than 3 incoherent.Language skills are very limited. others.

357
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.

S Questions based on Course Periods Max Poo Satisfact Goo Ver Outstandi
No Outcomes Allocat Mar r ory d y ng
. ed for ks >3 4 /5 6/7 Goo 10
practic d
al work 8/9
1 Short presentation on GOALS
12 10
with Timeline and Action Plan
2 State what you will do in the
given situation (Assesses
adaptability and critical 12 10
thinking skills, leadership, team
skills )
3 In how many different and
creative way can you use _____
8 10
(Object) other than its primary
use
4 What solutions can you think of
13 10
for _____ problem.

Total 45 60

Note: The marks that are awarded for the student for 40 to be increased proportionally for 60.

LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. Attitude Matters :
1.1 Explainthe importance of positive attitude and the consequences of negative
attitude.
1.2 Demonstrate positive attitude in dealing with work-related issues and in personal
life.
2. Adaptability….makes life easy :
2.1 Explainthe significance of adaptability.
2.2 Show adaptability whenever needed, both at place of work and on personal front.
3. Goal Setting … life without a Goal is a rudderless boat!
3.2 Explainthe SMART features of goal-setting.
3.3 State one’s short-term and long-term goals and spell out plans to achieve them.
4. Motivation … triggers success!
4.2 Comprehend the need for motivation in order to achieve success in life.
4.3 State how one is motivated in life.
4.4 Show the impact of motivation on one’s life

358
5. Time Management… the need of the Hour!
5.2 Explainthe value of time management and prioritizing in life
5.3 Demonstrate the effect of time management on one’s professional work.
6. Critical Thinking … logic is the key!
6.1 Distinguish between facts and assumptions
6.2 Use logical thinking in dealing with professional matters
7. Creativity … the essential you!
7.2 Explainthe importance of thinking out of the box in dealing with critical issues
7.3 Solve problems using creativity / imagination
8. Problem Solving … there is always a way out!
8.2 State the need for and importance of problem solving.
8.3 Use logic or creativity to solve a problem at workplace or home.
9. Team Work… together we are better!
9.1 State the need for team skills / team building
9.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
10. Leadership… the meaning of a leading!
10.1 State the need for team skills / team building
10.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
11. Stress Management… live life to the full!
11.1 Explainwhat causes stress and how to cope with stress at workplace.
11.2 Demonstrate how stress can be overcome in a healthy way.

359
 PLC & SCADA LAB

Course No of periods Total no. of Marks Marks

Course title per week
code periods for FA for SA

AEI-509 PLC & SCADA LAB 3 45 40 60

S.NO Major Topics No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Familiarization of PLC trainer 03 CO1

2 PLC Programming 18 CO2

3 Interfacing with PLC 12 CO3

4 SCADA 12 CO4

TOTAL 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(I) Use PLC Trainer.
Course (ii) Use the Ladder diagram programming.
Objectives (iii) Explain the interfacing with PLC.
(iv) Explain the use of SCADA Software.

CO1 AEI-509.1 Use PLC Trainer.

Course CO2 AEI-509.2 Application of Ladder programming.
outcomes CO3 AEI-509.3 Implementation of interfacing pheripherals with PLC.
CO4 AEI-509.4 Use of SCADA Software for creation of graphic symbols.

I. Familiarization with PLC. 1

01. Familiarization with PLC trainer.
II. PLC programming.
02. Implement the basic logic gates (AND, OR, NOT) using ladder programming.
03. Implement the Universal gates (NAND, NOR) using Ladder programming L
04. Implement the EX-OR and Ex-NOR gates using PLC.
Learning 05. Write the program on ON-Delay Timer and OFF-delay Timer using Ladder
Outcomes programming.
06. Write the program on Retentive and non-retentive Timer using Ladder diagram
programming.
07. Write the program on Up counter and Down Counter using Ladder diagram
programming.

360
 III. Interfacing with PLC.
08. Implement the Traffic light controller using PLC with Ladder
diagram programming.
09. Implement the Sequential control of induction motor using PLC
with Ladder diagram programming.
10. Implement the Conveyer controller using PLC with Ladder
programming.
11. Implement the Level controller using PLC with Ladder programming.
IV. SCADA
12. Implement the Sequential control of induction motor using SCADA software
13. Implement the Conveyer controller using SCADA software.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 1 1 2 3 2 1
509.1

AEI- 2 2 2 3 2 1
509.2

AEI- 2 2 2 3 2 1
509.3

AEI- 2 2 2 3 2 1
509.4

Average 1.75 1.75 2 3 2 1

3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

361
 FIELD PRACTICES

Course Course title No of Total no Marks Marks

Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA
AEI-510 FIELD PRACTICES 03 45 40 60

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

I Calibration 09 CO1

II Preparation of PCB 06 CO2

III Design of a Industrial Process using P&ID 03 CO3

IV PC hardware and software 15 CO4

V UPS, Biometric access system and CCTV 12 CO5

Total 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to:

1. Calibration of temperature transmitter and bourdon tube and
troubleshooting of CRO.

2. Know the Preparation of PCB

Course
Objectives
3. Design of a industrial process using P&ID
4. Know the PC hardware and install the system and application
software’s.
5. Know the UPS, Biometric access system and CCTV

CO1 AEI-510.1 Calibration of temperature transmitter and bourdon tube.

Course Out CO2 AEI-510.2 Know the Preparation of PCB

comes
CO3 AEI-510.3 Design of a industrial process using P&ID
Know the PC hardware and install the system and
CO4 AEI-510.4 application software’s

CO5 AEI-510.5 Know the UPS, Biometric access system and CCTV

362
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. Calibration and troubleshooting.

1. Calibration of temperature transmitter using decade resistance box.
2. Calibration of bourdon tube using dead weight tester.
3. Troubleshooting of CRO.
II. Preparation of PCB
4. Preparation of PCB using copper clad for a particular circuit (Use ORCAD).
III. Design of a Industrial Process using P&ID
5. Design and draw a circuit for an industrial process using P&ID.
IV. PC hardware and software
6. Assembling and dissembling of a PC.
7. Installing system and application software.
8. Install and configure of different printers.
9. Practice on partition and formatting of hard disk.
10. Implementation of Wi-Fi network.
V. UPS, Biometric access system and CCTV
11. Know the sequence of operations of switching ON/OFF of UPS and note down the ratings of
UPS.
12. Installation, testing and maintenance of biometric access system.
13. Identify the components and tools required to identify the CCTVs.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AEI- 1 3 3 2
510.1

AEI- 1 3 3 2
510.2

AEI- 1 3 3 2
510.3

AEI- 2 3 2
510.4

AEI- 3 3 2
510.5

Average 1 2 3 3 2
3= strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped

363
 PROJECT WORK

Sub. Name Sub. Code No.periods /Week No.Periods /Semester

PROJECT WORK AEI-511 03 45

In the project work the students should prepare a project report based on the observations
of a nearby industry/ industries . They should also prepare a product and arrive at the costs for
settling up an enterprise as per the norms required by the financial/industrial promotion agencies
utilising techno entrepreneurship programmes in the manufacture or service industries .if the above
suggested project is not possible ,they may choose a project .which is practical utility involving
theoretical and practical skills and to execute the same.

364
VI SEMESTER

365
 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Course Title : Industrial Training

Course Code : AEI-601
Duration : 6 months
Time schedule
S.NO Code TOPICS Duration

 Practical training in Industry

 Training Report Preparation
Report Preparation: Title Page, Certificate, Six
1 AEI-601 Acknowledgements, Abstract, Contents(introduction of Months
Industry, Plant Layout, Organization Chart, List of Major
Equipments, List of Processes: Skills Acquired; Conclusions;
References

Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.Expose to real time working environment
2. Enhance knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.
3. Acquire the required skills of manufacturing processes,
Course Objectives
assembling, servicing, supervising in the engineering fields.
4. Install the good qualities of integrity, responsibility and self
confidence.
COURSE OUT CO1 Apply theory to practical work situations
COMES CO2 Cultivate sense of responsibility and good work habits
CO3 Exhibit the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
CO4 Write report in technical projects
PO-CO Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 2 1 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low
Learning Outcomes

The student shall be able to display the following skill sets

1) Technical Skills (Procedure for installation of sensors and transducers , calibration

procedures /Servicing of instruments / maintenance of instruments/ process control
procedure of process variables like temperature, flow , pressure , level etc / use and
applications of different softwares of PLC and SCADA/ microcontroller applications)
2) Draw of P& I diagrams of different process / instruments.
3) Analyzing different specifications of all instruments used in process/ industry.
4) Recognize and practice of safety measures.
5) Handling of Tools/Instruments/controllers/control valves.
6) Troubleshooting.

366
Scheme of evaluation

SI. Course Duration Scheme of evaluation

No. Max.
Item Nature
Marks

Assessment of
Learning
1.First
outcomes by
Assessment at
both the faculty 120
Industry (After 12
and training
Weeks)
Mentor of the
industry

Assessment of
Learning
Industrial 2.Second
1 6 months outcomes by
Training Assessment at the
both the faculty 120
Industry (After 22
and training
weeks)
Mentor of the
industry

Final Summative Training Report 20

assessment at
Demonstration
institution level
of any one of the
30
skills listed in
learning
outcomes

Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 300

Weightage of marks for Assessment of Skill sets during first and second assessment.

Skill Max Marks Allotted

Set SKILL SET For each parameter
Sl.No
1 Technical skills 30
2 Draw P & I diagrams 15
3 Analyzing different specifications 15
4 Recognize and practice of safety measures 10
5 Handling of tools 20
6 Troubleshooting 30
Total 120

367
 During assessment the performance of the students shall be assessed in those skills in which
the student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per the weightage assigned as above. In
case the student has undergone training in a few skill sets then the total marks obtained shall be
raised to 120 marks for the given assessment i.e. either assessment 1 or 2. However the
performance of the student shall be assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than
three skill sets.
Illustration
If the student has undergone training in only 4 skill sets (namely serial number 1, 3, 4, 5 of
above skill sets) and marks awarded during assessment is 50 out of 80 marks, then the marks of 50
shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (50/75)*120=66.67.

GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

1. Duration of the training: 6 months.
2. Eligibility: The As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students may be trained in the fields
Fabrication/Foundry/Manufacturing/Service/Drafting/Maintenance etc.
4. The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance during Industrial Training.
5. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall reappear
for 6 months industrial training.
6. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the Mentor from of the industry,
where the student is undergoing training and the faculty in charge (Guide) from the concerned
section in the institution.
7. The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessments at industry
(first and second assessment) and final summative assessment at institution level put together
i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks.
8. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level, the
student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board examination.
9. Final Summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including Head of the
section( of concerned discipline ONLY),, External examiner and Faculty members who assessed
the students during Industrial Training as members.

Guidelines and responsibilities of the faculty members who are assessing the students
performance during industrial training:

 Shall guide the students in all aspects regarding training.

 Shall create awareness regarding safety measures to be followed in the industry during the
training period, and shall check it scrupulously.
 Shall check the logbook of the students during the time of their visit for the assessment.
 Shall monitor progress at regular intervals and make appropriate suggestions for
improvement.
 Shall visit the industry and make first and second assessments as per stipulated schedules.
 Shall assess the skill sets acquired by the students during their assessment.
 Shall award the marks for each skill set as per the marks allotted for that skill set during 1 st
and 2nd assessments
 Shall voluntarily supplement students learning through appropriate materials like
photographs, articles, videos etc.
 Shall act as co-examiner along with other examiners in the final assessment at institution.
 Shall act as liaison between the student and mentor.

368
  Shall maintain a diary indicating his observation with respect to the progress of students
learning in all three domains (Cognitive, Psychomotor and Affective).
Guidelines to the Training Mentor in the industry:

 Shall train the students in all the skill sets as far as possible.
 Shall assess and award the marks in both the assessments along with the faculty member.
 Shall check and approve the log books of the students.
 Shall approve the attendance of each student at the end of the training period.
 Shall report to the guide about student’s progress, personality development or any
misbehavior as the case may be.
 Every Teacher (including HoD if not holding any FAC) shall be assigned a batch of students
of 10 to 15 for industrial training irrespective of student’s placements for training.

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

NAME OF THE INSTITUTION
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING ASSESSMENT
PIN:
NAME OF THE STUDENT:

Skill Max Percentage of Marks to be awarded

Set SKILL SET Marks 100% 80% 50% 20%
Sl.No Allotted Precisely Completed Completed the Attempted
For each completed with work but lack of work but
parameter the work reasonable perfection. not
perfection completed

1 Technical skills
i) installation and 10
calibration
ii) servicing and 10
maintanence
iii) Use of softwares 10
2 Drawing of P&I diagrams 15
3 Analysing of specifications 15
4 Safety measures 10
5 Handiling of Instruments 20
6 Troubleshooting 30
(Marks in words: )

Signature of the Training In-charge (Mentor) Signature of the visiting staff

(Guide)

Name: Name:

Designation: Designation:

369